OWNER´S MANUAL
ŠKODA KAMIQ
Your Owner’s Manual
Electronic version available on the Internet
http://go.skoda.eu/owners-manuals
ŠKODA KAMIQ 07.2019
Angličtina/English
658012720AA
Documentation of vehicle delivery
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
Date of vehicle delivery ____ / ____ / ________
ŠKODA Partner
Stamp and signature of the vendor
I confirm that I have taken delivery of the vehicle in good condition, have received information on how to
operate it correctly, and have had the terms of the warranty explained to me.
Signature of the customer
Does the vehicle have an extended warranty?
YES
NO
Limitations of the ŠKODA extended warranty
a)
_______________
or
_______________
or
_______________
a)
Depending on which comes first.
Years:
km/mileage:
Miles:
Reprinting, duplicating, translating and any other use, either in whole or in part, is not permitted without the
written consent of ŠKODA AUTO a.s.
ŠKODA AUTO a.s. expressly reserves all rights relating to copyright laws.
Subject to change.
Issued by: ŠKODA AUTO a.s.
© ŠKODA AUTO a.s. 2019
658012720AA
Vehicle owner
First Vehicle owner Second Vehicle owner
This vehicle with the registration plate
__________________________________________
belongs to:
Title, name/company:
__________________________________________
__________________________________________
Address:
__________________________________________
__________________________________________
__________________________________________
Telephone:
__________________________________________
ŠKODA Partner:
Service consultant:
__________________________________________
Telephone:
__________________________________________
This vehicle with the registration plate
__________________________________________
belongs to:
Title, name/company:
__________________________________________
__________________________________________
Address:
__________________________________________
__________________________________________
__________________________________________
Telephone:
__________________________________________
ŠKODA Partner:
Service consultant:
__________________________________________
Telephone:
__________________________________________
1
Vehicle owner
658012720AA
Table of Contents
1 Vehicle owner
5 About the Owner's Manual
5 About the Owner's Manual
6 Explanations
7 Vehicle overviews
7 Front vehicle area
8 Rear vehicle area
9 Driver's seat
9 Centre console and passenger seat
10 Engine compartment
10 Indicator lights
10 Functionality
10 Indicator light overview
13 Correct and safe
13 Introductory notes for correct use
13 New vehicle or new parts
13 Regular checks
13 No improper vehicle adjustments
13 Keeping sensors and cameras in working
order
14 Engine compartment
14 Vehicle battery
14 Using electrical sockets in the vehicle
14 Before your journey
16 Safe driving
17 Emergency call
18 After an accident
19 Keys, locks and alarm system
19 Key
19 Central locking
21 Keyless locking (KESSY)
22 Alarm system
23 Doors, windows and boot lid
23 Doors
23 Child safety lock on the rear doors
23 Protective door strip
24 Window - with manual operation
24 Window - with electrical operation
25 Sunblind - with electrical operation
25 Sun visors
25 Heated windscreen
26 Boot lid - with manual operation
26 Boot lid - with electrical control
27 Unlocking the boot lid
28 Seats, steering wheel and mirror
28 Front seat - with manual operation
28 Front seat - with electrical operation
28 Rear seats
29 Headrests
29 Front armrest
29 Rear armrest
29 Seat heating
30 Steering wheel
30 Heated steering wheel
31 Interior rear-view mirror
31 Exterior mirror
32 Restraint systems and airbags
32 Seat belts
33 Child seat
35 Fasteners for child seats
37 Airbags
37 Key switch for the front passenger airbag
39 Lighting, windscreen wipers and
washers
39 Exterior lighting
41 COMING HOME, LEAVING HOME exterior
lighting
41 Light Assist high-beam assist system
42 Replace light bulbs
43 Interior lighting
43 Interior ambient light
43 Windscreen wipers and washers
46 Heating and air conditioning system
46 Heating
46 Manual air conditioning
47 Climatronic automatic air conditioning system
48 Driver information system
48 Analogue instrument panel
49 Digital instrument cluster
50 Instrument cluster display
51 Driving data
52 Speed limit warning
52 Vehicle condition
53 Infotainment Swing
53 Infotainment overview
53 System
55 Screen
55 Infotainment keyboard
56 Radio
58 Media
61 Mobile device management
62 Telephone
64 Wi-Fi
65 SmartLink
67 ŠKODA Connect online services
69 Infotainment Bolero
69 Infotainment overview
69 System
71 Screen
71 Infotainment keyboard
72 Radio
74 Media
77 Mobile device management
78 Telephone
2
Table of Contents
80 Wi-Fi
81 SmartLink
83 ŠKODA Connect online services
85 Infotainment Amundsen
85 Infotainment overview
85 System
87 Screen
88 Infotainment keyboard
89 Voice control
90 Radio
92 Media
95 Images
96 User management
97 Mobile device management
98 Telephone
101 Wi-Fi
103 SmartLink
105 ŠKODA Connect online services
106 Navigation
111 Starting and driving
111 Starting with the key
112 Start at the push of a button
112 Starting issues
113 START STOP
113 Manual gearbox
114 Automatic gearbox
115 Vehicle driving mode
116 Economical driving style
117 Towing a trailer
118 Towing eye and towing procedure
118 Brakes
119 Handbrake
120 Driver assist systems
120 Braking and stabilising systems
121 Front Assist
121 Pedestrian detection system
122 Speed limiter
123 Cruise control system
124 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
126 Lane Assist
126 Lane change assist system Side Assist
127 Crew Protect Assist proactive occupant
protection
128 Driver Alert fatigue detection assistant
128 Park Assist systems
128 Park Pilot parking aid
129 Rear view camera
130 Rear Trac Alert
130 Park steering assistant
132 Engine, exhaust system and fuel
132 Bonnet
133 Engine oil
133 Coolant
134 Engine electronics
135 Particle filter
135 Exhaust control system
135 Fuel filter
135 Fuel filler flap
135 AdBlue
136 Petrol
138 Diesel
139 Vehicle battery and fuses
139 Vehicle battery
140 Using the jump-starting cable
141 Fuses
141 Fuses in the dash panel
143 Fuses in the engine compartment
144 Wheels
144 Tyres and rims
145 All-season or winter tires
145 Snow chains
145 Spare and emergency spare wheel
146 Changing the wheel and raising the vehicle
147 Breakdown kit
149 Tyre pressure
149 Tyre pressure monitoring system
150 Wheel bolt cover caps
150 Full wheel frame
151 Storage space and interior equipment
151 Equipment in the boot
151 Emergency equipment
151 Fasteners in the boot
152 Fastening nets
153 Storage pocket
153 Net partition
153 Double-sided floor covering
153 Removable light
154 Rigid boot cover
154 Variable loading floor in the boot
155 Overview of passenger compartment
156 Storage compartment under the front seat
156 Storage compartment for an umbrella
156 Phonebox
157 Cup holder
157 Multimedia holder
157 Waste container
157 Ashtray and cigarette lighter
158 Folding table
158 12-Volt power socket
159 Roof rack and hitch
159 Roof rack
159 Swivelling hitch
161 Maintaining and cleaning
161 Service events
161 Service work, adjustments and technical
changes
162 Interior
162 Exterior
3
Table of Contents
164 Technical data and specifications
164 Requirements for the technical data
164 Vehicle identification data
165 Maximum permissible weights
165 Operating weight
166 Vehicle dimensions
166 Engine specifications
167 Event Data Recorder
168 Information about the radio systems in the
vehicle
168 Rights arising from defective performance,
ŠKODA Warranty for new cars, ŠKODA
Mobility Warranty and Optional ŠKODA
Extended Warranty
170 Index
4
Table of Contents
About the Owner's Manual
General
This Owner's Manual applies to all chassis variants
of the vehicle, including all models and trim levels.
All possible trim levels are described here without
identifying them as special trims, model variants or
market-dependent equipment. This means that not
all the trim components described in this Owner's
Manual are available in your vehicle.
The images in this Owner’s Manual are for illustra-
tive purposes only. The images may dier from your
vehicle; these are for general information purposes
only.
ŠKODA AUTO is constantly working on the further
development of all vehicles. It is therefore possible
for changes to be made at any time to the scope of
delivery in terms of shape, equipment and technolo-
gy. The information contained in this Owner's Man-
ual corresponds to the information available at the
time of going to press.
No legal claims can therefore be derived from the
technical data, illustrations and information in this
Owner’s Manual.
Electronic version of the Owner's Manual
The printed Owner’s Manual contains the most im-
portant information regarding vehicle operation and
vehicle maintenance.
Complete information is included in the electronic
version of the Owner's Manual. This is available on
the ŠKODAweb pages as well as in the mobile appli-
cation MyŠKODA, which can be downloaded.
▶
http://go.skoda.eu/owners-manuals
About the Owner's Manual
General
This Owner's Manual applies to all chassis variants
of the vehicle, including all models and trim levels.
All possible trim levels are described here without
identifying them as special trims, model variants or
market-dependent equipment. This means that not
all the trim components described in this Owner's
Manual are available in your vehicle.
The images in this Owner’s Manual are for illustra-
tive purposes only. The images may dier from your
vehicle; these are for general information purposes
only.
ŠKODA AUTO is constantly working on the further
development of all vehicles. It is therefore possible
for changes to be made at any time to the scope of
delivery in terms of shape, equipment and technolo-
gy. The information contained in this Owner's Man-
ual corresponds to the information available at the
time of going to press.
No legal claims can therefore be derived from the
technical data, illustrations and information in this
Owner’s Manual.
5
About the Owner's Manual
Explanations
Terms used
- A workshop that carries out
specialist service tasks for ŠKODA vehicles. A
specialist can be a ŠKODA Partner, a ŠKODA
Service Partner, or an independent workshop.
- A workshop that has
been contractually authorised by ŠKODA AUTO
or its distribution partner to perform service
work on ŠKODA vehicles and to sell ŠKODA
Genuine Parts.
- A company that has been con-
tractually authorised by ŠKODA AUTO or its dis-
tribution partner to sell new ŠKODA vehicles
and, when applicable, to service them using
ŠKODA Genuine Parts and sell ŠKODA Genuine
Parts.
Text notes
- short press (e.g. a button) within 1 second
- long press (e.g. a button) for more than 1
second
Direction indications
All direction indications, such as “left”, “right”,
“front”, “rear”, relate to the forwards direction of
travel of the vehicle.
DANGER
Texts with this symbol indicate dangerous situations
which, if the safety instructions are not observed,
will result in death or serious injury.
WARNING
Texts with this symbol indicate dangerous situations
which, if the safety instructions are not observed,
could result in death or serious injury.
CAUTION
Texts marked with this symbol indicate dangerous
situations which, if the safety instructions are not
observed, could result in minor or moderate injury.
NOTICE
Texts with this symbol indicate situations which, if
the corresponding instructions are not observed, will
result in damage to the vehicle.
Texts with this symbol contain additional informa-
tion.
“Specialist garage”
“ŠKODA Service Partner”
“ŠKODA Partner”
“Press”
“Hold”
6
Explanations
Vehicle overviews
Front vehicle area
A
Under the windscreen
▶
Camera for assist systems
▶
Light sensor for automatic driving light circuit » page 39
▶
Rain sensor for automatic wiping » page 44
B
Bonnet release lever (under the flap) » page 132
C
Headlight washers » page 44
D
Front radar sensor for assist systems
E
Cover for screw-in towing eye socket » page 118
F
Ultrasonic sensors for assist systems
G
Door handles
▶
Open the door » page 23
▶
Keyless locking (KESSY) » page 21
H
Roof rails » page 159
›
Keep the sensors and cameras for the assist systems clean » page 13.
7
Vehicle overviews › Front vehicle area
Rear vehicle area
A
Handle of the boot lid
▶
Manually operated boot lid » page 26
▶
Electrically operated boot lid » page 26
▶
Camera for assist systems
B
Radar sensors for assist systems (in the bumper)
C
Ultrasonic sensors for assist systems
D
Swivelling hitch » page 159
E
Cover for screw-in towing eye socket » page 118
F
Fuel filler flap » page 135
▶
Sticker with tyre pressures » page 149
▶
Sticker with prescribed fuel
▶
Ice scraper
▶
Filler neck of the AdBlue
®
tank » page 136
›
Keep the sensors and cameras for the assist systems clean » page 13.
8
Vehicle overviews › Rear vehicle area
Driver's seat
A
Side Assist lane change assist system indicator
light » page 126
B
Door opening lever » page 23
C
Light switch » page 39
D
Air outlet nozzle
E
Control lever:
▶
Flashing and high beam » page 39
▶
Cruise control » page 123
▶
Speed limiter » page 122
▶
High-beam assist system » page 41
F
Buttons/dials on the multifunction steering
wheel » page 50
G
Depending on the equipment:
▶
Analogue instrument cluster » page 48
▶
Digital instrument cluster » page 49
H
Control lever:
▶
Windscreen wipers and washers » page 44
▶
Information system » page 50
I
Depending on the equipment:
▶
Ignition lock » page 111
▶
Starter button » page 112
J
Steering wheel with horn/with driver's front air-
bag » page 37
K
Safety lever for steering wheel adjust-
ment » page 30
L
Operation of the automatic distance con-
trol » page 124
M
Bonnet release lever » page 132
N
Button for the electric boot lid » page 26
O
Exterior mirror operation » page 31
P
Window operation » page 24
Centre console and passenger seat
A
Infotainment (depending on trim level):
▶
Amundsen » page 85
▶
Bolero » page 69
▶
Swing » page 53
B
Central locking button » page 20
C
Hazard warning system button » page 39
D
Air outlet nozzle
E
Door opening lever » page 23
F
Side Assist lane change assist system indicator
light » page 126
G
Window operation in the passenger
door » page 24
H
Operation (depending on the trim level):
▶
Heating » page 46
▶
Manual air conditioning » page 46
▶
Climatronic » page 47
I
Buttons (depending on the equipment):
▶
START-STOP » page 113
▶
Park Pilot » page 128
▶
Park Assist » page 130
▶
Driving mode selection » page 115
J
Parking brake » page 119
K
Depending on the equipment:
▶
Shift lever (manual transmission) » page 113
▶
Selector lever (automatic transmis-
sion) » page 114
9
Vehicle overviews › Driver's seat
Engine compartment
A
Coolant expansion tank » page 134
B
Engine oil dipstick » page 133
C
Engine oil filler opening » page 133
D
Brake fluid reservoir » page 119
E
Vehicle battery » page 139
F
Fuse box » page 143
G
Windscreen washer fluid reservoir » page 44
Indicator lights
Functionality
The indicator lights in the instrument cluster indicate
the current status of certain functions or faults.
The illumination of some of the indicator lights may
be accompanied by acoustic signals and messages in
the instrument cluster display.
Colour display of the indicator lights
Depending on the vehicle equipment, the colour
scheme of the indicator lights may vary. The coolant
indicator light can, e.g. be shown in colour as follows.
- colour display
- black and white display
Additional indicator lights
Depending on the meaning, the additional indicator
light will also light up in the display along with some
of the indicator lights.
- Danger
- Warning
WARNING
Ignoring the illuminated indicator lights and associ-
ated messages on the instrument cluster display may
result in accidents, serious injury or damage to the
vehicle.
Indicator light overview
After switching on the ignition, some indicator lights
for the functional test of the vehicle systems light up
briefly. If the tested systems are in order, the respec-
tive indicator lights go out a few seconds after the
ignition is switched on or after the engine has been
started.
Symbol Meaning
Indicates a warning together with
another warning light » page 10.
Vehicle battery is not charg-
ing » page 140.
Along with - Engine
fault » page 134, » page 140.
Coolant level is too low » page 134.
Coolant temperature too
high » page 134.
ACC does not decelerate sucient-
ly » page 124.
Parking brake on » page 119.
10
Indicator lights › Engine compartment
Symbol Meaning
Automatic gearbox overhea-
ted » page 115.
Automatic gearbox im-
paired » page 115.
Front seat belt not fas-
tened » page 32.
Brake fluid level is too
low » page 119.
Together with - Brake system and
ABS faulty » page 121.
Warning if there is a risk of a colli-
sion » page 121.
Engine oil level too low » page 133.
Engine oil pressure too
low » page 133.
Flashing - Steering lock faul-
ty » page 30.
Illuminates - Power assisted steering
faulty » page 30.
Indicates a warning along with an-
other warning light » page 10.
ACC not available » page 125.
Flashing - Diesel engine control faul-
ty » page 135.
illuminates, if relevant, does not illu-
minate after switching on the igni-
tion - Diesel preheating system faul-
ty » page 135.
Front passenger airbag switched
o » page 38.
Front passenger airbag switched
on » page 38.
Flashes together with - Key
switch for airbag deactivation faul-
ty » page 38.
Airbag system faulty » page 37.
Illuminates 4 s - Front passenger air-
bag deactivated with key
switch » page 38.
Illuminates for 4 seconds and then
flashes - Airbag or belt tensioner de-
activated with diagnostic de-
vice » page 37.
Crew Protect Assist faul-
ty » page 128.
Symbol Meaning
ASR deactivated » page 120.
ABS faulty » page 120.
Illuminates - ESC or ASR faul-
ty » page 120.
Flashing - ESC or ASR is engag-
ed » page 120.
Clogged particle filter » page 135.
Front Assist deactivated » page 121.
Petrol engine control faul-
ty » page 134.
Tyre pressure
change » page 145, » page 149.
Tyre pressure control system faul-
ty » page 150.
Emission control system faul-
ty » page 135.
Lane Assist intervenes » page 126.
Lane Assist intervenes » page 126.
Engine oil level too high or engine oil
level sensor impaired » page 133.
Ball rod not locked » page 160.
Windscreen washer fluid level too
low » page 45.
Automatic gearbox overhea-
ted » page 115.
The fuel supply has reached the re-
serve area. » page 137, » page 139.
Illuminates - Power assisted steering
faulty » page 30.
Flashing - Steering lock not un-
locked » page 30.
Flashing - Steering lock faul-
ty » page 30.
Bulb faulty » page 41.
Rear fog light switched
on » page 40.
Water in the diesel fuel fil-
ter » page 135.
11
Indicator lights › Indicator light overview
Symbol Meaning
Shock absorber faulty » page 116.
Automatic gearbox im-
paired » page 115.
ACC controls the driving
speed » page 124.
Speed limiter controls the driving
speed » page 122.
The cruise control system controls
the driving speed » page 123.
ACC controls the driving
speed » page 124.
The selector lever is
locked » page 114.
Lane Assist is activated and ready to
intervene » page 126.
Lane Assist is activated and ready to
intervene » page 126.
Turn signal light,
left » page 39, » page 41.
Turn signal light,
right » page 39, » page 41.
Trailer turn signal light » page 41.
Front fog lights switched
on » page 40.
Low outside temperature » page 50.
High beam or flasher activa-
ted » page 39.
Front Assist is started » page 121.
ACC activated » page 124.
AdBlue
®
level too low » page 136.
AdBlue
®
system impaired » page 136.
High beam Assist System switched
on » page 41.
Break recommendation » page 128.
Rear seat belt not fas-
tened » page 32.
A rear seat belt is fas-
tened » page 32.
Symbol Meaning
Safety distance too small » page 121.
Speed limiter activated » page 122.
Speed limiter faulty » page 123.
Engine was switched o automati-
cally by START-STOP » page 113.
Engine was not automatically
switched o via START-
STOP » page 113.
No light is switched on » page 39.
Cruise control activated » page 123.
Cruise control system faul-
ty » page 124.
Consumption-friendly driv-
ing » page 116.
Driving mode Normal » page 115.
Driving mode Sport » page 115.
Driving mode Eco » page 115.
Driving mode Individual » page 115.
12
Indicator lights › Indicator light overview
Correct and safe
Introductory notes for correct use
▶
Read this Owner's Manual carefully, as proceeding
in accordance with this manual is a prerequisite for
the correct use of the vehicle. This Owner's Manual
should therefore always be in the vehicle.
▶
When using the vehicle, the generally binding legal
provisions that are specific to the country must be
observed. Such as those for transporting children,
switching o airbags, using tyres, road trac and
the like.
▶
Do not exceed the maximum permissible weights
and loads.
▶
Do not exceed the maximum permissible roof load.
▶
Use the specified fuel and operating fluids.
▶
Drive on roads that meet the technical vehicle pa-
rameters. Obstacles that exceed the ground clear-
ance of the vehicle can damage the vehicle when
driving over them.
▶
Care must be taken during operations related to
operation, maintenance and self-help to avoid
damage to the vehicle or injury. If required, seek
the help of a specialised garage.
▶
All work on the vehicles and safety systems e.g. on
the seatbelts or the airbag system, may only be
carried out by a specialist garage.
▶
When using accessories, please note the instruc-
tions in the accessory manufacturer’s instruction
manual. These include child seats, roof racks, com-
pressors etc.
▶
Please note the service intervals.
New vehicle or new parts
New vehicle - Running in the engine
Driving style during the first 1500 km determines the
quality of the engine run-in process.
▶
During the first 1000 km, rev the engine to max.
3/4 of the highest permissible engine speed and
avoid using a trailer.
▶
Over the next 500 km, the engine speed can be
slowly increased.
Depending on driving style and operating conditions,
the engine consumes some oil, up to 0.5 l / 1000 km.
Consumption may be higher over the next 5000 km.
New brake pads
New brake pads do not provide the optimum braking
eect during the first 200 km, they have to be worn
in first. Therefore, drive very carefully.
New tyres
New tyres do not have optimum grip for the first
500 km. Therefore, drive very carefully.
Regular checks
What should be taken into account before driving?
A vehicle with technical defects can increase the risk
of accidents and injuries.
Eliminate any defects before driving. If required,
seek the help of a specialised garage.
Pay special attention to the following points.
▶
Is the tyre undamaged?
▶
Is the tyre tread sucient?
▶
Is the tyre pressure sucient?
▶
Do the headlamps, brake and turn signals work?
▶
Is the windscreen in good condition?
▶
Is the engine oil, brake fluid and coolant level OK?
▶
Is the air intake in the engine compartment free
from obstruction?
▶
Are the air outlet nozzles or air intake in front of
the windscreen free from obstruction?
▶
Are the windscreen wiper and washer system and
windscreen wiper blades functional?
▶
Is the windscreen washer fluid level sucient?
▶
Are the windscreen wiper blades in good condi-
tion?
▶
Are all seatbelt system components in good work-
ing order? Are the seatbelts clean and have the
buckles been unclogged?
▶
Is the spoiler working properly?
▶
Are parts and components of the vehicle still visi-
bly attached?
▶
Are there no oil stains or other operating fluids un-
der the vehicle?
No improper vehicle adjustments
Improper modifications can cause interference and
aect safety-related functions and other functions
of the vehicle.
▶
Adjustments and technical modifications to the ve-
hicle should only be carried out by a specialist ga-
rage.
▶
Do not cover the engine with additional insulation
materials, e.g. a blanket.
Keeping sensors and cameras in working
order
Some functions of your vehicle are supported by
sensors and cameras inside and outside the vehicle.
The rear-mounted accessories, e.g. bike rack, may
aect system and camera functionality.
▶
Do not cover or put a sticker over the sensors and
cameras and keep them clean.
13
Correct and safe › Introductory notes for correct use
▶
If there is damage suspected to the sensors or
cameras, seek the help of a specialist garage.
Engine compartment
Before opening the engine compartment flap
Risk of scalding! Do not open the engine compart-
ment flap if steam or coolant comes out of the en-
gine compartment.
▶
Stop the engine and allow it to cool.
▶
Remove the ignition key. On vehicles with a key-
less unlocking system, open the driver's door.
When working in the engine compartment
▶
Keep children away from the engine compartment.
▶
Do not touch the radiator fan. The radiator fan can
turn itself on, even when the ignition is o.
▶
Do not touch electrical cables. Avoid short circuits
in the electrical system, especially on the vehicle
battery.
▶
Do not smoke near the engine and refrain from
handling open flames or sparks.
▶
If you need to work in the engine compartment
with the engine running, be mindful of rotating en-
gine parts and electrical equipment.
▶
Do not leave any objects in the engine compart-
ment.
Handling operating fluids
Your vehicle needs various fuels to operate that can
aect health or the environment when they are
emitted. These include fuel, oils, battery acid, coolant
and brake fluid or AdBlue
®
.
▶
Only use operating fluids outdoors or in well-venti-
lated areas. If required, wear protective equipment.
▶
Do not use or check operating fluids with the en-
gine running.
▶
In the event of contact with operating fluids, wash
aected areas with warm water. If required, seek
medical help.
▶
The leaked engine oil in the engine compartment
can cause a fire, so wipe it o with a cloth.
▶
Store soiled cloths in a well-ventilated area until
disposal. Cloths with residues of engine oil can ig-
nite and cause a fire.
Vehicle battery
Handling the vehicle battery
Battery acid is highly corrosive. Improper handling of
the vehicle battery can cause an explosion, fire,
chemical burns or poisoning!
▶
When handling the vehicle battery, eye and skin
protection must be worn.
▶
Do not tilt the vehicle battery, as it may leak bat-
tery acid.
▶
If battery acid comes into contact with skin, wash
the aected areas with water for a few minutes.
Get medical help without delay.
▶
Do not charge a frozen or thawed vehicle battery.
Replace a frozen vehicle battery.
▶
Do not use a damaged vehicle battery.
▶
Short circuit! Do not connect the battery terminals.
Using electrical sockets in the vehicle
Improper handling of sockets can lead to life-threat-
ening electric shock or fire.
▶
The sockets may get hot during operation. Do not
touch hot sockets.
▶
Protect sockets from liquids.
▶
If moisture gets into the socket, let the socket dry
before reusing it.
▶
Do not insert any objects into the socket contacts.
Before your journey
Adults and children, cargo and objects - everything
has its place in the vehicle. Observe the following in-
structions so that all occupants are protected in the
best possible way in the event of an accident.
Before you go
▶
Ensure that you have a good view of outside the
vehicle.
▶
Adjust the rearview mirrors.
▶
Close all doors and the engine compartment and
boot flap.
▶
Take the correct seating position and put on the
seatbelt properly. Ensure that passengers do like-
wise. Always leave the seatbelt on while driving.
▶
Only one person can be secured with a seatbelt.
▶
Make sure that the seatbelts are not trapped, e.g.
in the door or in the seat.
▶
Check seatbelts, their locks and attachment points
for damage.
Sitting safely
For the safety of the occupants and to reduce the
risk of injury in the event of an accident, the follow-
ing instructions must be observed.
▶
Stand the backrests upright. If the front passenger
seat backrest has been folded forward, only the
seat behind the driver's seat may be used for trans-
porting passengers.
▶
Engage the rear seat backrests correctly.
▶
Adjust the height-adjustable headrest so that the
top of the headrest is as close as possible to the
top of the head.
14
Correct and safe › Engine compartment
▶
Keep your feet in the footwell.
▶
Use the entire seat.
▶
Do not lean forward or sit to the side.
▶
Do not hold your limbs out the window.
›
Adjust the driver's seat
in the longitudinal di-
rection so that the
pedals can be fully
pushed through with
slightly bent legs.
›
Adjust the steering
wheel so that the dis-
tance
A between the
steering wheel and
sternum is at least 25
cm.
›
For vehicles with driver's knee airbag, adjust the
driver's seat longitudinally so that the distance
B
from the legs to the dash panel in the area of the
knee airbag is at least 6 cm.
›
Adjust the angle of the backrest so that the steer-
ing wheel can be reached at the top with your arms
slightly bent.
›
Move the passenger seat back as far as possible.
The front passenger must maintain a minimum dis-
tance of 25 cm from the dash panel.
Correct belt webbing arrangement
The webbing arrange-
ment is extremely impor-
tant for the seatbelts to
oer the best possible
protection.
▶
The shoulder belt part
must run over the mid-
dle of the shoulder and
rest firmly on the body.
▶
The lap belt part must
be placed in front of the pelvis and fit tightly.
▶
In pregnant women, the lap belt part must be as
low as possible on the pelvis, so that no pressure is
exercised on the abdomen.
▶
The webbing must not be pinched or twisted and
rub against sharp edges.
▶
The tongue may only be inserted into the buckle of
the associated seat.
▶
The webbing must be tight. Therefore, do not at-
tach clamps or similar items to the webbing for ad-
justing the seatbelt according to body size.
Correct steering wheel position
▶
Hold the steering
wheel with both hands
on the outer edge in
the "9 o'clock" and "3
o'clock" position. Oth-
erwise, you may expe-
rience serious injury to
the arms, hands and
head when deploying
the airbag.
Be mindful of the eect of the airbag system
Airbag systems can only properly protect if all occu-
pants have been secured and they are in the correct
seating position.
No persons, animals or objects such as cup holders
may be in the deployment area of the air-
bags » page 37.
▶
Do not cover or stick anything over the steering
wheel or the dash panel. The front airbags were
not able to deploy.
The front passenger airbag should be switched o in
some situations » page 38.
Securing children properly
▶
Do not carry a child on your lap, and secure the
child and yourself with a seatbelt.
▶
Only transport children in a suitable child
seat » page 34.
Children under 150 cm tall will not be properly pro-
tected without a child seat. Children that have been
inadequately secured can be thrown through the ve-
hicle in the event of an accident or a sudden ma-
noeuvre. You can cause life-threatening injuries to
yourself and other occupants.
If children lean forward or assume a wrong sitting
position while driving, they are more likely to be in-
jured in the event of an accident. This is especially
true for children who are carried in the passenger
seat - when the airbag system triggers, they can be
seriously injured or killed!
A child that has been incorrectly secured in the
wrong sitting position - endangered by the side
airbag
The child should not be
in the deployment area
of the side airbag.
15
Correct and safe › Before your journey
A child that has been properly secured in a child
seat
There must be enough
room between the child
and the exit area of the
side airbag for the side
airbag to oer the best
possible protection.
Transporting objects safely
When moving heavy objects, there is a shift in em-
phasis. Thus, the driving behaviour of the vehicle
changes.
▶
Adjust driving speed and driving style to this
changed driving behaviour.
Unsecured or misplaced items may be thrown
around in the event of an accident or sudden ma-
noeuvre. There is a risk of serious injury and loss of
control of the vehicle!
In a rear-end collision at 50 km/h unsecured objects
are thrown forward with up to 50 times their weight.
A 1.5 litre water bottle is thrown up to 75 kg.
▶
Transport objects securely.
▶
Stow objects so they do not hinder the driver.
Keep the driver footwell clear.
▶
Stow small items in the storage compartments.
▶
Do not leave lockable storage compartments open.
▶
Do not let items protrude out of the slots. This
note does not apply to bottles in bottle trays.
▶
Do not place any objects on the dash panel or on
the luggage compartment cover.
▶
Do not exceed the maximum permissible load of
fasteners and shelves.
▶
Distribute the load evenly in the luggage compart-
ment and fasten it so it cannot slip.
▶
Place heavy objects in the luggage compartment
as far forward as possible.
Safe driving
Introductory notes
▶
Pay attention when you are driving! As a driver, you
are fully responsible for road safety.
▶
Always adjust driving speed to the road conditions
as well as the trac and weather conditions.
Paying attention to warning signals
The driver information system warns you with indi-
cator lights and messages in the event of any faults.
Failure to follow the warnings may increase the risk
of accidents and injuries.
▶
If the vehicle issues a warning signal, then park the
vehicle safely and follow the information in the in-
strument cluster, and in this manual.
Using assistance systems in a clever way
The assistance systems are only for support and do
not absolve you from your responsibility for driving
the vehicle.
The assistance systems are subject to physical and
technical limitations. Therefore, in certain situations,
system reactions may be perceived as undesirable or
delayed.
▶
Stay alert and be ready to intervene.
▶
Familiarise yourself with the assistance systems,
their limitations and operating conditions.
▶
Activate, deactivate and adjust the assistance sys-
tems so that you have full control of the vehicle in
any trac situation.
Driving with a substitute spare wheel or emergen-
cy wheel
A substitute spare wheel or emergency wheel is only
used to reach the nearest specialist garage.
▶
Inflate the wheel with the max. prescribed inflation
pressure.
▶
Follow the instructions on the warning label on the
rim.
▶
Do not cover the warning sign.
▶
Avoid full accelerations, strong braking and fast
cornering.
▶
Do not drive with more than one mounted spare
wheel.
▶
Avoid using snow chains on the temporary spare
wheel.
Driving with a loaded roof rack
When transporting objects on the roof rack, the ve-
hicle’s driving behaviour changes.
▶
Adapt your speed and driving style to this.
Towing a trailer
The vehicles handling characteristics change with a
trailer. The assistance systems may behave dierent-
ly.
▶
Drive more slowly, excessive speed can lead to loss
of control of the vehicle.
▶
Keep a larger distance from the vehicle in front.
▶
Do not exceed the max. vertical load and the per-
missible trailer load.
Driving through water
There must be no water ingress into the vehicle sys-
tems e.g. into the engine’s air intake system!
▶
Therefore, determine the water depth before driv-
ing through water. The water level must not ex-
ceed the lower edge of the lower beam.
16
Correct and safe › Safe driving
▶
Drive at max. walking speed. Otherwise, a wave
may form in front of the vehicle, increasing the wa-
ter level.
▶
Never stop in the water, do not drive backwards
and never stop the engine.
Vehicle operation in dierent weather conditions
If you wish to operate your vehicle in countries with
dierent weather conditions from those specified,
please contact a ŠKODA Partner. They will advise
you if certain precautions need to be taken to ensure
the full functioning of the vehicle or to prevent dam-
age (e.g. coolant, battery replacement, etc.).
Is something wrong?
▶
Pay attention to changes in vehicle handling.
▶
If in doubt about safety, stop driving and seek the
help of a specialist garage.
▶
Unusual vibrations or the vehicle ‘pulling’ to the
side may indicate a puncture.
▶
If tyre pressure loss is very quick, try to stop the
vehicle carefully without heavy steering or heavy
braking.
▶
Immediately remove foreign bodies stuck in the
tyre tread.
▶
Do not remove foreign objects that have penetra-
ted into the tyre. Check the tyre pressure and seek
the help of a specialised garage.
▶
Immediately remove any objects jammed under
the floor of the vehicle. These can damage the ve-
hicle or ignite and cause a fire.
Parking the vehicle safely
A vehicle that has not been secured may roll away
and cause accidents.
▶
For parking, look for a place with suitable ground.
Do not park the vehicle on flammable materials
such as dried leaves, spilt fuel. Hot vehicle parts
can cause a fire.
Carry out the following activities in the specified or-
der when parking.
›
Stop the vehicle and keep the brake pedal de-
pressed.
›
Secure the vehicle with the parking brake.
›
For vehicles with an automatic gearbox, put the se-
lector lever in the
position.
›
Turn o the engine.
›
For vehicles with manual transmission, engage
1st gear or reverse gear.
›
Release the brake pedal.
Exiting the vehicle
Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle!
▶
Children may injure themselves when handling the
seats, releasing the parking brake etc.
▶
In emergency situations, children are not able to
leave the vehicle on their own or help themselves.
▶
At very high or very low temperatures, there is
danger to life!
▶
When locking the vehicle, the SAFE function
switches on. As a result, no doors or windows can
be opened from the inside. Turn o the SAFE func-
tion if people are left behind in the locked vehi-
cle » page 19.
Emergency call
WARNING
Availability of a mobile network is indispensable for
establishing a connection to the emergency number.
WARNING
This emergency service is only available in some
countries.
WARNING
If the vehicle is located in an area without a function-
ing emergency call system infrastructure, no vehicle
data shall be transmitted to the emergency call cen-
tre.
After the start of the conversation, the emergency
call centre also contains information as to the acci-
dent location and the severity of the accident, the
number of occupants with seatbelts on and the vehi-
cle identification number (VIN).
Once the connection has been established, commu-
nication with the emergency call centre takes place
via the loudspeaker and microphone installed in the
vehicle.
Personal data
Personal customer data is collected, processed and
used by ŠKODA AUTO in accordance with the provi-
sions of the generally binding legal provisions in the
area of personal data protection.
The current declaration on the protection of person-
al data can be found on the following website: http://
www.skoda-auto.com/data-privacy/.
Serious accident - automatic call
In the event of an accident where the airbag or belt
tensioner activates, a call is automatically started
with the emergency call centre.
Minor accident - call option
The infotainment screen displays the option to set
up a connection to the emergency call centre or
breakdown service.
17
Correct and safe › Emergency call
Manual call
›
Keep the
key press-
ed down.
›
Confirm the connec-
tion to the emergency
call centre in the Info-
tainment screen.
Starting a manual con-
versation can then be
used, for example, if you
also report an accident in
which you are not directly involved.
Indicator light
The system state is dis-
played after the ignition
is switched on by the
warning light
A illumi-
nating.
▶
Green - lit up - the sys-
tem is functional.
▶
Green - flashing - a call
is being made to the
emergency call centre.
▶
Red - lit up - if there is a system failure, immediate-
ly seek the help of a specialist garage.
▶
Not lit up - the system is out of order due to a long
term unavailable mobile network, if this circum-
stance persists, the system will require the assis-
tance of a specialist garage.
WARNING
If there is a system fault, no emergency call is possi-
ble.
After an accident
Safety systems
After an accident, the safety systems of the vehicle,
e.g. seatbelts and airbag system, may be out of ac-
tion.
▶
Have the vehicle's safety systems checked by a
specialist garage, even if no load or trip has occur-
red.
▶
Have damaged, loaded or triggered components of
the safety systems replaced by a specialist garage.
18
Correct and safe › After an accident
Keys, locks and alarm system
Key
Key Overview
Locking the vehicle
Operate the boot lid
Unlocking the vehi-
cle
A
Battery status warn-
ing lamp
B
Locking button for
folding the key bit
in/out
NOTICE
▶
Protect the key from moisture and strong vibra-
tions.
▶
Keep the grooves in the key clean.
The eective range of the key is about 30m. The
eective range of the key can be reduced, e.g. due to
signal interference from other transmitters.
Troubleshooting
The battery in the key is almost empty
▶
After pressing a button on the key, the warning
light does not flash.
Or:
▶
A message stating it is necessary to change the
battery will be displayed.
›
Replace the battery » page 19.
The vehicle cannot be unlocked or locked with the
remote control
There may be the following reasons.
▶
The battery in the key is empty.
›
Replace the battery » page 19.
▶
The key is not synchronized.
Synchronize the key as follows.
›
Press one of the buttons on the key.
›
Unlock the door within 1 minute with the key via
the locking cylinder » page 20.
If necessary, the key must be synchronized if one
of the buttons on the key has been repeatedly press-
ed outside of the eective range of the remote con-
trol.
Changing the key battery
The new battery must comply with the specification
of the original battery.
›
Fold out the key bit.
›
Release the battery
cover with your
thumbnail or by insert-
ing a flat-head screw-
driver at the marked
points.
›
Open the battery cov-
er.
›
Remove the battery.
›
Press any button on
the remote key to re-
set the key.
›
Insert the new battery.
›
Fit the battery cover
and press until it clicks
into place.
Central locking
Functionality
Central locking system
The system unlocks and locks all doors, the fuel filler
flap and the boot lid at the same time.
Unlock indicator: double flashing of the indicator
lights.
Lock indicator: single flashing of the indicator lights.
The warning light in the driver's door will flash for
about 2 seconds in quick succession after the vehicle
is locked, then it will start flashing regularly at longer
intervals.
If none of the doors or the boot lid is opened
within 45 seconds of unlocking, the vehicle automat-
ically locks again.
SAFE function
Depending on the equipment, the SAFE function can
be integrated into the central locking system.
The SAFE function prevents the doors from opening
from the inside once the vehicle is locked.
The SAFE function switches on when the vehicle is
locked.
In the display of the instrument cluster after the igni-
tion is switched o, a message regarding the SAFE
function is displayed.
19
Keys, locks and alarm system › Key
DANGER
Risk of death!
When the vehicle is locked and the SAFE function is
switched on, nobody is allowed to remain in the vehi-
cle.
Turn o the SAFE function
▶
By double locking within 2 seconds.
Or:
▶
Together with the deactivation of the interior mon-
itoring » page 22, Settings.
The warning light in the driver's door will flash for
about 2 seconds in quick succession after the vehicle
is locked, then goes out and starts flashing regularly
at longer intervals after about 30 secs.
When the SAFE function is switched o, the door
can be opened from the inside by pulling once on the
opening lever.
The SAFE function is switched on again after unlock-
ing and locking the vehicle.
Operation
Ways in which central locking operates
Depending on the equipment:
▶
Key » page 19
▶
Keyless locking (KESSY) » page 21
▶
Central locking button
Central locking button
The button locks all of the doors and the boot lid.
Locking and unlocking
›
The button in the middle part of the control pan-
el.
The symbol in the button comes on when locked.
Unlocking of the vehicle also takes place when open-
ing a door from the inside or when removing the key
from the ignition.
WARNING
A locked vehicle with a central locking button makes
it dicult for responders to enter the vehicle in an
emergency.
Setting the unlocking and locking function
The lock and unlock functions are set in the follow-
ing menu in the Infotainment system.
Or:
All doors
Unlocking of all doors, the boot lid and the fuel filler
flap.
Single door
Using the button on the key, the driver's door and
the fuel filler flap are unlocked.
In vehicles equipped with a keyless unlocking sys-
tem, the door near to which the key is located and
the fuel filler flap are unlocked by touching the door
handle.
When unlocked again, the other doors and the boot
lid are unlocked.
Doors on a vehicle side
Using the button on the key, the doors on the driv-
er’s side and the fuel filler flap are unlocked.
In vehicles equipped with a keyless unlocking sys-
tem, the doors on the passenger’s side near to which
the key is located and the fuel filler flap are unlocked
by touching the door handle.
When unlocked again, the other doors and the boot
lid are unlocked.
Automatic locking after starting
After starting, all doors and the boot lid are locked
when a speed of 15 km/h is reached.
Unlocking of the vehicle takes place when opening a
door from the inside or when removing the key from
the ignition.
WARNING
An automatically locked vehicle makes it dicult for
responders to enter the vehicle in an emergency.
Troubleshooting
Central locking fault
▶
The warning light in the driver's door first flashes
for 2 secs in quick succession.
▶
Then it lights up continuously.
▶
After 30 secs, it flashes slowly.
›
Seek the help of a specialist garage.
Emergency unlocking and emergency locking
of the door
Unlocking and locking the door with the lock cylin-
der
Remove the cover
›
Pull the handle on the
front left door and hold
it in place.
›
Insert the key into the
recess on the under-
side of the cover.
›
Open the cover in the
direction of the arrow.
20
Keys, locks and alarm system › Central locking
›
Release the door handle.
Locking and unlocking
›
Insert the key into the
lock cylinder and un-
lock or lock it.
Install cover
›
Pull on the door handle
and hold it.
›
Replace the cover.
›
Release the door han-
dle.
Locking the door without the lock cylinder
›
Open the door.
›
For vehicles with a panel over the opening, remove
the panel.
›
Insert the key or a flat-head screwdriver into the
slot.
›
Turn the key or flat-head screwdriver towards the
outside of the vehicle (spring-loaded position).
After closing, the door is locked.
Keyless locking (KESSY)
Usage
The keyless locking system, KESSY, enables unlock-
ing and locking of the vehicle without actively using
the remote control key.
Operation
Keep the key with you when unlocking and locking.
The sensors on the handle are intended to be operat-
ed with bare hands, e.g. wearing gloves may aect
the function of the sensors.
Unlocking
›
Grab the door handle.
›
Open the door.
Lock
›
Touch the sensor.
After locking, it is not
possible to unlock
within 2 seconds by
touching the door han-
dle. This can be used to
check whether the ve-
hicle is locked.
Unlocking the boot lid
›
Press the handle of the boot lid.
Protection against accidentally locking the key in-
side the vehicle
If the key is locked inside the vehicle, the vehicle will
unlock itself automatically. If no door is opened with-
in 45 seconds, the vehicle automatically locks again.
If the key is locked in the luggage compartment, the
luggage compartment lid will automatically unlock it-
self.
Deactivating keyless unlocking and locking
›
Lock the vehicle with the button on the key.
›
Within 5 s, touch the sensor on the door handle
with your finger.
Deactivation is confirmed by a single flash of the
direction indicators.
›
To check the deactivation, wait at least 10 seconds
and then pull the door handle.
The door must remain locked.
Keyless unlocking and locking is automatically acti-
vated once again after the vehicle is unlocked.
Troubleshooting
The vehicle cannot be unlocked or locked using
the sensors on the handle
›
Lock or unlock the vehicle with the button on the
key.
21
Keys, locks and alarm system › Keyless locking (KESSY)
›
Then try to unlock or lock the vehicle using the
sensors on the handle.
›
If keyless locking does not work, seek the help of a
specialist garage.
Alarm system
Functionality
The alarm system triggers audible and visual signals
during a break-in or towing attempt.
The alarm system is activated automatically approxi-
mately 30 seconds after the vehicle is locked.
The alarm system is automatically deactivated after
the vehicle is unlocked.
Alarm triggering
The activated alarm system triggers an alarm when
one of the following events occurs.
▶
Opening the bonnet.
▶
Opening the boot lid.
▶
Opening the door.
▶
Manipulation of the ignition lock.
▶
Towing the vehicle.
▶
Movement in the vehicle.
▶
Sudden and significant voltage drop of the electri-
cal system.
▶
Uncoupling the trailer.
▶
Opening the door unlocked via the lock cylinder.
Switching o the triggered alarm
›
Unlock the vehicle.
Or:
›
Switch on the ignition.
Operating conditions
For the correct functioning of the alarm system, all
windows must be closed.
A trailer is integrated into the alarm system under
the following conditions.
✓ The vehicle is factory-fitted with a towing device.
✓ The trailer is electrically connected to the vehicle
via the trailer socket.
✓ The trailer is not equipped with LED taillights.
If the electrical connection to the trailer is interrup-
ted on a vehicle with an activated alarm system,
warning signals are triggered.
Disable the alarm before connecting or discon-
necting a trailer.
Settings
The following functions of the alarm system can be
deactivated once.
▶
Interior monitoring.
▶
Towing protection.
Deactivation will also switch o the SAFE func-
tion » page 19, Functionality.
Deactivation
▶
By double locking within 2 seconds.
Or:
▶
In Infotainment, in the
Interior monitoring
menu
Or:
▶
In Infotainment, in the
Interior moni-
toring
menu
The functions of the alarm system must be deac-
tivated if the vehicle is being towed or transported,
for example.
The functions of the alarm system are reactivated
after the vehicle is unlocked and locked again.
22
Keys, locks and alarm system › Alarm system
Doors, windows and boot lid
Doors
Opening/closing the door
Opening from the outside
›
Unlock the vehicle and
pull on the door handle.
Opening from the inside
›
Pull the door opening
lever and push the
door away from you.
Closing from the inside
›
Grasp the pull handle and close the door.
Child safety lock on the rear doors
Operation
The child lock prevents the rear doors from being
opened from the inside.
Switching on and o
›
Turn the fuse with the vehicle key or a flat-head
screwdriver.
A Child lock switched o
B
Child lock switched on
Protective door strip
What you should be mindful of
NOTICE
Risk of damage to the strip, the door and the body!
▶
Do not open the door too hastily or abruptly.
▶
Do not hold the door on the strip when opening
and closing, as the strip must be able to move in
and out freely.
▶
If the strip prevents the door from closing freely,
do not close the door forcefully! Remove the strip,
and seek the help of a specialist garage.
Functionality
Depending on the trim level, the doors can each be
equipped with a protective strip. This moves out
when opening the door and protects the central area
of the door edge from damage.
When the door closes the protective strip retracts.
Self-help
Replacing the damaged strip
CAUTION
Risk of injury!
▶
Be careful when handling the strip.
›
Remove the strip from
the door.
NOTICE
▶
If any part of the strip remains in the door, seek the
help of a specialist garage.
›
Insert a new strip in
the grooves.
›
Press in the strip.
A new strip can be purchased from ŠKODA Origi-
nal Parts.
23
Doors, windows and boot lid › Doors
Window - with manual operation
Operation
›
Turn the crank in the
appropriate direction.
Window - with electrical operation
What you should be mindful of
Force limiter
To reduce the risk of pinch injuries when closing the
windows, the vehicle has a force limiter.
If there is an obstacle, the window closing process is
stopped and the pane retracts by several centime-
tres.
If the obstacle prevents the it from being closed for
the next 10 seconds, the closing process is interrup-
ted once again and the window goes down by sever-
al centimetres.
If you attempt to close the window again within
10 seconds of the window being moved down for
the second time, even though the obstacle was not
yet been removed, the closing process is only stop-
ped. During this time, it is not possible to automati-
cally close the windows by pulling the button all the
way. The force limiter is, however, switched on.
The force limiter is only not operational if you at-
tempt to close the window again within the next
10 seconds – the window will now close with full
force! If you wait longer than 10 seconds, the force
limiter is switched on again.
CAUTION
Risk of injury!
▶
Close the windows carefully, even though they
have a force limiter.
Overview of the operating buttons on the
driver's door
Depending on the equip-
ment:
A
Front door left
B
Front door right
C
Rear door, left
D
Rear door, right
E
Deactivation/activa-
tion of the buttons in
the rear doors
Operation
Opening
›
Press the corresponding button slightly down-
wards and hold it until the window has reached the
desired position.
Or:
›
Press the corresponding button until it stops; the
window opens automatically. Pressing the button
again will stop the opening process.
Closing
›
To close, pull gently upwards on the top edge of
the corresponding button and hold until the win-
dow has reached the desired position.
Or:
›
Pull the corresponding button until it stops; the
window closes automatically. By pressing the but-
ton again, the closing process is stopped.
After switching o the ignition, the windows can
still open and close for about 10 minutes so long as
none of the doors are opened.
Open all of the windows at the same time
›
Press and hold the
button on the key.
Or:
›
Turn o the ignition, open the driver's door, and
hold down the driver's window button until it
stops.
Depending on the setting, only the driver’s win-
dow can be opened in this way.
Close all of the windows at the same time
›
Press and hold the
button on the key.
Or:
›
Turn o the ignition, open the driver's door, and
pull upwards on the driver's window button until it
stops.
Or:
24
Doors, windows and boot lid › Window - with manual operation
›
For vehicles with a keyless unlocking system, hold
one finger on the sensor on the outside of the han-
dle on the front door.
Depending on the setting, only the driver’s win-
dow can be closed in this way.
Settings
The window operation is set in the following menu in
the Infotainment system.
Window operations
Or:
Window operation
Troubleshooting
The window regulator has stopped working after
repeated opening and closing
The window regulator mechanism could have over-
heated.
›
Allow the window regulator mechanism to cool
down.
The automatic window operation does not work
after disconnecting the vehicle battery
›
Enable automatic window operation » page 25.
Activation after disconnecting the vehicle
battery
Activate automatic window operation
›
Turn on the ignition.
›
Pull the corresponding button upwards and the
window closes.
›
Release the button.
›
Pull up the respective button and hold for 1 second.
Sunblind - with electrical operation
Operation
Closing
To open
›
Press or hold the but-
ton to move the roller
blind.
›
Press or release the
button to stop the roll-
er blind from moving.
Activation after disconnecting the vehicle
battery
›
Turn on the ignition.
›
Keep the
key pressed down. The sun protection
blind opens and closes again.
›
Release the button.
Sun visors
Folding up and folding down
1
Swivel the front visor towards the windscreen
2
Swivel the visor towards the door
Heated windscreen
Usage
Windscreen heating is used for defrosting or venti-
lating the windscreen.
Conditions
✓ The engine is running.
Operation
Heated rear window
›
Press the key to turn on the heated rear win-
dow.
Heated windscreen
Applies to Climatronic.
›
Press the key on the Climatronic , tap the
Infotainment screen to turn on the heated wind-
screen.
Or:
›
tap
in the Infotainment screen to
turn on the heated windscreen.
Windscreen heating switches o automatically after
10 minutes.
25
Doors, windows and boot lid › Sunblind - with electrical operation
Setting
Automatic heated windscreen
Applies to Climatronic.
The heated windscreen switches on automatically if
the windscreen mists up.
This function is set in the following menu in the Info-
tainment system.
›
Press the button on the Climatronic control
panel , tap the functional surface on the Info-
tainment screen.
Or:
›
Tap the functional surface on the In-
fotainment screen.
Troubleshooting
The indicator light in the button or below the but-
ton flashes
The heating does not work as the battery charging
level is low.
Boot lid - with manual operation
Operation
To open
›
Press the handle and
lift the lid.
The option to open by pressing the handle is deacti-
vated once a speed of 5 km/h is reached. This is acti-
vated again after the vehicle has stopped and a door
is opened.
Closing
›
Grasp the fixture A
and pull the lid down.
CAUTION
Danger of opening the lid while driving!
▶
Ensure that the lock is properly engaged after clos-
ing the lid.
Set a delayed lid lock
If the lid is unlocked with the button on the key,
the lid is automatically locked again after closing.
The period after which the lid is locked automatically
can be extended by a specialist garage.
Boot lid - with electrical control
Operation
CAUTION
Risk of injury!
▶
Only operate the tailgate when nobody is within
swivel range.
CAUTION
Danger of opening the lid while driving!
▶
Ensure that the lock is properly engaged after clos-
ing the lid.
NOTICE
▶
Do not manually close the tailgate when moving.
▶
Before operating the tailgate, check that there are
no objects in the swivel area that could damage the
tailgate. Also check that there are no objects with-
in the immediate vicinity of the vehicle that could
damage the vehicle interior and the transported
objects.
If the tailgate hits an obstacle when closing, it
stops and an audible signal sounds.
When automatically closing the tailgate, e.g. un-
der the weight of snow, a broken beep sounds.
Handle in the tailgate
›
Press the handle to
open, close or stop the
movement of the tail-
gate.
The option to open by
pressing the handle is
deactivated once a
speed of 5 km/h is
reached. This is activated
again after the vehicle
has stopped and a door
is opened.
26
Doors, windows and boot lid › Boot lid - with manual operation
Button in the tailgate
›
Press the button to
open, close or stop the
movement of the tail-
gate.
Button in the door
›
To open the tailgate,
pull and hold the but-
ton until the tailgate
starts to open.
›
To close the tailgate,
pull and hold the but-
ton until the tailgate is
fully closed.
›
To stop the movement
of the tailgate, pull or
release the button.
Button on the key
›
Press the
button to
open, close or stop the
movement of the tail-
gate.
The option to lock exists
only on vehicles with a
keyless unlocking sys-
tem. The key must not
be in the vehicle and
must be at a distance of
max. 2 m from the tail-
gate.
The tailgate can also be closed by pulling it briefly
downwards.
Settings
Set the uppermost position of the tailgate and
store it
It makes sense to set the top position of the tailgate,
e.g. setting for the opening of the tailgate in a limited
space due to the garage height.
›
Stop the lid in the desired position.
›
Press the
button and hold down on the lower
edge of the tailgate until an audible signal sounds.
Re-adjusting the top starting position of the lid
›
Carefully raise the flap manually to the limit.
›
Press the
button and hold down on the lower
edge of the tailgate until an audible signal sounds.
Troubleshooting
The tailgate does not react to the opening signal
›
There is a possible obstacle, e.g. snow; remove it.
Or:
›
Press the handle in the tailgate and lift the lid.
Or:
›
Unlock the tailgate » page 27.
The tailgate does not react to the closing signal
›
Close the tailgate manually.
NOTICE
▶
Close the tailgate slowly, push down the tailgate
and push in the lock on the centre of the rear edge
of the tailgate.
Unlocking the boot lid
Unlocking
›
Insert a screwdriver in-
to the opening in the
panel.
›
Release the flap by
moving it in the direc-
tion of the arrow.
27
Doors, windows and boot lid › Unlocking the boot lid
Seats, steering wheel and mirror
Front seat - with manual operation
Controls on the seat
A
Adjusting the seat in the longitudinal direction -
after releasing the operating lever, the lock must
audibly click into place
B
Adjusting the height
C
Adjusting the angle of the backrest - do not lean
against the backrest during adjustment
D
Adjusting the extent of the curvature of the lum-
bar support
After a certain time, play can develop within the ad-
justment mechanism of the backrest angle.
Folding passenger seat backrest
Folding down
›
Pull on the operating
lever.
›
Fold the backrest for-
wards until it clicks in-
to place.
Folding back up
›
Pull on the operating lever.
›
Press the backrest backwards until it audibly clicks
into place.
Front seat - with electrical operation
Controls on the seat
Adjusting the seat
A
Adjust in a longitudi-
nal direction
B
Adjust the inclination
C
Adjusting the height
Adjusting the seat back
A
Adjust the inclination
Adjusting the lumbar support
A
Set the position of
the curvature
B
Set the extent of the
curvature
Rear seats
Fold the seat backs forwards
Before folding down
›
Insert the rear headrests as far as they will go or
remove them.
›
Adjust the position of the front seats in such a way
that they are not damaged by the folded-down
seat backrests.
›
Pull the outer seat belt to the side trim.
28
Seats, steering wheel and mirror › Front seat - with manual operation
Folding down
›
Press the release han-
dle and fold the seat
forwards.
Folding back up
›
Pull the outer seat belt
to the side trim.
›
Fold the seat backrest
back up.
The release handle must
audibly click into place.
›
Check that the seat
backrest has locked in
place. The pin
A must
not be visible.
Headrests
Adjusting the height of the headrests
Front headrests
›
Hold the safety button
and move the headrest
in the desired direc-
tion.
Rear headrests
›
Move the headrest in
the desired direction.
When pushing down,
press and hold the
safety button.
Removing and inserting the rear headrests
Removing
›
Partially fold the re-
spective seat back for-
wards.
›
Move the headrest up
to the stop.
›
Press safety buttons
A and B at the same
time and remove the
support.
Inserting
›
Insert the headrest into the seat backrest.
The safety button must click into place.
Front armrest
Settings
›
Move the backrest to
the desired position.
Rear armrest
Settings
›
Fold down the armrest.
The folded-down arm-
rest can be used as a
storage table.
Seat heating
What you should be mindful of
WARNING
Risk of burns!
▶
Do not switch on the seat heater for persons with
limited perception of pain or temperature.
29
Seats, steering wheel and mirror › Headrests
NOTICE
Risk of seat damage!
▶
Do not kneel on the seats or otherwise puncture
them.
▶
Do not turn on the heater in the following situa-
tions.
▶
The seat is not occupied.
▶
There are objects on the seat, such as a child
seat.
▶
There are additional seat covers or protective
covers on the seat.
Conditions
✓ The engine is running.
Operation
›
Press the or key to switch on the seat heating.
The seat heating is switched on with maximum heat-
ing output. By repeatedly pressing the button, the
heating output is reduced until it is switched o.
The heat output is determined by the number of illu-
minated indicator lights that are shown in the key or
in the Climatronic display.
If the seat heating is switched on with maximum
heat output, the heating power is automatically low-
ered after 10 minutes.
Steering wheel
Adjust the steering wheel
WARNING
Risk of an accident!
▶
Do not adjust the steering wheel while driving.
›
Swing the safety lever
downwards.
›
Adjust the steering
wheel to the desired
position.
›
Press the safety lever
as far as it will go.
Troubleshooting
Power assisted steering faulty
illuminates - total failure of the power assisted
steering, failure of steering assistance
›
Turn o the ignition, start the engine and drive a
few meters.
›
If the indicator light does not go out, stop driv-
ing. Seek the help of a specialist garage.
illuminates - partial failure of the power assis-
ted steering, possible reduction in power
steering
›
Turn o the ignition, start the engine and drive a
few meters.
›
If the
indicator light does not go out, continue
driving, exercising appropriate caution. Seek the
help of a specialist garage.
Steering column lock faulty
flashing
Message regarding a fault in the steering col-
umn lock
›
Stop the vehicle.
›
Seek the help of a specialist garage.
After switching o the ignition, it is then no longer
possible to switch on the ignition, to lock the steer-
ing and to switch on the electrical consumers.
flashing
Message regarding a fault in the steering lock
›
You may continue driving, exercising appropriate
caution. Seek the help of a specialist garage.
Steering column lock not unlocked
flashing
Message concerning the required steering
wheel movement
›
Move the steering wheel slightly back and forth.
›
If the steering does not unlocked, stop the vehicle
and seek the help of a specialist garage.
Heated steering wheel
Conditions
✓ The engine is running.
30
Seats, steering wheel and mirror › Steering wheel
Operation
Applies to Climatronic.
›
Press the
key on the Climatronic , tap the
Infotainment screen to turn on steering wheel
heating.
Or:
›
tap in the Infotainment screen to turn
on steering wheel heating.
Settings
Steering wheel heating together with driver's seat
heating
Applies to Climatronic.
When the function is switched on, pressing the but-
ton for the driver's seat heating also turns steering
wheel heating on or o.
›
Press the
button on the Climatronic in the
Infotainment screen and select the menu item for
coupling the seat and steering wheel heating.
Or:
›
Tap on in the Infotainment screen and
select the menu item for the coupling of the seat
and steering wheel heating.
When the function is switched on, the function sur-
face is displayed in the Infotainment screen. This
can be used to switch steering wheel heating on or
o.
Interior rear-view mirror
Operation
Interior mirror with manual darkening
A
Mirror is not dark-
ened
B
Mirror darkens
Interior mirror with automatic darkening
Darkening of the mirror is automatically controlled
through the sensors in the mirror once the engine is
started.
CAUTION
Risk of an accident!
A glowing display e.g. a mobile phone or navigation
device may aect the function of the automatic mir-
ror darkening.
▶
Do not attach these devices close to the mirror.
Exterior mirror
Operation
Positions of the rotary knob and adjustment of the
mirror surface
The mirrors can be folded manually or electrically,
depending on the equipment.
Adjust the left mir-
ror
Switch o operation
Adjust the right mir-
ror
Fold mirror in elec-
trically (to fold back
out, select a dier-
ent position)
Heat the mirror
when the engine is running
Adjusting the mirror surface
›
Select position or .
›
Turn the rotary knob in the direction of the arrows.
Folding electrically folding mirrors automatically
The mirrors fold in when the vehicle is locked and
fold back out when the vehicle is unlocked, if this
feature is activated.
Locking of the vehicle is not indicated by the fact
that the mirrors fold in. Locking of the vehicle is indi-
cated by the turn signal lights flashing.
Manually foldable mirrors
›
Fold the mirror towards the side window by apply-
ing pressure with your hand.
WARNING
Risk of an accident!
The exterior mirrors make objects appear farther
away. Use the rear-view mirror to determine the dis-
tance from vehicles behind.
NOTICE
Danger of mirror damage!
If the electrically foldable mirror is swung out by ex-
ternal influences (e.g. due to an impact during ma-
noeuvring), fold the mirror in using the rotary knob
and wait for an audible folding sound.
Settings
Automatic folding of the exterior mirrors is activated
or deactivated in the following menu in the Infotain-
ment system.
Or:
31
Seats, steering wheel and mirror › Interior rear-view mirror
Troubleshooting
Electric mirror operation impaired
›
Adjust the mirror surface by pressing it lightly with
your finger.
CAUTION
Risk of burns!
Do not touch heated exterior mirror surfaces.
Restraint systems and airbags
Seat belts
Functionality
Seat belts that are fastened correctly oer very
good protection in the event of an accident. They re-
duce the risk of an injury and increase the chance of
survival in the event of a major accident.
WARNING
▶
The seat belts must not be removed or altered in
any other way.
▶
Do not attempt to repair the seat belts yourself.
Have a damaged seat belt replaced immediately by
a specialist garage.
Automatic belt retractor
The automatic belt retractor locks the belt when the
belt is pulled jerkily or when the belt is being rolled
up violently.
WARNING
If the seat belt does not lock when pulled jerkily,
have the retractor checked by a specialist garage.
Belt tensioners
The safety of the driver, front passenger and passen-
gers on the outer rear seats who are wearing their
seat belts is enhanced by the belt tensioners fitted
to the inertia reels on the front and rear external seat
belts.
If there is a collision with a certain severity, the seat
belt is tightened by the belt tensioner so that unwan-
ted body movement is prevented.
The belt tensioner can also be deployed when the
seat belt is not fastened.
Belt tensioners are not activated in the event of a
roll-over, minor collisions or in accidents in which no
major forces are produced.
Smoke is released when the belt tensioner is de-
ployed. This does not indicate a vehicle.
Reversible belt tensioner
Vehicles with a proactive occupant protection sys-
tem include reversible belt tensioners » page 127.
The reversible belt pretensioners increase safety for
the belted driver and front passenger by automati-
cally tightening the seat belt tightly over the body in
critical driving situations and then releasing it again.
Status display in the instrument cluster display
- front seat belt not fastened
- a rear seat belt is not fastened
- a rear seat belt is fastened
32
Restraint systems and airbags › Seat belts
Operation
Fastening the seat belt
›
Grasp the buckle latch
and slowly pull the belt
over the chest and pel-
vis towards the buckle.
›
Insert the buckle latch
into the buckle until
there is an audible
click.
›
Pull on the belt to en-
sure that the buckle is
securely fastened.
Unfastening the seat belt
›
Grasp the buckle latch
and release it by press-
ing the red button.
›
Hold the belt so it does
not twist when rolling
up.
Setting
›
Move the seat belt
height adjuster up-
wards to increase the
height.
›
Press the safety button
and move the seat belt
height adjuster down
to reduce the height.
›
After adjustment, firm-
ly pull on the belt to
ensure that the seat
belt height adjuster has
correctly locked in
place and that the belt
is locked securely.
Troubleshooting
Blocked belt retractor
›
Grasp the strap in the
middle and pull quickly
in the direction of the
arrow.
›
Hold the strap and let
it roll up slowly.
›
Pull on the strap to see
if the retractor is
working properly.
›
If the strap is still
blocked, repeat the un-
locking procedure once or twice.
›
If the strap is still blocked, seek the help of a spe-
cialist garage.
Child seat
What you should be mindful of
For how to install and use the child seat, please note
the instructions in this Owner's Manual as well as the
instructions of the child seat manufacturer.
For safety reasons, we always recommend that chil-
dren are transported on the back seats. Carry chil-
dren on the front passenger seat only in exceptional
cases.
Child seats according to standard ECE-R 44 the Eu-
ropean Economic Commission.
Child seats according to standard ECE-R 44 are
marked with the test symbol: large E in a circle, with
the test number below.
We recommend using child seats from the ŠKODA
Genuine Accessories range. These child seats have
been developed and tested for use in ŠKODA vehi-
cles. They meet the standard ECE-R 44.
WARNING
▶
When installing the child seat on the rear seat, ad-
just the front seat so that there is no contact be-
tween the front seat and the child seat or the child
carried in the child seat.
▶
If the headrest prevents the child seat from being
fitted, adjust the headrest to the highest position.
▶
If using a separate child seat cushion, adjust the
headrest so that the child's head is flush with, but
not protruding above the height of the top edge of
the headrest.
Using a child seat on the front passenger seat
Never use a child seat in which the child is carried
with his or her back to the direction of travel on a
seat protected by an active airbag placed in front of
33
Restraint systems and airbags › Child seat
the seat. This could cause serious injury to the child,
even death.
This is also indicated by the following stickers.
Sticker on the passenger
sun visor.
Sticker on the central
body pillar on the pas-
senger side.
The following instructions must be followed when
using a child seat on the front passenger seat.
▶
When using a rear-facing child seat, the front pas-
senger airbag must be deactivated.
▶
If possible, adjust the front passenger seat back-
rest so that it is vertical, to ensure that there is se-
cure contact between the backrest and the child
seat.
▶
If possible, move the front passenger seat back-
wards so that there is no contact between the
front passenger seat and the child seat behind it.
▶
Adjust the height-adjustable front passenger seat
as much as possible.
▶
Adjust the front passenger seat belt as high up as
possible.
WARNING
Risk of the seat belt causing a neck injury to the
transported child!
▶
For child seats in groups 2 and 3, ensure that the
guide fitting attached to the child seat headrest is
positioned in front of or at the same height as the
seat belt height adjuster on the central body pillar.
▶
Adjust the height of the front passenger seat belt
so that the belt passes through the guide fitting
without kinking and is not bent over the edge of
the guide fitting.
WARNING
As soon as the rear-facing child seat is no longer be-
ing used on the front passenger seat, activate the
front passenger airbag again.
Recommended child seats
Grouping of child seats according to standard ECE-R 44.
Group Weight of the child
0 up to 10 kg
0+ up to 13 kg
1 9-18 kg
2 15-25 kg
3 22-36 kg
Recommended child seats
Group Manufacturer Type Attachment Order number
Approval number
(E1 ...)
0+
up to 13 kg
Britax Römer Baby Safe Plus Isofix base frame 1ST019907 04 301146
1
9-18 kg
Britax Römer Duo Plus TT
ISOFIX and TOP
TETHER
DDA000006 04 301133
2-3
15-36 kg
Britax Römer
Kidfix XP
a)
ISOFIX 000019906K 04 301198
Britax Römer Kidfix II XP ISOFIX 000019906L 04 301323
a)
For optimum protection, especially in the event of a side impact, it is recommended that you use this child
seat complete with the backrest.
34
Restraint systems and airbags › Child seat
Fasteners for child seats
Use of child seats
Overview of usability of child seats according to standard ECE-R 16.
Child seats that use the ISOFIX System
Group
Size category of
child seat
a)
Passenger seat
with activated
front airbag
Passenger seat
with deactiva-
ted front airbag
-
b)
Outer rear seats
b)
Middle rear seat
0
up to 10 kg
E X IL IL X
0+
up to 13 kg
E
X IL IL XD
C
1
9-18 kg
D
X IL IL X
C
B
B1
A
2
15-25 kg
- X IL IL X
3
22-36 kg
- X IL IL X
a)
The size category of the child seat is indicated on the child seat plate.
b)
The seat is suitable for an ISO / R3 fixing.
IL The seat is suitable for the ISOFIX child seats with "Semi-Universal" approval.
X The seat is not equipped with eyelets for the ISOFIX System.
i-Size
Passenger seat with acti-
vated front airbag
Passenger seat with deac-
tivated front airbag
Outer rear seats Middle rear seat
i-UF i-U i-U X
i-UF The seat is only suitable for forward-facing i-Size child seats of the "Universal” category.
i-UF The seat is suitable for forward- and backward-facing i-Size child seats of the "Universal” category.
X The seat is not suitable for i-Sizechild seats of the "Universal" category.
Child seat fastened with a safety belt
When using a child seat of the "Universal” category on the middle rear seat, it is necessary to move the buckle
of the middle seat behind the buckle of the outer seat.
Correct position – the belt buckles are behind each
other
Incorrect position - the buckles are next to each
other
35
Restraint systems and airbags › Fasteners for child seats
Group
Passenger seat with
activated front air-
bag
Passenger seat with
deactivated front air-
bag
Outer rear seats
Middle rear seat
a)
0
up to 10 kg
X
U
b)
U U
0+
up to 13 kg
X
U
b)
U U
1
9-18 kg
UF U U U
2
15-25 kg
UF U U U
3
22-36 kg
UF U U U
a)
It is forbidden to install a child seat with a support foot in the middle rear seat.
b)
Adjust the height-adjustable front passenger seat as much as possible.
U The seat is suitable for the child seat category "Universal” and is permitted for use in this weight group.
UF The seat is suitable for forward-facing child seats in the "Universal” category and is permitted for use in
this weight group.
X The seat is not suitable for children in this weight group.
Overview
ISOFIX
WARNING
▶
Do not attach any other child seats, straps or ob-
jects to the holding eyelets provided for the instal-
lation of a child seat using the ISOFIX system.
The ISOFIX system allows for the fast and secure in-
stallation of the child seat. The eyelets for installing
the child seat using the ISOFIX system are located
on the outer rear seats and possibly on the front pas-
senger seat.
A child seat that uses the ISOFIX system can only be
installed in the vehicle if it is approved for this vehi-
cle type. Further information can be obtained from a
ŠKODA partner or from a list of vehicles enclosed
with the child seat.
›
Remove the covers be-
fore installing the child
seat.
TOP TETHER
WARNING
▶
Child seats that use the TOP TETHER system
should only be used on those seats that are fitted
with holding eyes bearing the TOP TETHER sym-
bol.
▶
Only attach one fastening strap on the child seat to
the holding eyelet in the TOP TETHER system.
▶
When attaching the child seat with the TOP TETH-
ER system, no other object must be attached to
the TOP TETHER system holding eyelet.
Holding eyelets on the rear seats
The belt fastened into
the TOP TETHER system
restricts the movement
of the upper part of the
child seat.
The holding eyelets for
attaching the belt are lo-
cated on the outer rear
seats, as well as on the
middle rear seat or pas-
senger seat when neces-
sary.
Holding eyelet on the pas-
senger seat
36
Restraint systems and airbags › Fasteners for child seats
Airbags
Usage
The airbag system oers additional occupant protec-
tion in the event of severe frontal and side collisions,
as a supplement to the seat belts.
The best possible protective eect of the airbag is
achieved only when the seat belt is also worn. The
airbag system is no substitute for the seat belts.
Functionality
When sinking into the inflated airbag, the forward
movement of the body is damped and the risk of in-
jury is reduced.
As the airbags inflate, smoke is released. This
does not indicate a vehicle.
Function condition
✓ Ignition switched on.
Airbag deployment in the event of an accident
Airbag deployment is influenced by many factors.
The deceleration rate at the time of impact is crucial.
WARNING
Danger of serious or fatal injuries!
▶
Maintain the correct seating position.
▶
Do not keep your limbs in the deployment area of
the airbags.
In the following situations, no airbags are deployed.
▶
Minor frontal and side collisions.
▶
Rear-end collision.
▶
Vehicle rollover.
If the measured deceleration rate is below the refer-
ence values programmed into the control unit, the
airbags will not be deployed despite possible serious
vehicle damage.
Airbag overview
A
Front airbags
B
Side airbags - front
C
Head airbags
D
Side airbags - rear
E
Driver's knee airbag
The installation location of the airbags is marked
with the lettering .
WARNING
Danger of a functional restriction of the side airbags!
▶
Do not exert excessive forces, e.g. impacts, on the
seat backs.
▶
Have damaged seat covers at the installation loca-
tion of the side airbags repaired by a specialist ga-
rage.
Deactivating the airbags
We recommend having airbags other than the front
passenger airbag deactivated » page 38, Opera-
tionby a ŠKODA service partner.
Deactivation of the airbags is provided for the fol-
lowing cases, for example.
▶
If the driver's seat adjustment is correct, the dis-
tance of at least 25 cm between the centre of the
steering wheel and the sternum can not be main-
tained.
▶
Additional operating controls for a physically disad-
vantaged driver are installed in the vehicle.
▶
The vehicle has special seats, e.g. orthopaedic
seats without side airbags.
illuminates for 4 seconds after the ignition is
switched on and then flashes for 12 seconds -
Airbag or belt tensioner deactivated with the diag-
nostic device
Message regarding the deactivated airbag or belt
tensioner
WARNING
If an airbag is deactivated during the sale of the vehi-
cle, inform the buyer!
Troubleshooting
Airbag system faulty
illuminates
Message regarding an airbag fault
›
Seek the help of a specialist garage.
Key switch for the front passenger
airbag
Usage
Deactivation of the front passenger airbag is provi-
ded for the following cases, for example.
▶
A rear-facing child seat is mounted on the front
passenger seat.
37
Restraint systems and airbags › Airbags
▶
The vehicle has special seats, e.g. orthopaedic
seats without side airbags.
What you should be mindful of
WARNING
Danger of fault in the passenger airbag deactivation
system!
▶
Only deactivate the airbag when the ignition is
switched o!
WARNING
Danger of unexpected deployment of the passenger
airbags in an accident!
▶
If the front passenger airbag has been deactivated
with the key, do not leave the key in the key switch
while driving. Vibrations can cause the key to turn
in the slot and activate the airbag!
Operation
Before switching on/o the front passenger airbag
›
Completely fold out the key bit.
Switch front passenger front airbag on/o
›
Switch o the ignition.
›
Open the passenger
door.
›
Insert the key bit into
the slot in the key
switch as far as it will
go.
›
To Switch o, carefully
rotate the key switch
into the position
.
›
To Switch on, carefully rotate the key switch into
the position
.
›
Remove the key bit from the slot.
›
Close the passenger door.
›
Turn on the ignition and check that the front pas-
senger airbag warning lights are lit up.
WARNING
When the passenger airbag is switched o, the head
airbag on the passenger side is also switched o at
the same time.
Status display in the instrument cluster display
lights up 4 secs after the ignition is switched
on – passenger front airbag switched o
Indicator lights
▶
After switching on the igni-
tion, the two indicator lights
light up briefly.
▶
If the system is OK, both of
the indicator lights go out.
▶
One of the indicator lights then lights up again de-
pending on the position of the key switch.
Lights up - front passenger airbag switch-
ed o
Lights up 65 secs after the ignition is
switched on – passenger front airbag
switched on
Troubleshooting
Key switch for airbag deactivation is faulty
and flash together
The front passenger airbag will not be de-
ployed in the event of an accident!
›
Have the airbag system checked by a specialist ga-
rage immediately.
38
Restraint systems and airbags › Key switch for the front passenger airbag
Lighting, windscreen wipers and
washers
Exterior lighting
Functionality
Unless otherwise stated, the light works when the
ignition is switched on.
Daytime running lights
The daytime running lights illuminate the area in
front of the vehicle.
For vehicles for certain markets, they also illuminate
the rear vehicle area.
Operating conditions
✓
The lights switch is in position , or .
Switching the low beam on/o automatically
The low beam is automatically switched on or o de-
pending on the lighting conditions.
Operating conditions
✓
The light switch is in the
position.
The automatic headlight circuit is indicated by the il-
lumination of the symbol in the light switch.
Switching low beam on/o automatically in rain
Operating conditions
✓
The light switch is in the position.
✓ The function is activated.
✓ The windscreen wipers are switched on for lon-
ger than 30 seconds.
The automatic headlight circuit is indicated by the il-
lumination of the
symbol in the light switch.
Full LED headlights
When the light switch is in position , the head-
lights provide the best possible beam of light in front
of the vehicle.
CORNER function
The CORNER function ensures the illumination of
the area near the vehicle in the turning direction.
Operating conditions
✓ The turn signal is switched on or the front wheels
are steered sharply.
✓ The low beam is switched on.
✓ The fog lights are not switched on.
✓ The driving speed is lower than 40 km/h.
When no light is switched on
The symbol
in the light switch may also light up in
the instrument cluster, indicating that it is necessary
to switch on the light.
illuminates
›
Switch on the light.
Operation
Switching o the
lights except the
daytime running
lights
Switching the low
beam on/o auto-
matically
Switching on the
parking lights
Switching on the low
beam
Main beam
The high beam works when the low beam is on.
A
Switch on main
beam - lights up
B
Switch o high
beam - goes out /
Switch on flasher - il-
luminates
CAUTION
Risk of an accident!
▶
Do not dazzle other road users with the high beam.
Turn signal
A
Switch on right turn
signal - flashing
B
Switch on left turn
signal - flashing
Turn signal - convenience signalling
Convenience signalling enables three flashes of the
turn signal lights without having to move the lever
up or down.
›
Tap the control lever up or down.
The corresponding turn signal lights flash three
times.
Tap the lever in the opposite direction ahead of
time to stop signalling.
39
Lighting, windscreen wipers and washers › Exterior lighting
Fog light
1
Fog light - lights up
2
Rear fog light - lights
up
›
Turn the light switch to
position . or .
›
Pull the light switch to
the appropriate posi-
tion.
The rear fog light does not illuminate when an ac-
cessory is connected to the trailer socket.
Hazard warning light system
›
To switch on or o, press the button in the cen-
tral part of the dash panel.
When the hazard warning system is on and the turn
signal is switched on, the hazard warning lights will
be switched o temporarily and only the turn signal
will flash on the relevant side of the vehicle.
The hazard warning lights can be switched on auto-
matically during hard braking. The hazard warning
lights are then switched o again automatically
when starting o or accelerating.
One-sided parking light
The one-sided parking light allows one side of the
parked vehicle to be illuminated through activation
of the corresponding sidelights.
A
Switch on the side-
lights on the right
B
Switch on the side-
lights on the left
›
Switch o the ignition.
›
Move the lever to the
appropriate position.
›
Lock the vehicle.
When the parking light is
switched on, an acoustic
warning signal sounds and the driver's door is
opened. After a few seconds or after the driver's
door is closed, the warning signal will stop.
Double-sided parking light
The two-sided parking light allows the parked vehi-
cle to be illuminated through activation of the side-
lights.
›
Turn on the ignition.
›
Turn the light switch to position
.
›
Switch o the ignition.
›
Lock the vehicle.
The light may switch o automatically if the battery
is low. If the two-sided parking light is switched on
when the ignition is switched
o, the light will not
switch o automatically.
When the parking light is switched on, an acoustic
warning signal sounds after the ignition is switched
o and the driver's door is opened. After a few sec-
onds or after the driver's door is closed, the warning
signal will stop.
Settings
Activating/deactivating the automatic headlights
system in rain
The function is activated or deactivated in the fol-
lowing menu in the Infotainment system.
Or:
Activating/deactivating convenience signalling
The function is activated or deactivated in the fol-
lowing menu in the Infotainment system.
Or:
Headlight range control of the LED headlights
Front seats occu-
pied, luggage com-
partment empty
All seats occupied,
luggage compart-
ment empty
All seats occupied,
luggage compart-
ment loaded
Driver's seat occu-
pied, luggage com-
partment loaded
›
Select the position of the control according to the
vehicle's current load status.
For the Full LED headlights, the headlight range
control is adjusted automatically.
WARNING
Risk of an accident!
An incorrectly adjusted headlight range can cause in-
sucient vehicle lighting or can dazzle other road
users.
▶
Adjust the headlight range correctly.
Converting the Full LED headlights for the oppo-
site direction of trac
›
Switch on travel mode in the Infotainment in the
following menu.
40
Lighting, windscreen wipers and washers › Exterior lighting
Or:
Troubleshooting
Turn signal light defective
flashes faster - turn signal light on the right de-
fective
›
Check the turn signal light on the right.
flashes faster - turn signal light on the left de-
fective
›
Check the turn signal light on the left.
does not flash when the trailer is hitched -
trailer turn signal light defective
›
Check the trailer lighting.
Light bulb or LED bulb is defective
or illuminates
Information appears in the display regarding
the aected lights.
›
Replace the defective bulb.
›
In case of a defective LED lights, contact a special-
ist garage for help.
The headlights are misted up on the inside
Inside the headlights, moisture may occur. This is not
a defect.
Malfunction of the automatic headlight circuit
›
Clean the windscreen in the area of the rain/light
sensor.
Beam of light in front of the vehicle has shortened
Headlight defective.
›
Seek the help of a specialist garage.
Driving lights defective
If a message regarding the failed driving lights is dis-
played, the light will work in emergency mode.
›
Drive on, exercising appropriate caution.
›
Seek the help of a specialist garage.
COMING HOME, LEAVING HOME
exterior lighting
Functionality
The COMING HOME function turns on the light after
turning o the ignition and opening the driver's door.
The LEAVING HOME function switches on the light
when unlocking the vehicle with the wireless remote
control.
Operating conditions
✓ Visibility has worsened.
✓
The light switch is in the position.
Settings
This function is set in the following menu in the Info-
tainment system.
Or:
Light Assist high-beam assist system
Functionality
The high beam assist system automatically switches
the high beam on and o.
WARNING
Risk of an accident!
▶
If necessary, manually switch the high beam on or
o.
Operating conditions
✓ The system is activated.
✓
The light switch is in the
position.
✓ The driving speed is higher than 30 km/h (for
some countries, higher than 60 km/h).
✓ The low beam is switched on.
Operation
Switching on
›
Push the lever in the
direction of the arrow.
in the instrument
cluster lights up.
Switching o
›
Manually switch the high beam on or o.
Settings
Activation/deactivation
The function is activated or deactivated in the fol-
lowing menu in the Infotainment system.
Or:
41
Lighting, windscreen wipers and washers › COMING HOME, LEAVING HOME exterior lighting
Replace light bulbs
What you should be mindful of
DIY replacement of the following bulbs is possible.
Have the remaining light sources replaced by a spe-
cialist garage.
The new bulb must conform to the specification of
the original light bulb. The name of the bulb is
marked on the bulb socket.
NOTICE
Danger of headlight damage due to the ingress of
water and dirt!
▶
Always fit the protective cap on the headlight cor-
rectly after changing a bulb.
Conditions for changing a bulb
✓ Ignition switched o.
✓ Light switched o.
Rear turn signal
›
Remove the cover with
the bracket from the
tool kit.
›
Unscrew the screws
A
and remove the
light.
›
Press the lock mecha-
nisms on the connec-
tor and remove the
connector.
›
Turn and remove the
socket with the bulb.
›
Change the bulb in the
socket.
›
Insert the socket with
the new bulb into the
light so that the guide
lugs on the socket are
aligned with the corre-
sponding openings in
the light.
›
Turn the socket clock-
wise
to secure.
›
Insert the connector into the light until it clicks into
place.
›
Insert the pins A of the light into the openings B
in the body.
NOTICE
Risk of damage to the electrical system!
▶
Make sure that the cables between the light and
the body are not pinched when the light is inserted.
›
Screw the light into place.
›
Fit the cover of the light, ensuring it clicks into
place.
42
Lighting, windscreen wipers and washers › Replace light bulbs
Reversing lights
›
Open the boot lid.
›
Release and remove
the cover cap in the
boot lid.
›
Turn and remove the
socket with the bulb.
›
Change the bulb in the
socket.
›
Insert the socket with
the new bulb into the
light so that the guide
lugs on the socket are
aligned with the corre-
sponding openings in
the light.
›
Turn the socket clock-
wise
to secure.
›
Insert the cover cap until it clicks into place.
Interior lighting
Operation
Operation of the lighting
Switching on
Switching o
Reading lights
Automatic switch on and switch o
Depending on the equipment, the rear light can be
switched on and o automatically together with the
front light.
When the front light is switched o, the rear light
can be switched on and o manually.
Switching on automatically
The light switches on when one of the following
events occurs.
▶
The vehicle is unlocked.
▶
One of the doors is opened.
▶
The ignition key is removed.
Automatic switch o
The light switches o when one of the following
events occurs.
▶
The vehicle is locked.
▶
The ignition is switched on.
▶
About 30 seconds after all the doors have been
closed.
Automatic switching on/o of the footwell light-
ing
The lighting only works when the dipped or parking
lights are on.
The lighting is also switched on automatically after
opening the door (e.g. when getting in or out).
Settings
The footwell lighting is set in the following menu in
the Infotainment system.
Or:
Interior ambient light
Usage
The ambient lighting ensures that various areas of
the vehicle interior are lit.
The lighting only works when the dipped or parking
lights are on.
The lighting is also switched on automatically after
opening the door (e.g. when getting in or out).
Settings
The ambient lighting is set in the Infotainment sys-
tem, in the following menu.
Or:
Windscreen wipers and washers
Operating conditions
Operating conditions for windscreen wipers
✓ Engine compartment flap closed.
✓ Boot door closed.
✓ Ignition is switched on.
43
Lighting, windscreen wipers and washers › Interior lighting
Operating conditions for the windscreen washer
system
✓ Engine compartment flap closed.
✓ Boot door closed.
Operation
WARNING
Risk of an accident!
At low temperatures, windscreen washer fluid can
freeze on the windscreen and restrict visibility.
▶
Only use the windscreen washer when the wind-
screen is warm.
Wipe and wash the windscreen
Fast wiping
Slow wiping
Depending on the equipment:
▶
Intermittent wiping
▶
Automatic wiping controlled by the rain sensor
Switching o
Tip-wiping (spring-loaded position)
A
Setting the wiping speed for the position
Washing and wiping (spring-loaded position)
The windscreen washer nozzles of the windscreen
are automatically heated together with the exterior
mirrors.
Clean headlights
When the headlights are switched on, they are
cleaned the first time and after every tenth wash of
the windscreen. The cleaning interval can be set by a
specialist company.
Wipe and wash the rear window
Washing and wiping the window (spring-loaded
position)
Washing the reversing camera (spring-loaded
position)
Wiping
Switching o
Automatic rear window wiping
When the windscreen wipers are switched on, the
rear window is automatically wiped when the re-
verse gear is engaged.
Settings
Activating/deactivating automatic wiping
The functions for automatic rear window wiping and
automatic wiping in the rain can be activated and de-
activated in the following menu in the Infotainment
system.
Or:
Refilling windscreen washer fluid
WARNING
Risk of an accident!
▶
Use windscreen washer fluid that is suitable for the
weather conditions.
NOTICE
Risk of damage to the windscreen washer system!
▶
When refilling the washer fluid, do not remove the
strainer from the neck of the container.
NOTICE
Risk of damage to the headlights!
▶
Only use washer fluid that does not attack polycar-
bonates.
NOTICE
Risk of damage to engine compartment compo-
nents!
▶
Close the container after refilling the windscreen
washer fluid.
44
Lighting, windscreen wipers and washers › Windscreen wipers and washers
The windscreen washer tank is located in the engine
compartment » page 10.
The container can hold a volume of 3 litres and 4 li-
tres for vehicles with a headlight cleaning system.
›
Gently open the top of the lid.
Troubleshooting
Windscreen washer fluid level too low
or illuminates
›
Top up the windscreen washer fluid.
Frozen windscreen wipers
›
Carefully remove frozen windscreen wipers from
the windscreen before switching on the ignition
and free them from snow and ice.
Folding down windscreen wiper arms and
replacing windscreen wiper blades
Fold the windscreen wiper arms away from the
windscreen
NOTICE
Risk of damage to the windscreen wipers and the
engine compartment flap!
▶
Close the engine compartment flap before the
windscreen wiper arms are folded away from the
windscreen.
▶
Do not turn on the ignition when the windscreen
wiper arms are folded away.
›
Switch the ignition on and o again.
›
Within 10 seconds,
press the control lever
down and hold for
about 2 seconds.
The windscreen wiper
arms are in the folded
position.
›
Fold the windscreen
wiper arms away from
the windscreen.
Replace the windscreen wiper blade
CAUTION
Risk of an accident!
▶
Change the windscreen wiper blades once or twice
a year.
›
Fold the windscreen wiper arm away from the
windscreen.
›
Press the catch and re-
move the wiper blade.
›
Insert the new wiper
blade until it clicks into
place.
›
Fold the windscreen
wiper arm back onto
the windscreen.
›
Turn on the ignition
and push the control
lever down.
45
Lighting, windscreen wipers and washers › Windscreen wipers and washers
Heating and air conditioning
system
Heating
Overview of the heating operation
components
A
Set the temperature
B
Set the blower speed
C
Set the direction of the air outlet
Switch recirculated air mode on/o
WARNING
Danger of misting!
▶
Always keep the fan on.
Manual air conditioning
What you should be mindful of
▶
We recommend a dierence of max. 5°C between
the outside temperature and the interior tempera-
ture.
▶
We recommend switching the cooling system o
about 10 minutes before the end of the journey to
prevent odour formation.
▶
Annual disinfection of the air conditioning is rec-
ommended.
WARNING
Danger of misting!
▶
Always keep the fan on.
Operating conditions for the cooling system
✓ The outside temperature is below 2 °C.
✓ The engine is running.
✓ The blower is switched on.
Overview of the controls for the manual air
conditioning
A
Set the temperature
B
Set the blower speed
C
Set the direction of the air outlet
Switch recirculated air mode on/o
Switch the cooling system on/o
After pressing the button, the indicator light
in the button illuminates, even if the conditions for
switching on the cooling system are not met. The
cooling system switches on when the conditions for
switching on the cooling system are met.
During operation of the air conditioning system,
there may be an automatic increase in the engine idle
speed.
Automatic activation of the cooling system
Automatic activation of the cooling system prevents
the windows from misting up. The system switches
on in the following cases.
▶
When the fan is on and the air distribution control-
ler is in the
position.
In this case, the recirculation mode is switched o
and cannot be switched on.
▶
If the air distribution controller is not in the posi-
tion, and recirculated air mode is switched on.
Recirculated air mode
The recirculation mode prevents contaminated out-
side air getting into the interior of the vehicle.
Briefly switching on recirculation mode can increase
the cooling eect.
Under certain circumstances, the recirculation
mode may be switched on or o automatically.
WARNING
Risk of an accident!
In recirculation mode, there is no fresh air supply
from the outside. This can result in loss of driver at-
tention and fogging up of windows.
▶
Keep the recirculation mode switched on for a
short time only.
46
Heating and air conditioning system › Heating
Troubleshooting
Water under the vehicle
When the cooling system is switched on, water can
drip o the air conditioning system. This is not a leak.
Fogging
›
Increase the blower speed and switch on the cool-
ing system.
Automatic switch-o of the cooling system
If the coolant temperature is too high, the cooling
system may switch o automatically. This ensures
sucient engine cooling.
Climatronic automatic air conditioning
system
What you should be mindful of
▶
We recommend a dierence of max. 5°C between
the outside temperature and the interior tempera-
ture.
▶
We recommend switching the cooling system o
about 10 minutes before the end of the journey to
prevent odour formation.
▶
Annual disinfection of the air conditioning is rec-
ommended.
WARNING
Danger of misting!
▶
Always keep the fan on.
Operating conditions for the cooling system
✓ The outside temperature is below 2 °C.
✓ The engine is running.
✓ The blower is switched on.
Operation
A
Set the temperature for the left side
B
Climatronic display
C
Set the temperature for the right side
D
Interior temperature sensor
Press - Switch on automatic mode
This function keeps the temperature constant
and prevents the windows from misting.
Hold - Maintain the interior temperature in ac-
cordance with the temperature setting for the
driver side (SYNC function)
Switch recirculated air mode on/o
Switch the windscreen ventilation/defrosting
mode on/o
Operate Climatronic in the Infotainment sys-
tem
Switch Climatronic on/o
With a temperature setting outside of the number
range, one of the following icons will be displayed in
the Climatronic display.
Maximum cooling power
Maximum heating power
During operation of the air conditioning system,
there may be an automatic increase in the engine idle
speed.
Recirculated air mode
The recirculation mode prevents contaminated out-
side air getting into the Interior of the vehicle.
Briefly switching on recirculation mode can increase
the cooling eect.
WARNING
Risk of an accident!
In recirculation mode, there is no fresh air supply
from the outside. This can result in loss of driver at-
tention and fogging up of windows.
▶
Keep the recirculation mode switched on for a
short time only.
Settings
Displaying the settings menu
›
Tap the button on the Climatronic.
Or:
›
Tap on in the Infotainment screen.
A
Select Climatronic mode
B
Set the temperature for the left side
C
Set the temperature for the right side
D
Set the direction of the air outlet in manual
mode
LO
HI
47
Heating and air conditioning system › Climatronic automatic air conditioning system
Switch the cooling system on/o
According to the selected Climatronic mode:
▶
Manual mode - Set the blower speed
▶
Automatic mode - Set the operating power
Switch maintenance of the interior temperature
on/o according to the temperature setting for
the driver's side
Further Climatronic settings
›
To make further settings, press the button on
the Climatronic , tap on in the Infotainment
screen.
▶
Automatic supplementary heater
- Switch fast interior heating
on/o.
▶
Automatic windscreen heating
- Switch automatic wind-
screen heating on/o.
Troubleshooting
Water under the vehicle
When the cooling system is switched on, water can
drip o the air conditioning system. This is not a leak.
Fogging
›
Increase the blower speed and switch on the cool-
ing system.
Automatic switch-o of the cooling system
If the coolant temperature is too high, the cooling
system may switch o automatically. This ensures
sucient engine cooling.
Driver information system
Analogue instrument panel
Overview
A
Tachometer with indicator lights
B
Display with indicator lights
C
Speedometer with indicator lights
D
Bar with warning lights
E
Multifunction button:
▶
Setting the time
▶
Reset counter for distance travelled (trip)
▶
Show distance and days until next service ap-
pointment
F
Coolant temperature gauge
G
Fuel gauge
In poor visibility and with dipped headlights o,
the brightness of the instrument cluster lighting is
reduced to remind the driver to turn on the light.
Settings
Setting the language
The language is set in the following menu in the Info-
tainment system.
Resetting the odometer
›
Briefly press the button in the instrument
cluster.
Set time
›
Press and hold the button in the instru-
ment cluster until the Time menu item is
shown in the display.
›
Release the button, the display shows the hour set-
ting.
›
Press the button repeatedly to set the hours.
›
Wait 4 seconds, the display shows the minute set-
ting.
›
Press the key repeatedly to set the minutes.
48
Driver information system › Analogue instrument panel
›
Wait 4 seconds, the display shows the initial set-
ting.
The time is set in the Infotainment system in the fol-
lowing menu.
Setting the brightness of the instrument cluster
lighting
The brightness of the instrument lighting is adjusted
automatically according to the given lighting condi-
tions.
When low beam is switched on, the brightness of
the instruments lighting can be adjusted in the fol-
lowing menu in the Infotainment system.
Or:
Digital instrument cluster
Overview
A
Bar with indicator lights
B
Coolant temperature gauge
C
Fuel gauge
D
Display - 5 possible display variants
E
Additional Information
F
Central display area
Settings
Setting the language
The language is set in the following menu in the Info-
tainment system.
Resetting the odometer
The odometer is reset in the following menu in the
Infotainment system.
Or:
Set time
The time is set in the following menu in the Infotain-
ment system.
Setting the brightness of the instrument cluster
lighting
The brightness of the instrument lighting is adjusted
automatically according to the given lighting condi-
tions.
When low beam is switched on, the brightness of
the instruments lighting can be adjusted in the fol-
lowing menu in the Infotainment system.
Or:
Set the variant of the display
›
Press the button on the multifunction steer-
ing wheel to change the variant of the display pre-
sentation.
Select displayed variants
›
Press and hold the button on the multifunc-
tion steering wheel.
›
Select the menu item
Display layout
and confirm.
›
Select one of the following variants of the display
and confirm.
A
Classic display
B
Advanced display
C
Modern display
D
Basic display
E
Sporty display
Choose display of additional information
›
Press and hold the
button on the multifunc-
tion steering wheel.
›
Select and confirm one of the following prefix op-
tions (the scope of the prefix options depends on
the type of Infotainment).
▶
Auto - Information depending on the selected
driving mode
49
Driver information system › Digital instrument cluster
▶
Classic - Information about the selected gear
and the current speed
▶
adjustable pre-selection options
Setting the pre-selection option for the display of
additional information
The pre-selection option for displaying additional in-
formation is set in the Infotainment system in the
following menu.
Virtual Cockpit
Or:
Virtual Cockpit
›
Select the desired additional information in the A
areas.
›
The desired function area for the preselection op-
tion in the area
B hold to save the selection (the
scope of the preset options depends on the type
of Infotainment).
Instrument cluster display
Display overview and overview of the menu
items in the main menu
Depending on the equipment, the following informa-
tion is shown in the display.
A
Time
B
Compass direction
display
Selected gear/gear
recommendation
Automatic gearbox
selector lever posi-
tions
C
Menu, indicator
lights and informa-
tion
D
Outside temperature
or - low outside temperature
E
Total distance travelled
F
Trip - Distance travelled after resetting the
memory
Main menu items
▶
Driving data » page 51
▶
Assist systems - Activate/deactivate assist sys-
tems
▶
Navigation - e.g. Display driving recommendations,
compass, list of destination
▶
Audio - Using radio and media
▶
Telephone - Call list, accept or reject an incoming
call
▶
Vehicle - Vehicle condition » page 52
Operation
Operation via the control lever
A
Press - Switch be-
tween menu
items/set values
Hold - Show main
menu
B
Press - Confirm the
menu item
Operation via the multifunction steering wheel
Switch voice control on/o
A
Rotate - Adjust the volume
Press - Switch the sound o/on
Switch to the next track/station
Switch to the previous track/station
Show menu of assist systems
Depending on the equipment:
▶
Press - Show previous menu (if one has been
selected) / Show telephone menu
Or:
▶
Press - Change the display
▶
Hold - Display the menu of preset options
with additional information
B
Rotate - Switch between menu items/Set val-
ues/Manually change map scale
Press - Confirm the menu item
Turn and press - Activate automatic map scale
changing
Press - Return to the menu one level higher
Hold - Show main menu
50
Driver information system › Instrument cluster display
Driving data
Overview
The driving data display works with the ignition
switched on.
In the instrument cluster display
▶
Range - Travel distance that can be covered with
the existing tank fill level and the same driving style
▶
AdBlue
®
-range - Travel distance that can be cov-
ered with the existing AdBlue
®
tank fill level and the
same driving style
▶
Average fuel consumption
▶
Current fuel consumption
▶
Oil temperature - If the temperature is less than
50°C or if there is a system error --- is displayed
▶
Speed limit warning » page 52
▶
Current driving speed
▶
Average speed
▶
Distance travelled
▶
Driving time
In infotainment
A
Distance travelled
B
Driving time
C
Average speed
D
Average fuel consumption
E
Evaluation of driving economy - Drive
GreenFunction (depending on Infotainment
type) » page 116
F
Graphical fuel gauge - If the expected range is
less than 300 km, the vehicle slowly approaches
the symbol
G
Range
Memory
The system saves the driving data in the following
memories.
From start or "1" (depending on display type)
▶
Driving data from the time of switching on the ig-
nition until the ignition is switched o again is stor-
ed in the memory. If the journey is interrupted for
more than 2 hours, the memory will be reset.
Long term or "2" (depending on display type)
▶
The driving data of all trips up to a total of 99
hours and 59 minutes driving time or 9999 km
driving distance is stored in the memory. If one of
the listed values is exceeded, the memory is reset.
From refuelling or "3" (depending on display type)
▶
Driving data from the time the fuel tank was last
filled is stored in the memory. The memory is reset
the next time the tank is filled.
Operation
Display driving data in the display of the instru-
ment cluster via the operating lever
›
The menu item
driving data
in the main menu in the
display of the instrument cluster.
A
Press - Select infor-
mation/Set values
B
Press - Confirm in-
formation
Display driving data in the display of the instru-
ment cluster via the multi-functional steering
wheel
›
The menu item
driving data
in the main menu in the
display of the instrument cluster.
A
Rotate - Select in-
formation/Set values
Press - Confirm in-
formation
Displaying driving data in the infotainment system
The driving data is displayed in the menu in the info-
tainment system.
Driving data
Or:
Driving data
Select and reset the memory for driving data in
the display of the instrument cluster using the
control lever
›
To set the memory for
the displayed driving
data, press button A
repeatedly.
›
To reset the memory,
press and hold button
A .
51
Driver information system › Driving data
Select memory for driving data in the display of
the instrument cluster via the multifunction steer-
ing wheel and reset it
›
To set the memory for
the displayed driving
data, press selection
wheel
A repeatedly.
›
To resetthe memory ,
hold the dial
A
.
Selecting the memory in the infotainment system
To select the memory, use the functional areas
in the following menu in the infotainment system.
Driving data
Or:
Driving data
Resetting the memory in the infotainment system
The memory is reset in the following menu in the in-
fotainment system.
Or:
Settings
Select driving data to be displayed
The driving data to be displayed is selected in the
following Infotainment menu:
Or:
Setting units
The units are set in the following infotainment menu:
Or:
Speed limit warning
Usage
The system oers the possibility to set a speed limit
beyond which an acoustic warning signal will sound
and the following warning message appears in the
display of the instrument cluster.
Setting
Setting the speed limit
›
Select and confirm the Warning menu item at or
(depending on display type).
›
When the vehicle is stationary, set the desired
speed limit and confirm.
›
While driving, drive at the desired speed and con-
firm it as the speed limit.
Resetting the speed limit
›
Select and confirm the Warning menu item at or
(depending on display type).
›
To reset the speed limit, confirm the stored value.
If the journey is interrupted for more than 2 hours,
the set limit is deactivated, but the set value remains
stored.
Vehicle condition
Display
The vehicle status is displayed in the following menu
in the Infotainment system.
Vehicle status
Or:
Vehicle status
A
Vehicle areas displayed in colour indicate associ-
ated warnings.
B
No notification
Warning messages regarding the vehicle con-
dition and their quantity
C
Display of information about the condition
of the START-STOP system
▶
Activation/deactivation of information
regarding the messages of the START-STOP
system in another screen display
Functionality
In the event of a system fault, messages regarding
the fault in question are displayed on the instrument
cluster display when the ignition is switched on.
52
Driver information system › Speed limit warning
Messages in relation to faults can also be displayed in
the Infotainment.
The warning messages will continue to be dis-
played until the malfunctions have been remedied.
After the message is displayed for the first time, only
the indicator lights
(Hazard) or (Warning) re-
main displayed.
Infotainment Swing
Infotainment overview
A
Touchscreen
Rotary control on the left
▶
Press: Switch Infotainment on/o
▶
Turn: Adjust Volume
Rotary control on the right
▶
Press: Confirm menu item
▶
Turn: select menu item/set value
Radio menu
Media menu
All menus
Phone menu
SmartLink menu
▶
Press: Display menu
▶
Hold: switch voice control for the SmartLink
application on/o
Information about vehicle settings
System
Control centre
Usage
The Infotainment control centre provides quick ac-
cess to the following functions.
▶
Setting the instrument and key illumination.
▶
Setting the personal data protection level.
▶
Functional surfaces of preferred features.
Opening the control centre
›
Press the bar at the
top of the screen and
drag down.
Closing the control centre
›
Tap on .
53
Infotainment Swing › Infotainment overview
Or:
›
Press the bar at the bottom of the screen and drag
up.
Or:
›
Wait 5 seconds.
Settings
›
To open edit mode, tap on an empty functional
surface or press the occupied functional surface of
the preferred feature.
›
To add the preferred feature, tap on the functional
surface of the desired function.
›
To remove the preferred feature, tap on
.
›
To close edit mode, tap on .
Restriction
For safety reasons, operation of some Infotainment
functions while driving is not possible or is restricted.
The Infotainment system indicates this by means of
a message in the screen.
Basic settings
Setting basic functions
The following Infotainment functions are set in the
menu.
▶
Time and date.
▶
Language.
▶
Units.
▶
Restore factory settings.
Sound settings
The Infotainment sound is set in the menu
.
The following menu items can be set.
▶
Setting the equalizer.
▶
Adjusting the volume ratio.
▶
Volume adjustment of individual Infotainment
functions.
Some are adjustable, for example the following
menu items.
▶
Volume adjustment of voice commands.
▶
Setting the maximum volume when Infotainment
is turned on.
▶
Speed-dependent volume setting.
▶
Setting the Infotainment to mute with the park-
ing aid switched on.
Depending on the equipment, the following ad-
vanced sound settings can be set.
▶
Setting space optimisation.
▶
Setting the audio profiles according to genre.
▶
Adjusting the subwoofer volume.
Configuration
wizard
The configuration wizard helps to set certain Info-
tainment functions.
The configuration wizard is automatically displayed if
there are at least two non-selected menu items after
turning on the Infotainment.
›
To switch o the automatic display, tap on
Don't
show again
when the configuration wizard is displayed.
›
For manual display, tap on
Configuration wiz-
ard
.
Setting the MENU
The position of the functional surfaces in the MENU
menu can be customized as follows.
›
Press and hold the desired functional surface until
it is free.
›
Move the functional surface to a dierent position.
Safely disconnect the connected USB device
NOTICE
Risk of damage to the data on the connected USB
device!
To safely disconnect a USB device, proceed as fol-
lows.
›
Tap
Remove safely
.
›
Select the desired device.
›
Disconnect the USB device.
Troubleshooting
Infotainment not responding
The Infotainment system must be restarted.
›
Press for more than 10 s.
›
Wait for the restart to complete.
System update
We recommend having the system update carried
out by a specialist company.
The system update ensures optimal function of the
Infotainment system, e.g. compatibility with new
phones.
Determine system version
›
Tap
System information
.
54
Infotainment Swing › System
Screen
Overview
A
Status bar
B
Bar with the functional surfaces of the displayed
menu
C
Display of the control centre
D
Other pages of the menu
Operation
NOTICE
Danger of screen damage!
▶
The Infotainment screen is operated by touching it
lightly with your finger.
In principle, operation by touch is identical to the op-
eration of a mobile phone.
The following operating modes are specific to the In-
fotainment system.
Dragging up or down with two fingers
▶
Quickly review the list
of phone contacts.
Settings
The following basic screen functions are set in the
Screen
menu.
▶
Brightness level of the screen.
▶
Switch o the screen.
▶
Display the time.
▶
Confirmation sounds and animations.
Infotainment keyboard
Keyboard overview
The arrangement of the keypad characters depends
on the Infotainment language that has been set.
In Infotainment, the following types are used, de-
pending on the context.
▶
Alphanumeric.
▶
Numeric.
▶
Keypad for input.
▶
Keypad for search.
Keypad example
A
Line input
▶
Delete characters before the cursor
▶
Tap: delete the last character
▶
Hold: delete all characters one after the other
Show list of searched entries
B
Keypad functional surfaces
▶
Switch to lowercase/uppercase
▶
/ Switch to the language keypad
▶
Switch to the numeric and character keypad
▶
Show additional keypad languages
▶
Insert a space
▶
Hold: Show additional character variants
▶
Move cursor to the left
▶
Move cursor to the right
▶
Confirm the characters that have been en-
tered
Numeric keypad
Keypad example
A
Line input
55
Infotainment Swing › Screen
▶
Delete characters before the cursor
▶
Tap: delete the last character
▶
Hold: delete all characters
B
Keypad functional surfaces
▶
Confirm the characters that have been entered
If dependent on context, alphanumeric characters
can be entered by holding down a function area with
the number.
Operation
The Infotainment keypad is used to enter characters,
letters and numbers.
The keypad will be automatically displayed when In-
fotainment prompts for characters.
Find
During the character input, a search for correspond-
ing entries takes place.
The entry to be searched can be entered, including
diacritics.
The keypad will only provide characters that match
the stored entries.
›
To display the searched entries, tap
.
Show additional keypad languages
To use the additional keypad languages, the desired
languages must be set first.
›
Tap or repeatedly tap the flag symbol until the
desired language keypad is displayed.
Further character variants
›
Press and hold the sign with the symbol .
›
Select the desired symbol.
Setting additional keypad languages
›
Tap
Additional keypad languages
.
Radio
Overview
Display main menu
›
Tap on .
Or:
›
Tap on .
Analogue and digital radio reception
A
Select frequency range
B
Depending on the frequency range
FM: Radio text
DAB: Radio text: name of the station group
C
Preset buttons for preferred stations
List of available stations
Show favourites
Show information about the station
Search stations manually (valid for AM and FM)
Settings
Infotainment supports digital radio reception in
DAB and DAB+ formats.
List of available stations
›
Tap on .
Played station
Station stored on the presets
A trac radio station is set
DAB signal is not available
Filter the stations in the list according to the
programme type, e.g. culture, music, sports, etc.
FM: when the RDS function is switched on
Manual update of the station list
In the station list, information about the program
type and the type of the regional station can be dis-
played.
Operation
Select station
›
Tap or at the top of the screen.
56
Infotainment Swing › Radio
SCAN function
The function plays receivable stations of the selec-
ted frequency range in succession for a few seconds
each.
›
To start automatic play press
Scan
or the right
rotary control .
›
To end automatic play press
or the right rotary
control
.
Search for stations manually
Manual search is available for AM and FM stations.
›
In the Radio main menu, tap
.
›
For a consecutive search, tap
or next to the
displayed frequency range scale.
Or:
›
Hold down the scroll mark on the frequency range
scale and move it to the intended value.
Or:
›
Turn the right rotary control.
Restriction
▶
Parking garages, tunnels, tall buildings or moun-
tains can restrict radio reception.
▶
In the rear side windows, there are antennas for re-
ceiving the radio signal.
Covering the panes with foils or metal-coated la-
bels may aect the reception of the radio signal.
Settings
Save the station currently being listened to as a fa-
vourite from the Radio main menu
›
Hold the desired station key for preferred stations
until the station is stored.
Save station to favourites from the list of available
stations
›
Hold the line with the name of the desired station.
›
Tap the desired preset button.
Delete favourites
›
In the Radio main menu , tap
Delete presets
.
›
To delete one preset button for preferred stations,
tap the desired station button and confirm the de-
letion.
›
To delete all preset buttons for preferred stations,
tap
All
and confirm the deletion.
Buttons
Applies to AM, FM and DAB frequency ranges.
The variant for changing stations using buttons
in the Radio main menu is set as follows.
›
In the Radio main menu, tap
Arrow buttons:
.
›
Choose the change variant.
Trac reception (TP) for FM stations on/o
Applies to the FM frequency range.
›
In the Radio main menu, tap
Trac program (TP)
.
Switch trac reception for DAB stations on/o
Applies to the DAB frequency range.
›
In the Radio main menu, turn on menu item
Traf-
fic Radio (TP)
.
›
In the Radio main menu, tap
Advanced settings
DAB
trac programme (TP)
on/o.
Assign station logos
Applies to AM, FM and DAB frequency ranges.
Infotainment oers the option to assign logos from
the pictures on an external source to the station but-
tons.
For station logos, images in jpg, gif, png, bmp format
with a maximum resolution of 500x500 pixels can be
used.
›
In the Radio main menu, tap
Station logos:
.
›
Tap the desired preset button.
›
Select the external source with the logo.
›
Find the desired logo and confirm.
Delete station logos
Applies to AM, FM and DAB frequency ranges.
›
In the Radio main menu, tap
Station logos:
.
›
To delete a logo, tap the desired preset button and
confirm the deletion.
›
To delete all logos, tap on
All
and confirm the dele-
tion.
Switch on/o autostore of logos for stations to be
stored to Favourites
Applies to FM and DAB frequency ranges.
When the function is switched on, a station logo
from the Infotainment memory is assigned when the
station is stored on a preset button.
›
In the Radio main menu, tap on
Advanced settings
Autostore station logos
.
Regional FM station logo
Applies to the FM frequency range.
Infotainment provides the option of using country-
specific FM station logos.
›
In the Radio main menu, tap on
Advanced settings
Region for station logo:
.
›
Choose the country.
Turn on/o radio text reception
Applies to the FM and DAB frequency ranges.
When the function is switched on and station pre-
sets are displayed, detailed information about the
broadcast content of the station being listened to, or
57
Infotainment Swing › Radio
the name of the station group for the DAB station, is
displayed.
›
In the Radio main menu, tap
Radio text
.
Switch automatic frequency control (AF) on/o
Applies to the FM frequency range.
When the function is switched on and the signal of
the FM station currently being listened to is weak,
Infotainment automatically sets the same station to
a dierent frequency with a better signal.
›
In the Radio main menu, tap on
Advanced settings
Automatic frequency control (AF)
.
Automatic change of frequency to a regionally
linked FM station
Applies to the FM frequency range.
Infotainment provides the option of automatically
switching to a regionally linked FM station in case of
signal loss of the FM station being listened to.
›
In the Radio main menu, tap on
Advanced settings
RDS Regional:
.
›
Select one of the following menu items.
▶
Fixed
- If there is a loss of signal, another station
must be set manually.
▶
Automatic
- automatic selection of the station with
the best signal reception.
If reception is lost in the given region, Infotainment
will automatically set another available region.
Sort stations in the list of available stations
Applies to the FM frequency range.
▶
In the Radio main menu, tap on
Advanced settings
Sort station list:
.
▶
Select the sorting of stations in alphabetical order
or by group.
Switch RDS on/o
Applies to the FM frequency range.
This menu item is only available in some countries.
›
In the Radio main menu, tap on
Advanced settings
Radio Data System (RDS)
.
If the RDS function is disabled, the following menu
items in the FM transmitters settings are not availa-
ble.
▶
Trac programme (TP).
▶
Radio text.
▶
RDS Regional.
▶
Automatic frequency control (AF).
▶
Regional station logos.
▶
Sorting of stations in the list of available stations.
Switch additional DAB announcements on/o
Applies to the DAB frequency range.
When the function is switched on, other announce-
ments are received as trac announcements. For ex-
ample, weather news, sports reports,
financial news,
etc.
›
In the Radio main menu, tap on
Advanced settings
Other DAB announcements
.
Enable/disable automatic programme tracking of a
DAB station
Applies to the DAB frequency range.
When the function is switched on and the DAB sta-
tion is lost, Infotainment automatically changes to
the same station with a better signal in a dierent
DAB station group.
›
In the Radio main menu, tap on
Advanced settings
DAB - DAB station tracking
.
Turn on/o automatic switching from a DAB sta-
tion to the same FM station
Applies to the DAB frequency range.
When the function is switched on and the DAB sta-
tion being listened to is lost, Infotainment automati-
cally changes to the same FM station. The symbol
(FM) is displayed after the station name.
When the corresponding DAB station can be re-
ceived again, the station automatically changes from
FM to DAB.
›
In the Radio main menu, tap on
Advanced settings
Automatic DAB - FM switching
.
Turn on/o automatic switching to a similar DAB
station
Applies to the DAB frequency range.
When the function is switched on and DAB station
being listened to is lost, Infotainment automatically
changes to another DAB station with similar content.
›
In the Radio main menu, tap
Advanced settings
Switch to a similar station
.
Media
What you should be mindful of
▶
Do not save any important data or that which has
not been backed up on the connected audio sour-
ces. ŠKODA assumes no responsibility for lost or
damaged files or connected audio sources.
▶
When changing or connecting an audio source, this
may cause sudden changes in volume. Reduce the
volume before changing or connecting an audio
source.
▶
When connecting an audio source, the source in-
formation messages can be displayed. These mes-
sages must be observed and, if necessary, con-
firmed.
▶
The national copyright laws that apply in your
country must be observed.
58
Infotainment Swing › Media
Overview
Display main menu
›
Tap on .
Or:
›
Tap on
.
A
Select source
Manage files/multimedia database
Settings
Player controls
Operation - Basics
A
Album picture/symbol of the connected source
Tap: start playback
Tap: pause
Tap within 3 seconds of starting playback: play
the previous title
Tap after 3 seconds of the starting playback:
play the current title from the beginning
Hold: fast rewind within the title
Tap: play the next title
Hold: fast forward within the title
Movement within the title is also possible by drag-
ging your finger over the timeline.
Extended operation
Turn repeat playback of the current track on/o
Turn repeat playback of the current album/fold-
er on/o
Turn random playback of the current album/
folder on/o
Settings
Turn title playback including subfolders on/o
›
In the Media main menu, tap on
Mix/Repeat including
subfolders
.
Enable/disable playback of online media from an
Apple device
›
To turn on/o in the Media main menu, tap on
Include online media from an iPod
.
Under the following conditions, media in the Apple
iCloud is included in the list of available media.
✓ The mobile device is not connected using Apple
CarPlay.
✓ The mobile device is connected to Apple iCloud.
Trac
›
To turn on/o the trac monitoring during the
playback of media files, go to the Media main menu
and tap on
Trac programme (TP).
Safely disconnect the connected USB device
NOTICE
Risk of damage to the data on the connected USB
device!
To safely disconnect a USB device, proceed as fol-
lows.
›
In the Media main menu, tap
Remove USB safely
.
›
Select the desired device.
›
Disconnect the USB device.
59
Infotainment Swing › Media
Supported sources and files
Source Interface Type Specification File system
USB
USB 1.x; 2.x 3.x
or higher with USB
2.x support
MSC
USB stick
VFAT
FAT16
FAT32
exFAT
NTFS
HDD
(without special
software)
USB devices that
use the USB mass
storage support
protocol
MTP
Devices running
the Android or
Windows Phone
operating system
that support the
Media Transfer
Protocol
Apple
Devices with an
iOS operating sys-
tem
HFS+
Bluetooth® player Bluetooth® -
Bluetooth® proto-
cols
A2DP and AVRCP
(1.0 - 1.5)
-
Supported sources
Apple iAP1 protocol is not supported by Infotainment.
Compatibility of mobile devices
It is possible to check the ŠKODA web pages to see if Infotainment is compatible with the selected mobile
device being tested. This check is carried out by using the following reference or by reading the QR code.
▶
http://go.skoda.eu/compatibility
Compression for-
mat
Codec type File exten-
sion
Max. bit rate
[kbps]
Max. sam-
pling rate
[kHz]
Multi channels
MPEG
MPEG 1 Layer 3 mp3 32 - 320 32, 44, 48
Mono, dual mono,
Stereo, Joint
Stereo
MPEG 2 Layer 3
mp3 8 - 160
16, 22, 24 Mono,
Stereo, Joint
Stereo
MPEG 2.5 Layer 3 8, 11, 12
WMA
Windows Media
Audio 9 and 9.1
wma
8 - 384
8, 11, 12, 16,
22, 32, 44,
48
Mono, Stereo,
Joint stereo
Windows Media
Audio 9.2
8 - 320
Windows Media
Audio 10
8 - 768
32, 44, 48,
96
ADTS
AAC LC
aac
8 - 640
22, 24, 32,
44, 48
Mono,
Stereo
AAC HE 8 - 320
16, 22, 24,
32, 44, 48
AAC HEv2 16 - 64
60
Infotainment Swing › Media
Compression for-
mat
Codec type File exten-
sion
Max. bit rate
[kbps]
Max. sam-
pling rate
[kHz]
Multi channels
FLAC FLAC flac -
8, 11, 12, 16,
22, 24, 32,
44, 48, 64,
88, 96
Mono, Stereo,
5.1, 7.1
RIFF WAV wav 64 - 3072
8, 11, 12, 16,
22, 24, 32,
44, 48, 96
Mono,
Stereo
SBC Bluetooth A2DP - 8 - 345 44, 48
Mono, Stereo,
Joint stereo
Supported audio files
For files in MP4 format, only the soundtrack playback is carried out.
Files that are protected by the DRM- and iTunes® methods are not supported by Infotainment.
Codec type File extension
M3U m3u
M3U8 m3u8
PLS pls
WPL wpl
ASX asx
PLA pls
Supported playlists
Mobile device management
Overview
Using mobile device management, devices can be
connected, disconnected, and interchanged.
Display mobile device management
›
Tap on
Select mobile phone
.
Or:
›
Tap on
mobile devices
.
The device enables a connection via the Blue-
tooth®“hands-free profile”
The device is connected via the Blue-
tooth®“hands-free profile”
The device enables a connection via the Blue-
tooth® audio profile
The device is connected via the Bluetooth® audio
profile
The device enables a SmartLink connection to
be made via Android Auto
Remove the device from the list previously con-
nected devices
The device enables a SmartLink connection to
be made via Apple CarPlay
The device enables a SmartLink connection to
be made via MirrorLink
Connected / Previously connected devices
Available devices
Limitations of mobile devices and applications
Availability of features
The availability of certain features depends on the
type of mobile device, as well as that of the applica-
tions installed.
Compatibility of mobile devices
It is possible to check the ŠKODA web pages to see
if Infotainment is compatible with the selected mo-
bile device being tested. This check is carried out by
using the following reference or by reading the QR
code.
▶
http://go.skoda.eu/compatibility
A
B
61
Infotainment Swing › Mobile device management
Bluetooth® compatibility of mobile devices
Due to the large number of mobile devices, it is not
possible to guarantee total Bluetooth® compatibility
with Infotainment. Bluetooth® compatibility depends
on the Bluetooth® version as well as the implementa-
tion of Bluetooth® protocols by the manufacturer of
the mobile device.
Applications in mobile devices
Mobile devices can be used to install applications
that allow you to view additional information on the
Infotainment screen, or to operate the Infotainment
system.
Due to the variety of applications, as well as their on-
going development, the available applications may
not function on all mobile devices. ŠKODA AUTO as-
sumes no liability for their proper functioning.
The scope of available applications and their func-
tionality is dependent on the type of Infotainment, as
well as the vehicle and country.
Connection set-up
Connect a mobile device to Infotainment
›
Find available Bluetooth® devices in the mobile de-
vice.
›
Select the Infotainment Bluetooth® unit.
The name of the unit can be found under the menu
item
Bluetooth
Name:
.
›
Confirm the PIN; enter it if necessary and then
confirm.
Connect Infotainment to a non-paired mobile de-
vice
›
Tap on
Select mobile phone
.
›
Select the desired device from the list of available
devices.
›
Select the desired Bluetooth® profile.
›
Confirm the PIN; enter it if necessary and then
confirm.
›
If two devices are connected to the Infotainment,
select the device to be replaced.
Connect Infotainment to a previously connected
mobile device
›
Tap on
Select mobile phone
.
›
Select the desired device from the list of previous-
ly connected devices.
›
Select the desired Bluetooth® profile.
›
If two devices are connected to the Infotainment,
select the device to be replaced.
SmartLink Connection
Infotainment provides the ability to connect Smar-
tLink to compatible mobile devices using the follow-
ing connection types.
Android Auto
Apple CarPlay
MirrorLink
Mobile devices can be connected to the Infotain-
ment via USB cable or Wi-Fi, as long as the mobile
device supports it.
›
Connect the mobile device to the Infotainment.
›
Tap the icon of the supported connection.
Telephone
Telephone main menu
Display main menu
›
Tap on .
Or:
›
Tap on .
A
Name of the connected telephone
▶
Tap: Show list of previously connected phones
B
Name of telephone service providers
C
Preset buttons for preferred contacts
Change the main telephone with the additional
telephone
Enter telephone number
Contact list
Call lists
Switch on voice control for the connected tele-
phone
Settings
Conditions for connecting a telephone with
Infotainment
✓ The Bluetooth® function of the Infotainment and
the telephone need to be switched on.
62
Infotainment Swing › Telephone
The Bluetooth® function of the Infotainment is
switched on in the menu item
Bluetooth
Bluetooth
.
✓ Visibility of the Infotainment is switched on.
The visibility of the Infotainment is switched on in
the menu item
Bluetooth
Visibility:
.
✓ The telephone is within signal range of the Info-
tainment's Bluetooth® unit.
✓ The telephone is compatible with Infotainment.
Telephone operation
Enter telephone number
›
In the Telephone main menu, tap
.
›
Enter the telephone number using the numeric
keypad that is displayed.
The displayed numeric keypad can also be used
for searching for contacts.
If, for example, the digits 32 are entered, contacts
with the letter sequence DA, FA, EB etc. are dis-
played next to the numeric keypad.
List of telephone contacts
The list of telephone contacts is imported from the
connected main telephone.
›
Tap to display the contact list in the telephone
main menu
.
›
To find details within the list, tap
Find
.
›
Enter the details you wish to find.
›
To establish a connection with a contact, tap the
functional area showing the desired contact.
If a contact has multiple telephone numbers, select
the telephone number from the displayed list.
›
To display the details for a contact, tap
.
Establish a connection to the voice mailbox num-
ber
›
In the Telephone main menu, tap
.
Telephone conversation
Depending on the context of the telephone conver-
sation, the following functions can be selected.
End connection / reject incoming call / end call
Answer an incoming call / return to the held call
Switch the ringer o / on
Hold a call
Switch the microphone o / on
Show details of the caller
Answer a call from the second telephone during
a call on the first telephone
The ongoing call on the first telephone is termi-
nated by accepting the call.
›
To switch the call tone from the speakers to the
telephone, go to the telephone main menu and tap
on
hands-free
.
/
/
›
To switch the call tone from the telephone to the
speakers, tap .
Conference call
A conference call is a joint telephone conversation
with a minimum of three and a maximum of six par-
ticipants.
›
Make the next call during an ongoing conversation/
conference.
Or:
›
Accept a new incoming call by tapping the function
area .
›
To start a conference call, tap on the functional
area
.
During an ongoing conference call, the following
functions can be selected depending on the context.
Hold the conference call and leave temporarily
(the conference will continue in the background)
Return to the conference being held
Switch the microphone o / on
End the conference
Show details of the conference call
In the details of the conference call, depending on
the connected telephone, the following functions
can be selected.
Show details of the conference call participants
End conversation with the conference call par-
ticipant
Conversation with a participant outside of the
conference call
Settings for Infotainment telephone functions
Telephone-Infotainment-Connection types
The way in which the telephone is connected de-
pends on the number of phones currently connected
to the Infotainment.
▶
No telephone - The telephone is connected as a
main telephone.
▶
One telephone - The telephone is connected as an
additional telephone.
▶
Two telephones - Select the telephone to be re-
placed.
›
To switch between the main telephone and the
supplementary telephone in the main menu, tap
telephone
.
Connect the telephone to Infotainment
›
Find available Bluetooth® devices on the phone.
›
Select the Infotainment Bluetooth® unit.
The name of the unit can be found under the menu
item
Bluetooth
Name:
.
›
Confirm the PIN; enter it if necessary and then
confirm.
/
63
Infotainment Swing › Telephone
Connect Infotainment to a non-paired telephone -
no telephone is connected
›
Tap on .
Or:
›
Tap on .
›
Follow the instructions in the Infotainment screen.
Connecting Infotainment to a non-paired tele-
phone - another telephone is connected
›
Tap on
Select mobile phone
.
›
Select the desired device from the list of available
devices.
›
Select the desired Bluetooth® profile.
›
Confirm the PIN; enter it if necessary and then
confirm.
The telephone is connected as an additional tele-
phone.
Or:
›
If two telephones are connected to the Infotain-
ment, select the telephone to be replaced.
Connect Infotainment to a previously paired tele-
phone
›
Tap on
Select mobile phone
.
›
Select the desired device from the list of previous-
ly connected devices.
The telephone is connected as an additional tele-
phone.
Or:
›
If two telephones are connected to the Infotain-
ment, select the telephone to be replaced.
Manage preset buttons for preferred contacts
›
To save the desired preset button, press and hold
A .
›
Select a contact from the displayed list.
›
Select a contact from the displayed list.
›
To display the menu for deleting go to the Tele-
phone main menu and tap
manage favourites
.
›
To delete one preset, tap on the list entry and con-
firm the deletion.
Or:
›
To delete all presets, tap on
All
and confirm the de-
letion.
Import telephone contacts
After first connecting the main telephone with Info-
tainment, telephone contacts will start to be impor-
ted into the Infotainment memory.
Infotainment can import up to 2000 telephone con-
tacts together with contact pictures. Each contact
can include max. 5 telephone numbers.
Depending on the type of telephone, import confir-
mation may be required.
Update telephone contacts
When re-connecting the telephone with Infotain-
ment, an automatic update of the list is carried out.
›
For a manual update of the list in the telephone
main menu, tap on
User profile
Import contacts
.
Sort contacts in the phonebook
›
In the telephone main menu, tap on
User profile
Sort by:
and select the sort type.
Ringer
Some phones do not allow the use of the telephone
ringer; instead, the Infotainment ringer is used.
›
To set the Infotainment ringer in the telephone
main menu, tap on
user profile
Select ringtone
.
›
Select the ringtone.
Number for the voice mailbox
›
To set the voice mailbox number in the telephone
main menu, tap on
user profile
Mailbox number:
.
›
Enter the number of the voice mailbox.
Simultaneous calls
This applies to some countries.
Depending on the connected telephone, it is possible
to answer the next incoming call and hold the previ-
ous call.
›
To switch on simultaneous calls, tap on telephone
Parallel talks
.
Wi-Fi
Functionality
Wi-Fi can be used for the SmartLinkConnection.
The Infotainment hotspot can connect up to 3 mo-
bile devices.
›
To display the list of connected mobile devices, tap
on
Wi-Fi
Connected devices
.
Settings
Connect a mobile device to the Infotainment hot-
spot
›
Turn on the Infotainment Wi-Fi hotspot in the
menu item
Wi-Fi
Wi-Fi hotspot
.
64
Infotainment Swing › Wi-Fi
›
Turn on the Wi-Fi on the mobile device.
›
In the list of available Wi-Fi devices, look for Info-
tainment Wi-Fi.
The name of the Infotainment is taken from the
menu item
Wi-Fi
Network name:
.
›
Select the Infotainment hotspot and enter the re-
quired password.
The password for connecting to the Infotainment
hotspot is taken from the menu item
Wi-
Fi
Network key
.
›
Confirm the connection.
Security level of the Infotainment hotspot
The security level is factory-set at
WPA2
and cannot
be changed.
Change password for connection to Infotainment
hotspot
The password must be a minimum of 8 and a maxi-
mum of 63 characters.
▶
Tap
Wi-Fi
Network key
.
▶
Enter the password and confirm.
SmartLink
Functionality
SmartLink oers the ability to display and operate
certified applications from a connected mobile de-
vice in the Infotainment screen.
Certification may be conditional upon the use of the
latest update to the particular SmartLink application.
Applications include, for example, apps for route
guidance, telephoning, listening to music, etc.
Mobile devices can be connected via a USB cable or
Wi-Fi.
Supported connection types
SmartLink supports the following connection types.
▶
Android Auto.
▶
Apple CarPlay.
▶
MirrorLink.
Overview of the SmartLink connection
Main menu SmartLink
›
Tap on .
Or:
›
Tap on .
A
Previously connected device
B
Currently connected device
Display information about SmartLink
Separation of the active connection
Settings for the SmartLink menu
Android Auto
Navigation applications
Telephone applications
Overview of running applications, phone calls, in-
coming text messages, and more.
Music applications
Display of other available applications as well as
the option to return to the SmartLink main menu
Turn on voice control (Google Voice)
Apple CarPlay
A
List of available applications
Depending on the duration of operation:
▶
Tap: Return to the Apple CarPlay main menu
▶
Hold: Switch on voice control (Siri)
65
Infotainment Swing › SmartLink
MirrorLink
It is not possible to operate the application while
driving
Return to the SmartLink main menu
List of running applications
Display of the last running application in connec-
ted mobile devices
Settings
Connection conditions
General connection conditions
✓ The mobile device supports the following Smar-
tLink connection types: Android Auto. Apple Car-
Play and MirrorLink.
✓ Mobile devices, as well as the type of Smar-
tLinkconnection, are supported in the respective
market.
✓ Some connected mobile devices require the mo-
bile device to be “unlocked”.
Conditions for Android Auto
✓ The device to be connected must have Android
AutoSupport.
A list of devices, supported regions and applica-
tions that the Android Auto connection supports
can be found on the websites of Google Inc..
✓ The Android Auto application needs to be instal-
led on the mobile device.
✓ Some applications require the data connection in
the mobile device to be turned on.
Conditions for Apple CarPlay
✓ The device to be connected must have Apple
CarPlaySupport.
A list of devices, supported regions and applica-
tions that the Apple CarPlay connection supports
can be found on the websites of Apple Inc..
✓ Siri voice control is on.
✓ The data connection is switched on in the mobile
device.
Conditions for MirrorLink
✓ The device to be connected must have Mirror-
LinkSupport.
A list of devices and applications that the Mirror-
Link connection supports can be found on the
websites of Car Connectivity Consorcium®.
✓ The MirrorLink application needs to be installed
on the mobile device.
✓ Some applications require the data connection in
the connected mobile device to be turned on.
Operation
Operation of the running MirrorLink application
Display of control surfaces at the bottom
Display of control surfaces at the top
Return to the MirrorLink main menu
Restriction
Restriction of the Wi-Fi connection
In some countries, the Wi-Fi connection is restric-
ted for legal reasons. When crossing the border of
the country in question, the connection with a mo-
bile device connected via Wi-Fi can be ended or
restricted.
Find out about country-specific legal restrictions.
If necessary, switch o the Wi-Fi manually.
Establishment of a Wi-Fi connection is only possible
in vehicles with online services, or when making an
emergency call.
Restriction of SmartLink applications while driving
For safety reasons, operation of some SmartLinkap-
plications while driving is not possible or is restric-
ted.
SmartLink settings
Apple CarPlay - Connection via USB
›
Turn on the Infotainment.
›
Turn on the mobile device.
›
Connect the mobile device to the front USB input
using a cable.
›
Choose to connect via Apple CarPlay.
Apple CarPlay - Connection via Wi-Fi from Info-
tainment
›
Turn on Bluetooth® and Bluetooth® visibility in the
mobile device.
›
Tap on
mobile devices
.
›
In the displayed list, look for and select the desired
device with the symbol .
›
Follow the instructions on the Infotainment screen
and confirm the Bluetooth® pairing.
›
If another device is connected to the Infotainment,
select the device to be replaced.
66
Infotainment Swing › SmartLink
Apple CarPlay - Connection via Wi-Fi from mobile
devices
To establish a connection, the following conditions
must be met.
✓ The minimum iOS version is 9.
✓ No other mobile device can be connected via
SmartLink.
✓ Wi-Fi and Bluetooth® functionality is switched on
in the Infotainment system.
›
In the mobile device, turn on the CarPlay function.
›
Press and hold the button on the multifunction
steering wheel.
The Infotainment screen displays a connection
message with the name of the Bluetooth® unit of
the Infotainment.
›
Find available Bluetooth® devices on the phone.
›
Select the Infotainment Bluetooth® unit.
›
If necessary, confirm the PIN.
›
In the Infotainment screen, select the connection
type Apple CarPlay.
Apple CarPlay – Disconnection
›
In the Apple CarPlay main menu, tap on the “ŠKO-
DA” functional area.
›
Tap on
.
Android Auto - Connection via USB
›
Turn on the Infotainment.
›
Turn on the mobile device.
›
Connect the mobile device to the front USB input
using a cable.
›
Choose to connect via Android Auto.
Android Auto - Connection via Wi-Fi from Info-
tainment
›
Tap on
mobile devices
.
›
Select the desired device from the list of available
devices.
›
Select the Bluetooth®hands-free profile.
›
Confirm the PIN; enter it if necessary and then
confirm.
›
If another device is connected to the Infotainment,
select the device to be replaced.
›
From the list of known devices, select the desired
device with the
symbol.
Android Auto - Disconnection
›
In the main menu of Android Auto tap on “Re-
turn to ŠKODA”.
›
Tap on .
MirrorLink - Connection via USB
›
Turn on the Infotainment.
›
Turn on the mobile device.
›
Connect the mobile device to the front USB input
using a cable.
›
Choose to connect through MirrorLink.
MirrorLink - Connection via Wi-Fi from Infotain-
ment
›
Turn on Wi-Fi and visibility in the mobile device.
›
Turn on the Infotainment Wi-Fi hotspot in the
menu item
Wi-Fi
Wi-Fi hotspot
.
›
In the list of available Wi-Fi devices, look for Info-
tainment Wi-Fi.
›
Enter the required password.
›
With some mobile devices, communication be-
tween the device and the Infotainment in the noti-
fication bar of the mobile device must be con-
firmed.
›
Tap on
mobile devices
.
›
From the list of available devices, select the de-
sired device with the symbol.
MirrorLink - Disconnection
›
In the MirrorLink main menu, tap .
›
Tap on .
Change to another device / connection type
Infotainment allows you to switch between currently
connected devices and the connection type.
›
Tap on
.
›
Select the desired device or connection type.
ŠKODA Connect online services
Functionality
ŠKODA Connect online service oer the option of
connecting the vehicle to the online world. They thus
represent an extension of the vehicle and Infotain-
ment functions.
For the functionality of the ŠKODA Connect Online
Services, the vehicle must be within range of a mo-
bile network through which the services are provi-
ded. The availability, the connection speed and the
technology used in the mobile network can be dier-
ent in the respective countries and are dependent on
the mobile network operator.
The ŠKODA Connect online services are not included
in the equipment of the vehicle. They can be ordered
separately on the ŠKODA Connect Portal website or
in the ŠKODA Connect application.
The oer of ŠKODA Connect online services de-
pends on the type of vehicle and its trim level, Info-
tainment and country. Availability in each country
can be checked on the ŠKODA Connect website.
The rights and obligations of the Parties with respect
to the provision of these services are governed by a
separate agreement. Current legal documents re-
garding the online services can be found on the
ŠKODA Connect Portal as well as the ŠKODA Con-
nect application.
67
Infotainment Swing › ŠKODA Connect online services
ŠKODA Connect website
▶
http://go.skoda.eu/skoda-connect
For example, the ŠKODA Connect web-
site contains the latest information
about the online services, a link to the
ŠKODA Connect Portal as well as the
option of downloading the ŠKODA Con-
nect application.
ŠKODA Connect Portal website
▶
http://go.skoda.eu/connect-portal
The ŠKODA Connect Portal website is
used, for example, for registration, acti-
vation and ordering of online services. It
also provides the option of remote ac-
cess to the vehicle.
Information call
The information call may be used in the case of prob-
lems with the online services or for information re-
garding the products and services of the ŠKODA
brand.
✓ The functional condition represents the active
online ŠKODA Connect services.
›
Press the button.
Breakdown call
The breakdown call can be used in the event of a
breakdown.
✓ The functional condition represents the active
online ŠKODA Connect services.
›
Press the
button.
ŠKODA Connect Application
The ŠKODA Connect application enables remote ac-
cess to the vehicle using a mobile device. It can also
be used for user registration and to activate and
configure the online services.
The application can be downloaded to the mobile de-
vice after scanning the following QR code or link.
▶
http://go.skoda.eu/skodaconnectapp
Settings
Use of the ŠKODA Connect online services requires
prior registration of the main user and subsequent
activation of the online services.
Registration and activation of online services
User registration, as well as the activation of the
ŠKODA Connect online services, is completed on the
ŠKODA Connect Portal website or in the ŠKODA
Connect application.
In order to complete user registration, you will need
to access your e-mails.
In order to activate ŠKODA Connect, proceed as fol-
lows.
›
Switch on the ignition and the Infotainment.
›
Tap
ŠKODA Connect (online services)
Registration
.
›
Enter and confirm the registration PIN you have re-
ceived during user and vehicle registration on the
ŠKODA Connect Portal website or in the ŠKODA
Connect application.
›
Wait for the
Vehicle activation complete
message to appear.
›
Confirm any messages on the screen.
Delete user
›
Switch on the ignition and the Infotainment.
›
Tap
ŠKODA Connect (online services)
Registration
.
›
Tap
Delete main user
Delete
.
›
Confirm the deletion.
Connection status of the online services
The status of the connection to the ŠKODA Connect
online services is displayed by the discolouration of
the symbol shown in the status bar on the Info-
tainment screen.
▶
White - online services are available.
▶
Grey - online services are not available.
Setting the personal data protection level
The level of protection of personal data in ŠKODA
Connect online services is indicated by an icon in the
status bar on the Infotainment screen.
›
Open the Infotainment
control enter by hold-
ing down the bar at the
top of the screen and
pulling it down.
68
Infotainment Swing › ŠKODA Connect online services
›
To Display information, tap
for the respective
protection levels.
›
To display the menu for Setting the protection
level, tap the
A symbol.
Or:
›
Tap
ŠKODA Connect (online services)
Privacy settings
and manage services
.
›
Select one of the following options for sending ve-
hicle and user data.
Send only the legally required data.
Send the vehicle and user data.
Send the vehicle and user data as well as the da-
ta regarding the vehicle position.
Division of vehicle position data on the website
ŠKODA Connect Portal and in the ŠKODA Con-
nect application .
Management of online services
In the service management, it is possible to display
information about the online services, the validity of
their licence, or to switch the services on/o.
›
Tap
ŠKODA Connect (online services)
Privacy settings
and manage services
.
Infotainment Bolero
Infotainment overview
A
Touchscreen
Rotary control on the left
▶
Press: Switch Infotainment on/o
▶
Turn: Adjust Volume
Rotary control on the right
▶
Press: Confirm menu item
▶
Turn: select menu item/set value
Radio menu
Media menu
All menus
Phone menu
SmartLink menu
▶
Tap: Display menu
▶
Hold: switch voice control for the SmartLink
application on/o
Information about vehicle settings
System
Control centre
Usage
The Infotainment control centre provides quick ac-
cess to the following functions.
▶
Setting the instrument and key illumination.
▶
Setting the personal data protection level.
▶
Functional surfaces of preferred features.
Opening the control centre
›
Press the bar at the
top of the screen and
drag down.
Closing the control centre
›
Tap on .
69
Infotainment Bolero › Infotainment overview
Or:
›
Press the bar at the bottom of the screen and drag
up.
Or:
›
Wait 5 seconds.
Settings
›
To open edit mode, tap on an empty functional
surface or press the occupied functional surface of
the preferred feature.
›
To add the preferred feature, tap on the functional
surface of the desired function.
›
To remove the preferred feature, tap on
.
›
To close edit mode, tap on .
Restriction
For safety reasons, operation of some Infotainment
functions while driving is not possible or is restricted.
The Infotainment system indicates this by means of
a message in the screen.
Basic settings
Setting basic functions
The following Infotainment functions are set in the
menu.
▶
Time and date.
▶
Language.
▶
Units.
▶
Restore factory settings.
Sound settings
The Infotainment sound is set in the menu
.
The following menu items can be set.
▶
Setting the equalizer.
▶
Adjusting the volume ratio.
▶
Volume adjustment of individual Infotainment
functions.
Some are adjustable, for example the following
menu items.
▶
Volume adjustment of voice commands.
▶
Setting the maximum volume when Infotainment
is turned on.
▶
Speed-dependent volume setting.
▶
Setting the Infotainment to mute with the park-
ing aid switched on.
Depending on the equipment, the following ad-
vanced sound settings can be set.
▶
Setting space optimisation.
▶
Setting the audio profiles according to genre.
▶
Adjusting the subwoofer volume.
Configuration
wizard
The configuration wizard helps to set certain Info-
tainment functions.
The configuration wizard is automatically displayed if
there are at least two non-selected menu items after
turning on the Infotainment.
›
To switch o the automatic display, tap on
Don't
show again
when the configuration wizard is displayed.
›
For manual display, tap on
Configuration wiz-
ard
.
Setting the MENU
The position of the functional surfaces in the MENU
menu can be customized as follows.
›
Press and hold the desired functional surface until
it is free.
›
Move the functional surface to a dierent position.
Safely disconnect the connected USB device
NOTICE
Risk of damage to the data on the connected USB
device!
To safely disconnect a USB device, proceed as fol-
lows.
›
Tap
Remove safely
.
›
Select the desired device.
›
Disconnect the USB device.
Troubleshooting
Infotainment not responding
The Infotainment system must be restarted.
›
Press for more than 10 s.
›
Wait for the restart to complete.
System update
We recommend having the system update carried
out by a specialist company.
The system update ensures optimal function of the
Infotainment system, e.g. compatibility with new
phones.
Determine system version
›
Tap
System information
.
70
Infotainment Bolero › System
Screen
Overview
A
Status bar
B
Bar with the functional surfaces of the displayed
menu
C
Display of the control centre
D
Other pages of the menu
Operation
NOTICE
Danger of screen damage!
▶
The Infotainment screen is operated by touching it
lightly with your finger.
In principle, operation by touch is identical to the op-
eration of a mobile phone.
The following operating modes are specific to the In-
fotainment system.
Dragging up or down with two fingers
▶
Quickly review the list
of phone contacts.
Settings
The following basic screen functions are set in the
Screen
menu.
▶
Brightness level of the screen.
▶
Switch o the screen.
▶
Display the time.
▶
Confirmation sounds and animations.
Infotainment keyboard
Keypad overview
The arrangement of the keypad characters depends
on the Infotainment language that has been set.
In Infotainment, the following types are used, de-
pending on the context.
▶
Alphanumeric.
▶
Numeric.
▶
Keypad for input.
▶
Keypad for search.
Keypad example
A
Line input
▶
Delete characters before the cursor
▶
Tap: delete the last character
▶
Hold: delete all characters one after the other
Show list of searched entries
B
Keypad functional surfaces
▶
Switch to lowercase/uppercase
▶
/ Switch to the language keypad
▶
Switch to the numeric and character keypad
▶
Show additional keypad languages
▶
Insert a space
▶
Hold: Show additional character variants
▶
Move cursor to the left
▶
Move cursor to the right
▶
Confirm the characters that have been en-
tered
Numeric keypad
Keypad example
A
Line input
71
Infotainment Bolero › Screen
▶
Delete characters before the cursor
▶
Tap: delete the last character
▶
Hold: delete all characters
B
Keypad functional surfaces
▶
Confirm the characters that have been entered
If dependent on context, alphanumeric characters
can be entered by holding down a function area with
the number.
Operation
The Infotainment keypad is used to enter characters,
letters and numbers.
The keypad will be automatically displayed when In-
fotainment prompts for characters.
Find
During the character input, a search for correspond-
ing entries takes place.
The entry to be searched can be entered, including
diacritics.
The keypad will only provide characters that match
the stored entries.
›
To display the searched entries, tap
.
Show additional keypad languages
To use the additional keypad languages, the desired
languages must be set first.
›
Tap or repeatedly tap the flag symbol until the
desired language keypad is displayed.
Further character variants
›
Press and hold the sign with the symbol .
›
Select the desired symbol.
Setting additional keypad languages
›
Tap
Additional keypad languages
.
Radio
Overview
Display main menu
›
Tap on .
Or:
›
Tap on .
Analogue and digital radio reception
A
Select frequency range
B
Depending on the frequency range
FM: Radio text
DAB: Radio text: name of the station group
C
Preset buttons for preferred stations
List of available stations
Show favourites
Show information about the station
Search stations manually (valid for AM and FM)
Settings
Infotainment supports digital radio reception in
DAB and DAB+ formats.
List of available stations
›
Tap on .
Played station
Station stored on the presets
A trac radio station is set
DAB signal is not available
Filter the stations in the list according to the
programme type, e.g. culture, music, sports, etc.
FM: when the RDS function is switched on
Manual update of the station list
In the station list, information about the program
type and the type of the regional station can be dis-
played.
Operation
Select station
›
Tap or at the top of the screen.
72
Infotainment Bolero › Radio
SCAN function
The function plays receivable stations of the selec-
ted frequency range in succession for a few seconds
each.
›
To start automatic play press
Scan
or the right
rotary control .
›
To end automatic play press
or the right rotary
control
.
Search for stations manually
Manual search is available for AM and FM stations.
›
In the Radio main menu, tap
.
›
For a consecutive search, tap
or next to the
displayed frequency range scale.
Or:
›
Hold down the scroll mark on the frequency range
scale and move it to the intended value.
Or:
›
Turn the right rotary control.
Restriction
▶
Parking garages, tunnels, tall buildings or moun-
tains can restrict radio reception.
▶
In the rear side windows, there are antennas for re-
ceiving the radio signal.
Covering the panes with foils or metal-coated la-
bels may aect the reception of the radio signal.
Settings
Save the station currently being listened to as a fa-
vourite from the Radio main menu
›
Hold the desired station key for preferred stations
until the station is stored.
Save station to favourites from the list of available
stations
›
Hold the line with the name of the desired station.
›
Tap the desired preset button.
Delete favourites
›
In the Radio main menu , tap
Delete presets
.
›
To delete one preset button for preferred stations,
tap the desired station button and confirm the de-
letion.
›
To delete all preset buttons for preferred stations,
tap
All
and confirm the deletion.
Buttons
Applies to AM, FM and DAB frequency ranges.
The variant for changing stations using buttons
in the Radio main menu is set as follows.
›
In the Radio main menu, tap
Arrow buttons:
.
›
Choose the change variant.
Trac reception (TP) for FM stations on/o
Applies to the FM frequency range.
›
In the Radio main menu, tap
Trac program (TP)
.
Switch trac reception for DAB stations on/o
Applies to the DAB frequency range.
›
In the Radio main menu, turn on menu item
Traf-
fic Radio (TP)
.
›
In the Radio main menu, tap
Advanced settings
DAB
trac programme (TP)
on/o.
Assign station logos
Applies to AM, FM and DAB frequency ranges.
Infotainment oers the option to assign logos from
the pictures on an external source to the station but-
tons.
For station logos, images in jpg, gif, png, bmp format
with a maximum resolution of 500x500 pixels can be
used.
›
In the Radio main menu, tap
Station logos:
.
›
Tap the desired preset button.
›
Select the external source with the logo.
›
Find the desired logo and confirm.
Delete station logos
Applies to AM, FM and DAB frequency ranges.
›
In the Radio main menu, tap
Station logos:
.
›
To delete a logo, tap the desired preset button and
confirm the deletion.
›
To delete all logos, tap on
All
and confirm the dele-
tion.
Switch on/o autostore of logos for stations to be
stored to Favourites
Applies to FM and DAB frequency ranges.
When the function is switched on, a station logo
from the Infotainment memory is assigned when the
station is stored on a preset button.
›
In the Radio main menu, tap on
Advanced settings
Autostore station logos
.
Regional FM station logo
Applies to the FM frequency range.
Infotainment provides the option of using country-
specific FM station logos.
›
In the Radio main menu, tap on
Advanced settings
Region for station logo:
.
›
Choose the country.
Automatic change of frequency to a regionally
linked FM station
Applies to the FM frequency range.
Infotainment provides the option of automatically
switching to a regionally linked FM station in case of
signal loss of the FM station being listened to.
73
Infotainment Bolero › Radio
›
In the Radio main menu, tap on
Advanced settings
RDS Regional:
.
›
Select one of the following menu items.
▶
Fixed
- If there is a loss of signal, another station
must be set manually.
▶
Automatic
- automatic selection of the station with
the best signal reception.
If reception is lost in the given region, Infotainment
will automatically set another available region.
Switch automatic frequency control (AF) on/o
Applies to the FM frequency range.
When the function is switched on and the signal of
the FM station currently being listened to is weak,
Infotainment automatically sets the same station to
a dierent frequency with a better signal.
›
In the Radio main menu, tap on
Advanced settings
Automatic frequency control (AF)
.
Sort stations in the list of available stations
Applies to the FM frequency range.
▶
In the Radio main menu, tap on
Advanced settings
Sort station list:
.
▶
Select the sorting of stations in alphabetical order
or by group.
Turn on/o radio text reception
Applies to the FM and DAB frequency ranges.
When the function is switched on and station pre-
sets are displayed, detailed information about the
broadcast content of the station being listened to, or
the name of the station group for the DAB station, is
displayed.
›
In the Radio main menu, tap
Radio text
.
Switch RDS on/o
Applies to the FM frequency range.
This menu item is only available in some countries.
›
In the Radio main menu, tap on
Advanced settings
Radio Data System (RDS)
.
If the RDS function is disabled, the following menu
items in the FM transmitters settings are not availa-
ble.
▶
Trac programme (TP).
▶
Radio text.
▶
RDS Regional.
▶
Automatic frequency control (AF).
▶
Regional station logos.
▶
Sorting of stations in the list of available stations.
Switch additional DAB announcements on/o
Applies to the DAB frequency range.
When the function is switched on, other announce-
ments are received as trac announcements. For ex-
ample, weather news, sports reports,
financial news,
etc.
›
In the Radio main menu, tap on
Advanced settings
Other DAB announcements
.
Enable/disable automatic programme tracking of a
DAB station
Applies to the DAB frequency range.
When the function is switched on and the DAB sta-
tion is lost, Infotainment automatically changes to
the same station with a better signal in a dierent
DAB station group.
›
In the Radio main menu, tap on
Advanced settings
DAB - DAB station tracking
.
Turn on/o automatic switching from a DAB sta-
tion to the same FM station
Applies to the DAB frequency range.
When the function is switched on and the DAB sta-
tion being listened to is lost, Infotainment automati-
cally changes to the same FM station. The symbol
(FM) is displayed after the station name.
When the corresponding DAB station can be re-
ceived again, the station automatically changes from
FM to DAB.
›
In the Radio main menu, tap on
Advanced settings
Automatic DAB - FM switching
.
Turn on/o automatic switching to a similar DAB
station
Applies to the DAB frequency range.
When the function is switched on and DAB station
being listened to is lost, Infotainment automatically
changes to another DAB station with similar content.
›
In the Radio main menu, tap
Advanced settings
Switch to a similar station
.
Media
What you should be mindful of
▶
Do not save any important data or that which has
not been backed up on the connected audio sour-
ces. ŠKODA assumes no responsibility for lost or
damaged files or connected audio sources.
▶
When changing or connecting an audio source, this
may cause sudden changes in volume. Reduce the
volume before changing or connecting an audio
source.
▶
When connecting an audio source, the source in-
formation messages can be displayed. These mes-
sages must be observed and, if necessary, con-
firmed.
▶
The national copyright laws that apply in your
country must be observed.
74
Infotainment Bolero › Media
Overview
Display main menu
›
Tap on .
Or:
›
Tap on
.
A
Select source
Manage files/multimedia database
Settings
Player controls
Operation - Basics
A
Album picture/symbol of the connected source
Tap: start playback
Tap: pause
Tap within 3 seconds of starting playback: play
the previous title
Tap after 3 seconds of the starting playback:
play the current title from the beginning
Hold: fast rewind within the title
Tap: play the next title
Hold: fast forward within the title
Movement within the title is also possible by drag-
ging your finger over the timeline.
Extended operation
Turn repeat playback of the current track on/o
Turn repeat playback of the current album/fold-
er on/o
Turn random playback of the current album/
folder on/o
Settings
Turn title playback including subfolders on/o
›
In the Media main menu, tap on
Mix/Repeat including
subfolders
.
Enable/disable playback of online media from an
Apple device
›
To turn on/o in the Media main menu, tap on
Include online media from an iPod
.
Under the following conditions, media in the Apple
iCloud is included in the list of available media.
✓ The mobile device is not connected using Apple
CarPlay.
✓ The mobile device is connected to Apple iCloud.
Trac
›
To turn on/o the trac monitoring during the
playback of media files, go to the Media main menu
and tap on
Trac programme (TP).
Safely disconnect the connected USB device
NOTICE
Risk of damage to the data on the connected USB
device!
To safely disconnect a USB device, proceed as fol-
lows.
›
In the Media main menu, tap
Remove USB safely
.
›
Select the desired device.
›
Disconnect the USB device.
75
Infotainment Bolero › Media
Supported sources and files
Source Interface Type Specification File system
USB
USB 1.x; 2.x 3.x
or higher with USB
2.x support
MSC
USB stick
VFAT
FAT16
FAT32
exFAT
NTFS
HDD
(without special
software)
USB devices that
use the USB mass
storage support
protocol
MTP
Devices running
the Android or
Windows Phone
operating system
that support the
Media Transfer
Protocol
Apple
Devices with an
iOS operating sys-
tem
HFS+
Bluetooth® player Bluetooth® -
Bluetooth® proto-
cols
A2DP and AVRCP
(1.0 - 1.5)
-
Supported sources
Apple iAP1 protocol is not supported by Infotainment.
Compatibility of mobile devices
It is possible to check the ŠKODA web pages to see if Infotainment is compatible with the selected mobile
device being tested. This check is carried out by using the following reference or by reading the QR code.
▶
http://go.skoda.eu/compatibility
Compression for-
mat
Codec type File exten-
sion
Max. bit rate
[kbps]
Max. sam-
pling rate
[kHz]
Multi channels
MPEG
MPEG 1 Layer 3 mp3 32 - 320 32, 44, 48
Mono, dual mono,
Stereo, Joint
Stereo
MPEG 2 Layer 3
mp3 8 - 160
16, 22, 24 Mono,
Stereo, Joint
Stereo
MPEG 2.5 Layer 3 8, 11, 12
WMA
Windows Media
Audio 9 and 9.1
wma
8 - 384
8, 11, 12, 16,
22, 32, 44,
48
Mono, Stereo,
Joint stereo
Windows Media
Audio 9.2
8 - 320
Windows Media
Audio 10
8 - 768
32, 44, 48,
96
ADTS
AAC LC
aac
8 - 640
22, 24, 32,
44, 48
Mono,
Stereo
AAC HE 8 - 320
16, 22, 24,
32, 44, 48
AAC HEv2 16 - 64
76
Infotainment Bolero › Media
Compression for-
mat
Codec type File exten-
sion
Max. bit rate
[kbps]
Max. sam-
pling rate
[kHz]
Multi channels
FLAC FLAC flac -
8, 11, 12, 16,
22, 24, 32,
44, 48, 64,
88, 96
Mono, Stereo,
5.1, 7.1
RIFF WAV wav 64 - 3072
8, 11, 12, 16,
22, 24, 32,
44, 48, 96
Mono,
Stereo
SBC Bluetooth A2DP - 8 - 345 44, 48
Mono, Stereo,
Joint stereo
Supported audio files
For files in MP4 format, only the soundtrack playback is carried out.
Files that are protected by the DRM- and iTunes® methods are not supported by Infotainment.
Codec type File extension
M3U m3u
M3U8 m3u8
PLS pls
WPL wpl
ASX asx
PLA pls
Supported playlists
Mobile device management
Overview
Using mobile device management, devices can be
connected, disconnected, and interchanged.
Display mobile device management
›
Tap on
Select mobile phone
.
Or:
›
Tap on
mobile devices
.
The device enables a connection via the Blue-
tooth®“hands-free profile”
The device is connected via the Blue-
tooth®“hands-free profile”
The device enables a connection via the Blue-
tooth® audio profile
The device is connected via the Bluetooth® audio
profile
The device enables a SmartLink connection to
be made via Android Auto
Remove the device from the list previously con-
nected devices
The device enables a SmartLink connection to
be made via Apple CarPlay
The device enables a SmartLink connection to
be made via MirrorLink
Connected / Previously connected devices
Available devices
Limitations of mobile devices and applications
Availability of features
The availability of certain features depends on the
type of mobile device, as well as that of the applica-
tions installed.
Compatibility of mobile devices
It is possible to check the ŠKODA web pages to see
if Infotainment is compatible with the selected mo-
bile device being tested. This check is carried out by
using the following reference or by reading the QR
code.
▶
http://go.skoda.eu/compatibility
A
B
77
Infotainment Bolero › Mobile device management
Bluetooth® compatibility of mobile devices
Due to the large number of mobile devices, it is not
possible to guarantee total Bluetooth® compatibility
with Infotainment. Bluetooth® compatibility depends
on the Bluetooth® version as well as the implementa-
tion of Bluetooth® protocols by the manufacturer of
the mobile device.
Applications in mobile devices
Mobile devices can be used to install applications
that allow you to view additional information on the
Infotainment screen, or to operate the Infotainment
system.
Due to the variety of applications, as well as their on-
going development, the available applications may
not function on all mobile devices. ŠKODA AUTO as-
sumes no liability for their proper functioning.
The scope of available applications and their func-
tionality is dependent on the type of Infotainment, as
well as the vehicle and country.
Connection set-up
Connect a mobile device to Infotainment
›
Find available Bluetooth® devices in the mobile de-
vice.
›
Select the Infotainment Bluetooth® unit.
The name of the unit can be found under the menu
item
Bluetooth
Name:
.
›
Confirm the PIN; enter it if necessary and then
confirm.
Connect Infotainment to a non-paired mobile de-
vice
›
Tap on
Select mobile phone
.
›
Select the desired device from the list of available
devices.
›
Select the desired Bluetooth® profile.
›
Confirm the PIN; enter it if necessary and then
confirm.
›
If two devices are connected to the Infotainment,
select the device to be replaced.
Connect Infotainment to a previously connected
mobile device
›
Tap on
Select mobile phone
.
›
Select the desired device from the list of previous-
ly connected devices.
›
Select the desired Bluetooth® profile.
›
If two devices are connected to the Infotainment,
select the device to be replaced.
SmartLink Connection
Infotainment provides the ability to connect Smar-
tLink to compatible mobile devices using the follow-
ing connection types.
Android Auto
Apple CarPlay
MirrorLink
Mobile devices can be connected to the Infotain-
ment via USB cable or Wi-Fi, as long as the mobile
device supports it.
›
Connect the mobile device to the Infotainment.
›
Tap the icon of the supported connection.
Telephone
Telephone main menu
Display main menu
›
Tap on .
Or:
›
Tap on .
A
Name of the connected telephone
▶
Tap: Show list of previously connected phones
B
Name of telephone service providers
C
Preset buttons for preferred contacts
Change the main telephone with the additional
telephone
Enter telephone number
Contact list
Call lists
Switch on voice control for the connected tele-
phone
Settings
Conditions for connecting a telephone with
Infotainment
✓ The Bluetooth® function of the Infotainment and
the telephone need to be switched on.
78
Infotainment Bolero › Telephone
The Bluetooth® function of the Infotainment is
switched on in the menu item
Bluetooth
Bluetooth
.
✓ Visibility of the Infotainment is switched on.
The visibility of the Infotainment is switched on in
the menu item
Bluetooth
Visibility:
.
✓ The telephone is within signal range of the Info-
tainment's Bluetooth® unit.
✓ The telephone is compatible with Infotainment.
Telephone operation
Enter telephone number
›
In the Telephone main menu, tap
.
›
Enter the telephone number using the numeric
keypad that is displayed.
The displayed numeric keypad can also be used
for searching for contacts.
If, for example, the digits 32 are entered, contacts
with the letter sequence DA, FA, EB etc. are dis-
played next to the numeric keypad.
List of telephone contacts
The list of telephone contacts is imported from the
connected main telephone.
›
Tap to display the contact list in the telephone
main menu
.
›
To find details within the list, tap
Find
.
›
Enter the details you wish to find.
›
To establish a connection with a contact, tap the
functional area showing the desired contact.
If a contact has multiple telephone numbers, select
the telephone number from the displayed list.
›
To display the details for a contact, tap
.
Establish a connection to the voice mailbox num-
ber
›
In the Telephone main menu, tap
.
Telephone conversation
Depending on the context of the telephone conver-
sation, the following functions can be selected.
End connection / reject incoming call / end call
Answer an incoming call / return to the held call
Switch the ringer o / on
Hold a call
Switch the microphone o / on
Show details of the caller
Answer a call from the second telephone during
a call on the first telephone
The ongoing call on the first telephone is termi-
nated by accepting the call.
›
To switch the call tone from the speakers to the
telephone, go to the telephone main menu and tap
on
hands-free
.
/
/
›
To switch the call tone from the telephone to the
speakers, tap .
Conference call
A conference call is a joint telephone conversation
with a minimum of three and a maximum of six par-
ticipants.
›
Make the next call during an ongoing conversation/
conference.
Or:
›
Accept a new incoming call by tapping the function
area .
›
To start a conference call, tap on the functional
area
.
During an ongoing conference call, the following
functions can be selected depending on the context.
Hold the conference call and leave temporarily
(the conference will continue in the background)
Return to the conference being held
Switch the microphone o / on
End the conference
Show details of the conference call
In the details of the conference call, depending on
the connected telephone, the following functions
can be selected.
Show details of the conference call participants
End conversation with the conference call par-
ticipant
Conversation with a participant outside of the
conference call
Settings for Infotainment telephone functions
Telephone-Infotainment-Connection types
The way in which the telephone is connected de-
pends on the number of phones currently connected
to the Infotainment.
▶
No telephone - The telephone is connected as a
main telephone.
▶
One telephone - The telephone is connected as an
additional telephone.
▶
Two telephones - Select the telephone to be re-
placed.
›
To switch between the main telephone and the
supplementary telephone in the main menu, tap
telephone
.
Connect the telephone to Infotainment
›
Find available Bluetooth® devices on the phone.
›
Select the Infotainment Bluetooth® unit.
The name of the unit can be found under the menu
item
Bluetooth
Name:
.
›
Confirm the PIN; enter it if necessary and then
confirm.
/
79
Infotainment Bolero › Telephone
Connect Infotainment to a non-paired telephone -
no telephone is connected
›
Tap on .
Or:
›
Tap on .
›
Follow the instructions in the Infotainment screen.
Connecting Infotainment to a non-paired tele-
phone - another telephone is connected
›
Tap on
Select mobile phone
.
›
Select the desired device from the list of available
devices.
›
Select the desired Bluetooth® profile.
›
Confirm the PIN; enter it if necessary and then
confirm.
The telephone is connected as an additional tele-
phone.
Or:
›
If two telephones are connected to the Infotain-
ment, select the telephone to be replaced.
Connect Infotainment to a previously paired tele-
phone
›
Tap on
Select mobile phone
.
›
Select the desired device from the list of previous-
ly connected devices.
The telephone is connected as an additional tele-
phone.
Or:
›
If two telephones are connected to the Infotain-
ment, select the telephone to be replaced.
Manage preset buttons for preferred contacts
›
To save the desired preset button, press and hold
A .
›
Select a contact from the displayed list.
›
Select a contact from the displayed list.
›
To display the menu for deleting go to the Tele-
phone main menu and tap
manage favourites
.
›
To delete one preset, tap on the list entry and con-
firm the deletion.
Or:
›
To delete all presets, tap on
All
and confirm the de-
letion.
Import telephone contacts
After first connecting the main telephone with Info-
tainment, telephone contacts will start to be impor-
ted into the Infotainment memory.
Infotainment can import up to 2000 telephone con-
tacts together with contact pictures. Each contact
can include max. 5 telephone numbers.
Depending on the type of telephone, import confir-
mation may be required.
Update telephone contacts
When re-connecting the telephone with Infotain-
ment, an automatic update of the list is carried out.
›
For a manual update of the list in the telephone
main menu, tap on
User profile
Import contacts
.
Sort contacts in the phonebook
›
In the telephone main menu, tap on
User profile
Sort by:
and select the sort type.
Ringer
Some phones do not allow the use of the telephone
ringer; instead, the Infotainment ringer is used.
›
To set the Infotainment ringer in the telephone
main menu, tap on
user profile
Select ringtone
.
›
Select the ringtone.
Number for the voice mailbox
›
To set the voice mailbox number in the telephone
main menu, tap on
user profile
Mailbox number:
.
›
Enter the number of the voice mailbox.
Simultaneous calls
This applies to some countries.
Depending on the connected telephone, it is possible
to answer the next incoming call and hold the previ-
ous call.
›
To switch on simultaneous calls, tap on telephone
Parallel talks
.
Wi-Fi
Functionality
Wi-Fi can be used for the SmartLinkConnection.
The Infotainment hotspot can connect up to 3 mo-
bile devices.
›
To display the list of connected mobile devices, tap
on
Wi-Fi
Connected devices
.
Settings
Connect a mobile device to the Infotainment hot-
spot
›
Turn on the Infotainment Wi-Fi hotspot in the
menu item
Wi-Fi
Wi-Fi hotspot
.
80
Infotainment Bolero › Wi-Fi
›
Turn on the Wi-Fi on the mobile device.
›
In the list of available Wi-Fi devices, look for Info-
tainment Wi-Fi.
The name of the Infotainment is taken from the
menu item
Wi-Fi
Network name:
.
›
Select the Infotainment hotspot and enter the re-
quired password.
The password for connecting to the Infotainment
hotspot is taken from the menu item
Wi-
Fi
Network key
.
›
Confirm the connection.
Security level of the Infotainment hotspot
The security level is factory-set at
WPA2
and cannot
be changed.
Change password for connection to Infotainment
hotspot
The password must be a minimum of 8 and a maxi-
mum of 63 characters.
▶
Tap
Wi-Fi
Network key
.
▶
Enter the password and confirm.
SmartLink
Functionality
SmartLink oers the ability to display and operate
certified applications from a connected mobile de-
vice in the Infotainment screen.
Certification may be conditional upon the use of the
latest update to the particular SmartLink application.
Applications include, for example, apps for route
guidance, telephoning, listening to music, etc.
Mobile devices can be connected via a USB cable or
Wi-Fi.
Supported connection types
SmartLink supports the following connection types.
▶
Android Auto.
▶
Apple CarPlay.
▶
MirrorLink.
Overview of the SmartLink connection
Main menu SmartLink
›
Tap on .
Or:
›
Tap on .
A
Previously connected device
B
Currently connected device
Display information about SmartLink
Separation of the active connection
Settings for the SmartLink menu
Android Auto
Navigation applications
Telephone applications
Overview of running applications, phone calls, in-
coming text messages, and more.
Music applications
Display of other available applications as well as
the option to return to the SmartLink main menu
Turn on voice control (Google Voice)
Apple CarPlay
A
List of available applications
Depending on the duration of operation:
▶
Tap: Return to the Apple CarPlay main menu
▶
Hold: Switch on voice control (Siri)
81
Infotainment Bolero › SmartLink
MirrorLink
It is not possible to operate the application while
driving
Return to the SmartLink main menu
List of running applications
Display of the last running application in connec-
ted mobile devices
Settings
Connection conditions
General connection conditions
✓ The mobile device supports the following Smar-
tLink connection types: Android Auto. Apple Car-
Play and MirrorLink.
✓ Mobile devices, as well as the type of Smar-
tLinkconnection, are supported in the respective
market.
✓ Some connected mobile devices require the mo-
bile device to be “unlocked”.
Conditions for Android Auto
✓ The device to be connected must have Android
AutoSupport.
A list of devices, supported regions and applica-
tions that the Android Auto connection supports
can be found on the websites of Google Inc..
✓ The Android Auto application needs to be instal-
led on the mobile device.
✓ Some applications require the data connection in
the mobile device to be turned on.
Conditions for Apple CarPlay
✓ The device to be connected must have Apple
CarPlaySupport.
A list of devices, supported regions and applica-
tions that the Apple CarPlay connection supports
can be found on the websites of Apple Inc..
✓ Siri voice control is on.
✓ The data connection is switched on in the mobile
device.
Conditions for MirrorLink
✓ The device to be connected must have Mirror-
LinkSupport.
A list of devices and applications that the Mirror-
Link connection supports can be found on the
websites of Car Connectivity Consorcium®.
✓ The MirrorLink application needs to be installed
on the mobile device.
✓ Some applications require the data connection in
the connected mobile device to be turned on.
Operation
Operation of the running MirrorLink application
Display of control surfaces at the bottom
Display of control surfaces at the top
Return to the MirrorLink main menu
Restriction
Restriction of the Wi-Fi connection
In some countries, the Wi-Fi connection is restric-
ted for legal reasons. When crossing the border of
the country in question, the connection with a mo-
bile device connected via Wi-Fi can be ended or
restricted.
Find out about country-specific legal restrictions.
If necessary, switch o the Wi-Fi manually.
Establishment of a Wi-Fi connection is only possible
in vehicles with online services, or when making an
emergency call.
Restriction of SmartLink applications while driving
For safety reasons, operation of some SmartLinkap-
plications while driving is not possible or is restric-
ted.
SmartLink settings
Apple CarPlay - Connection via USB
›
Turn on the Infotainment.
›
Turn on the mobile device.
›
Connect the mobile device to the front USB input
using a cable.
›
Choose to connect via Apple CarPlay.
Apple CarPlay - Connection via Wi-Fi from Info-
tainment
›
Turn on Bluetooth® and Bluetooth® visibility in the
mobile device.
›
Tap on
mobile devices
.
›
In the displayed list, look for and select the desired
device with the symbol .
›
Follow the instructions on the Infotainment screen
and confirm the Bluetooth® pairing.
›
If another device is connected to the Infotainment,
select the device to be replaced.
82
Infotainment Bolero › SmartLink
Apple CarPlay - Connection via Wi-Fi from mobile
devices
To establish a connection, the following conditions
must be met.
✓ The minimum iOS version is 9.
✓ No other mobile device can be connected via
SmartLink.
✓ Wi-Fi and Bluetooth® functionality is switched on
in the Infotainment system.
›
In the mobile device, turn on the CarPlay function.
›
Press and hold the button on the multifunction
steering wheel.
The Infotainment screen displays a connection
message with the name of the Bluetooth® unit of
the Infotainment.
›
Find available Bluetooth® devices on the phone.
›
Select the Infotainment Bluetooth® unit.
›
If necessary, confirm the PIN.
›
In the Infotainment screen, select the connection
type Apple CarPlay.
Apple CarPlay – Disconnection
›
In the Apple CarPlay main menu, tap on the “ŠKO-
DA” functional area.
›
Tap on
.
Android Auto - Connection via USB
›
Turn on the Infotainment.
›
Turn on the mobile device.
›
Connect the mobile device to the front USB input
using a cable.
›
Choose to connect via Android Auto.
Android Auto - Connection via Wi-Fi from Info-
tainment
›
Tap on
mobile devices
.
›
Select the desired device from the list of available
devices.
›
Select the Bluetooth®hands-free profile.
›
Confirm the PIN; enter it if necessary and then
confirm.
›
If another device is connected to the Infotainment,
select the device to be replaced.
›
From the list of known devices, select the desired
device with the
symbol.
Android Auto - Disconnection
›
In the main menu of Android Auto tap on “Re-
turn to ŠKODA”.
›
Tap on .
MirrorLink - Connection via USB
›
Turn on the Infotainment.
›
Turn on the mobile device.
›
Connect the mobile device to the front USB input
using a cable.
›
Choose to connect through MirrorLink.
MirrorLink - Connection via Wi-Fi from Infotain-
ment
›
Turn on Wi-Fi and visibility in the mobile device.
›
Turn on the Infotainment Wi-Fi hotspot in the
menu item
Wi-Fi
Wi-Fi hotspot
.
›
In the list of available Wi-Fi devices, look for Info-
tainment Wi-Fi.
›
Enter the required password.
›
With some mobile devices, communication be-
tween the device and the Infotainment in the noti-
fication bar of the mobile device must be con-
firmed.
›
Tap on
mobile devices
.
›
From the list of available devices, select the de-
sired device with the symbol.
MirrorLink - Disconnection
›
In the MirrorLink main menu, tap .
›
Tap on .
Change to another device / connection type
Infotainment allows you to switch between currently
connected devices and the connection type.
›
Tap on
.
›
Select the desired device or connection type.
ŠKODA Connect online services
Functionality
ŠKODA Connect online service oer the option of
connecting the vehicle to the online world. They thus
represent an extension of the vehicle and Infotain-
ment functions.
For the functionality of the ŠKODA Connect Online
Services, the vehicle must be within range of a mo-
bile network through which the services are provi-
ded. The availability, the connection speed and the
technology used in the mobile network can be dier-
ent in the respective countries and are dependent on
the mobile network operator.
The ŠKODA Connect online services are not included
in the equipment of the vehicle. They can be ordered
separately on the ŠKODA Connect Portal website or
in the ŠKODA Connect application.
The oer of ŠKODA Connect online services de-
pends on the type of vehicle and its trim level, Info-
tainment and country. Availability in each country
can be checked on the ŠKODA Connect website.
The rights and obligations of the Parties with respect
to the provision of these services are governed by a
separate agreement. Current legal documents re-
garding the online services can be found on the
ŠKODA Connect Portal as well as the ŠKODA Con-
nect application.
83
Infotainment Bolero › ŠKODA Connect online services
ŠKODA Connect website
▶
http://go.skoda.eu/skoda-connect
For example, the ŠKODA Connect web-
site contains the latest information
about the online services, a link to the
ŠKODA Connect Portal as well as the
option of downloading the ŠKODA Con-
nect application.
ŠKODA Connect Portal website
▶
http://go.skoda.eu/connect-portal
The ŠKODA Connect Portal website is
used, for example, for registration, acti-
vation and ordering of online services. It
also provides the option of remote ac-
cess to the vehicle.
Information call
The information call may be used in the case of prob-
lems with the online services or for information re-
garding the products and services of the ŠKODA
brand.
✓ The functional condition represents the active
online ŠKODA Connect services.
›
Press the button.
Breakdown call
The breakdown call can be used in the event of a
breakdown.
✓ The functional condition represents the active
online ŠKODA Connect services.
›
Press the
button.
ŠKODA Connect Application
The ŠKODA Connect application enables remote ac-
cess to the vehicle using a mobile device. It can also
be used for user registration and to activate and
configure the online services.
The application can be downloaded to the mobile de-
vice after scanning the following QR code or link.
▶
http://go.skoda.eu/skodaconnectapp
Settings
Use of the ŠKODA Connect online services requires
prior registration of the main user and subsequent
activation of the online services.
Registration and activation of online services
User registration, as well as the activation of the
ŠKODA Connect online services, is completed on the
ŠKODA Connect Portal website or in the ŠKODA
Connect application.
In order to complete user registration, you will need
to access your e-mails.
In order to activate ŠKODA Connect, proceed as fol-
lows.
›
Switch on the ignition and the Infotainment.
›
Tap
ŠKODA Connect (online services)
Registration
.
›
Enter and confirm the registration PIN you have re-
ceived during user and vehicle registration on the
ŠKODA Connect Portal website or in the ŠKODA
Connect application.
›
Wait for the
Vehicle activation complete
message to appear.
›
Confirm any messages on the screen.
Delete user
›
Switch on the ignition and the Infotainment.
›
Tap
ŠKODA Connect (online services)
Registration
.
›
Tap
Delete main user
Delete
.
›
Confirm the deletion.
Connection status of the online services
The status of the connection to the ŠKODA Connect
online services is displayed by the discolouration of
the symbol shown in the status bar on the Info-
tainment screen.
▶
White - online services are available.
▶
Grey - online services are not available.
Setting the personal data protection level
The level of protection of personal data in ŠKODA
Connect online services is indicated by an icon in the
status bar on the Infotainment screen.
›
Open the Infotainment
control enter by hold-
ing down the bar at the
top of the screen and
pulling it down.
84
Infotainment Bolero › ŠKODA Connect online services
›
To Display information, tap
for the respective
protection levels.
›
To display the menu for Setting the protection
level, tap the
A symbol.
Or:
›
Tap
ŠKODA Connect (online services)
Privacy settings
and manage services
.
›
Select one of the following options for sending ve-
hicle and user data.
Send only the legally required data.
Send the vehicle and user data.
Send the vehicle and user data as well as the da-
ta regarding the vehicle position.
Division of vehicle position data on the website
ŠKODA Connect Portal and in the ŠKODA Con-
nect application .
Management of online services
In the service management, it is possible to display
information about the online services, the validity of
their licence, or to switch the services on/o.
›
Tap
ŠKODA Connect (online services)
Privacy settings
and manage services
.
Infotainment Amundsen
Infotainment overview
A
Touchscreen
All menus
Favourite menus
Increase the volume
Decrease the volume
Condition-based:
▶
Infotainment switched o
▶
Tap: Turn on Infotainment
▶
Infotainment switched on
▶
Tap: Switch sound o/on
▶
Hold: Switch o Infotainment
Radio menu
Media menu
Phone menu
Navigation menu
Information about vehicle settings
System
Control centre
Usage
The Infotainment control centre provides quick ac-
cess to the following functions.
▶
Setting the instrument and key illumination.
▶
User account management.
▶
Setting the personal data protection level.
▶
Functional surfaces of preferred features.
▶
List of information messages.
85
Infotainment Amundsen › Infotainment overview
Opening the control centre
›
Press the bar at the
top of the screen and
drag down.
Closing the control centre
›
Tap on
.
Or:
›
Press the bar at the bottom of the screen and drag
up.
Or:
›
Wait 5 seconds.
Settings
›
To open edit mode, press any functional surface of
the preferred feature.
›
To add the preferred feature, move the desired
function from the top of the screen to the func-
tional surface at the bottom of the screen.
›
To close edit mode, tap on
.
Restriction
For safety reasons, operation of some Infotainment
functions while driving is not possible or is restricted.
The Infotainment system indicates this by means of
a message in the screen.
Basic settings
Setting basic functions
The following Infotainment functions are set in the
menu.
▶
Time and date.
▶
Language.
▶
Units.
▶
Restore factory settings.
Sound settings
The Infotainment sound is set in the menu
.
The following menu items can be set.
▶
Setting the equalizer.
▶
Adjusting the volume ratio.
▶
Volume adjustment of individual Infotainment
functions.
Some are adjustable, for example the following
menu items.
▶
Volume adjustment of voice commands.
▶
Setting the maximum volume when Infotainment
is turned on.
▶
Speed-dependent volume setting.
▶
Setting the Infotainment to mute with the park-
ing aid switched on.
Depending on the equipment, the following ad-
vanced sound settings can be set.
▶
Setting space optimisation.
▶
Setting the audio profiles according to genre.
▶
Adjusting the subwoofer volume.
Configuration wizard
The configuration wizard helps to set certain Info-
tainment functions.
The configuration wizard is automatically displayed if
there are at least two non-selected menu items after
turning on the Infotainment.
›
To switch o the automatic display, tap on
Don't
show again
when the configuration wizard is displayed.
›
For manual display, tap on
Configuration wiz-
ard
.
Setting the HOME menu
›
To display another page of the HOME menu, press
the screen with two fingers and drag it to the left
or right.
To add the preferred menu, proceed as follows.
›
Tap on an empty functional surface.
Or:
›
Press and hold an occupied functional surface and
then tap on an empty functional area.
›
Select a menu with the desired dimension of the
functional surface.
›
Tap on
to exit edit mode.
To remove the preferred menu, proceed as follows.
›
Press an occupied functional surface.
›
Tap on
.
›
Tap on to exit edit mode.
Setting the MENU
The position of the functional surfaces in the MENU
menu can be customized as follows.
›
Press and hold the desired functional surface until
it is free.
›
Move the functional surface to a dierent position.
Troubleshooting
Infotainment not responding
The Infotainment system must be restarted.
›
Press for more than 10 s.
›
Wait for the restart to complete.
86
Infotainment Amundsen › System
System update
We recommend having the system update carried
out by a specialist company.
The system update ensures optimal function of the
Infotainment system, e.g. compatibility with new
phones.
Determine system version
›
Tap
System information
.
Screen
Overview
A
Status bar
B
Bar with the functional surfaces of the displayed
menu
C
Display of the control centre
D
Other pages of the menu
Operation
NOTICE
Danger of screen damage!
▶
The Infotainment screen is operated by touching it
lightly with your finger.
In principle, operation by touch is identical to the op-
eration of a mobile phone.
The following operating modes are specific to the In-
fotainment system.
Dragging up or down with two fingers
▶
Quickly review the list
of phone contacts.
▶
Change 2D/3D map
display.
Dragging left or right with two fingers
▶
Display next page of
the HOME menu.
Pulling apart with two fingers
▶
Enlarge image.
▶
Zoom in to the map.
Pulling together with two fingers
▶
Minimize image.
▶
Zoom out of the map.
Turn two fingers
▶
Rotate image.
▶
Rotate the map.
Contactless gesture control
The Infotainment menus marked with the
symbol
can be controlled by hand gestures.
87
Infotainment Amundsen › Screen
›
Gesture control is ach-
ieved by slowly moving
the hand back and
forth approximately 8
cm above the lower
edge of the screen.
Depending on the set-
ting, a recognized ges-
ture can be confirmed
acoustically and anima-
ted.
Displaying operation help
›
Tap on
.
Settings
The following basic screen functions are set in the
Screen
menu.
▶
Brightness level of the screen.
▶
Switch o the screen.
▶
Display the time.
▶
Confirmation sounds and animations.
Infotainment keyboard
Keyboard overview
The arrangement of the keypad characters depends
on the Infotainment language that has been set.
In Infotainment, the following types are used, de-
pending on the context.
▶
Alphanumeric.
▶
Numeric.
▶
Keypad for input.
▶
Keypad for search.
Keyboard example
A
Input line
▶
Delete characters before the cursor
▶
Tap: delete the last character
▶
Hold: delete all characters one after the oth-
er
▶
Display functional surfaces for moving the
cursor in the input line
▶
Move cursor to the left
▶
Move cursor to the right
B
Entries searched for
▶
Show list
C
Keypad function surfaces
▶
Switch to lowercase
▶
Switch to the first capital letter, followed by
lowercase letters
▶
Switch to uppercase
▶
/ Switch to the language keypad
▶
Switch to the numeric and character key-
pad
▶
/ Switch to other character variants
▶
Show additional keypad languages
▶
Insert a space
▶
The next line
▶
Hold: Show other character variants
▶
Display the entered password
▶
Confirm the entered characters
Numeric keypad
Keyboard example
A
Input line
▶
Delete characters before the cursor
▶
Tap: delete the last character
▶
Hold: delete all characters
B
Keypad function surfaces
▶
Confirm the entered characters
If context-sensitive, alphanumeric characters can
be entered by holding down a functional surface
with a digit.
Operation
The Infotainment keypad is used to enter characters,
letters and numbers.
The keypad will be automatically displayed when In-
fotainment prompts for characters.
88
Infotainment Amundsen › Infotainment keyboard
Find
When entering characters, corresponding entries are
searched for.
The entry to be searched for can be entered includ-
ing diacritics.
The keyboard will only provide characters that
match the stored entries.
›
To Display searched entries tap .
Show additional keypad languages
To use the additional keypad languages, the desired
languages must be set first.
›
Tap
or repeatedly tap the flag symbol until the
desired language keypad is displayed.
Further character variants
›
Press and hold the sign with the symbol
.
›
Select the desired symbol.
Setting additional keypad languages
›
Tap
Additional keypad languages
.
Voice control
Functionality
Voice control principle
Voice control works according to the principle of
dialogue between the user and the Infotainment sys-
tem.
The user says a voice command. The Infotainment
system responds or executes the voice command.
Operating conditions
✓ Ignition is switched on.
✓ Infotainment is switched on.
Operation
Voice control process
›
To switch on voice control on the multifunction
steering wheel, press the
button.
Or:
›
Say the “
OK Laura
” activation command.
After switching on, the icon is displayed.
›
Say a voice command.
During recognition of the voice command, the
icon
is displayed.
The Infotainment system then executes the voice
command or plays the message. During the message,
the icon is displayed.
After the execution of the voice command, voice
control is switched o.
Correcting a voice command
›
During voice command input, press the button
on the multifunction steering wheel and say a new
voice command.
Stopping voice control
Stopping leaves more time for voice command input,
e.g. for searching for a phone contact.
›
Move your finger up or down over the Infotain-
ment screen.
Or:
›
Say the “
pause
” voice command.
Resuming stopped voice control
›
Press the button on the multifunction steering
wheel.
Or:
›
Tap on in the Infotainment screen.
Stopping the played back message
›
Press the button on the multifunction steering
wheel.
Ending voice control
›
Press and hold the button on the multifunction
steering wheel.
Or:
›
Say the voice command “
cancel
” during voice com-
mand input.
Restriction
For some Infotainment languages, no voice control is
available. The Infotainment system will indicate this.
The messages are generated by the Infotainment
system. Flawless clarity (e.g. road or city name) can-
not always be guaranteed.
You cannot use voice control while a phone call is in
progress.
Settings
The following voice control functions are set in the
menu
Voice control
.
▶
Confirmation tones.
▶
Use of the activation window.
Self-help
Starting acoustic help
›
If the Infotainment system is expecting a voice
command, say “
Help
”.
89
Infotainment Amundsen › Voice control
The “
Help
” voice command can be issued repeatedly
for further tips on voice control.
Displaying the help
›
Tap on .
Or:
›
If Infotainment is expecting a voice command, say
“
Overview
”.
Switch example voice commands display on / o
The system oers the option of displaying example
voice commands after switching on the voice con-
trol in the Infotainment screen.
›
To turn
voice control
on/o, tap
Show in Info-
tainment system
.
Radio
Overview
Display main menu
›
Tap on .
Or:
›
Tap on .
Analogue and digital radio reception
A
Select frequency range
B
Radio text
C
Preset buttons for preferred stations
List of available stations
Show favourites
Information about the station
Search stations manually (valid for AM and FM)
Settings
Infotainment supports digital radio reception in
DAB and DAB+ formats.
List of available stations
›
Tap on .
Played station
Station stored on the presets
A trac radio station is set
The DAB transmitter emits images which are
displayed in the information to the station
Manual update of the station list
In the station list, information about the program
type and the type of the regional station can be dis-
played.
Operation
Select station
›
Tap or at the top of the screen.
SCAN function
The function plays receivable stations of the selec-
ted frequency range in succession for a few seconds
each.
›
To start automatic play
, tap
Scan
.
›
To stop automatic play, tap
.
Find stations manually
Manual search is available for AM and FM stations.
›
To display the functional surface for the FM sta-
tion, turn on the
Advanced settings
Show stations:
turn
on
FM
.
›
In the Radio main menu, tap .
›
To search in sequence, tap
or next to the dis-
played frequency range scale.
Or:
›
Hold down the scroll mark on the frequency range
scale and move it to the desired value.
Restriction
▶
Parking garages, tunnels, tall buildings or moun-
tains can restrict radio reception.
▶
In the rear side windows, there are antennas for re-
ceiving the radio signal.
Covering the panes with foils or metal-coated la-
bels may aect the reception of the radio signal.
90
Infotainment Amundsen › Radio
Settings
Save the station currently being listened to as a fa-
vourite from the Radio main menu
›
Hold the desired station key for preferred stations
until the station is stored.
Save station to favourites from the list of available
stations
›
Hold the line with the name of the desired station.
›
Tap the desired preset button.
Deleting favourites
›
In the Radio main menu, tap
Delete presets
.
›
To delete a station button for preferred stations,
tap the desired station button and confirm the de-
letion.
›
To delete all presets for preferred stations, tap
De-
lete all
and confirm the deletion.
Buttons
Applies to AM, FM and DAB frequency ranges.
The variant for changing stations using buttons
in the Radio main menu is set as follows.
›
In the Radio main menu, tap
Arrow buttons:
.
›
Choose the change variant.
Switch trac reception (TP) for stations on/o
Applies to FM and DAB frequency range.
›
In the Radio main menu, tap
Trac program (TP)
.
Assign station logo from the Infotainment memory
Applies to the FM and DAB frequency ranges.
Infotainment oers the option of assigning logos,
which are stored in the Infotainment memory, to the
stations.
›
In the Radio main menu, tap
Station logos
.
›
Select the desired station and logo.
Switching o the station logo display
Applies to the FM and DAB frequency ranges.
›
In the Radio main menu, tap
Station logos
.
›
Select the desired station and
No station logo
.
Activating / deactivating automatic station logo
assignment
Applies to the FM and DAB frequency ranges.
When the function is switched on, a station logo
from the Infotainment memory is assigned when the
station is stored on a preset.
›
In the Radio main menu, tap
Advanced settings
Auto-
select station logos
.
Turn on/o radio text reception
Applies to the FM and DAB frequency ranges.
When the function is switched on and the station
buttons are displayed, you can see more information
about the content broadcast from the station to
which you are listening.
›
In the Radio main menu, tap
Radio text
.
Regional FM station logo
Applies to the FM frequency range.
Infotainment provides the option of using country-
specific FM station logos.
›
In the Radio main menu, tap on
Advanced settings
Region for station logo:
.
›
Choose the country.
Switching additional announcements of the DAB
transmitter on / o
Applies to the DAB frequency range.
When the function is switched on, other announce-
ments are received as trac announcements. E.g.
weather news, sports reports, financial news etc.
›
In the Radio main menu, tap
Advanced settings
Addi-
tional DAB announcements
.
Switch RDS on/o
Applies to the FM frequency range.
The menu item is only available for some countries.
›
In the Radio main menu, tap
Advanced settings
Radio
Data System (RDS)
.
If the RDS function is disabled, the following menu
items in FM station settings are not available.
▶
Trac programme (TP).
▶
Radio text.
▶
RDS Regional.
▶
Automatic frequency change (AF).
▶
Regional station logo.
Switch automatic switching to a similar DAB trans-
mitter on / o
Applies to the DAB frequency range.
When the function is switched on and there is signal
loss from the DAB station being listened to, Infotain-
ment automatically sets another DAB station with
similar content.
›
In the Radio main menu, tap
Advanced settings
Switch to a similar station if reception is poor
.
Displaying FM / DAB stations or FM stations in the
list of available stations
Applies to the FM and DAB frequency ranges.
Depending on the following setting, the stations of
the selected frequency range are displayed in the list
of available stations.
›
In the Radio main menu, tap
Advanced settings
Show
stations:
.
›
Select one of the following menu items.
▶
FM / DAB
- the list shows available FM and DAB sta-
tions.
91
Infotainment Amundsen › Radio
▶
FM
- the list shows available FM stations.
Media
What you should be mindful of
▶
Do not save any important data or that which has
not been backed up on the connected audio sour-
ces. ŠKODA assumes no responsibility for lost or
damaged files or connected audio sources.
▶
When changing or connecting an audio source, this
may cause sudden changes in volume. Reduce the
volume before changing or connecting an audio
source.
▶
When connecting an audio source, the source in-
formation messages can be displayed. These mes-
sages must be observed and, if necessary, con-
firmed.
▶
The national copyright laws that apply in your
country must be observed.
Overview
Display main menu
›
Tap on .
Or:
›
Tap on .
Music player
A
Select source
Manage files / multimedia database
Show favourites
Details about the track being played
Settings
Video player
Manage files / multimedia database
Show favourites
Show video
Shrink image display
Enlarge the image display
Settings
Player controls
Operation - Basics
A
Album image / symbol of the connected source
▶
Tap: list available albums
Tap: start playback
Tap: pause
Within 3 seconds of starting playback, tap: play
the previous song
After 3 seconds, tap from the start of playback:
to play the current title from the beginning
Hold: fast rewind within the title
Tap: play the next song
Hold: fast forward within the title
Movement within the title is also possible by drag-
ging the finger over the timeline.
Advanced operation
Turn on / o repeat playback of the current
track
Turn on / o repeat playback of the current al-
bum / folder
92
Infotainment Amundsen › Media
Turn on / o random playback of the current al-
bum / folder
Save the played track in the “
My playlist
” playlist
“My playlist” management
▶
To display the playlist, tap
.
▶
To manage the playlist tap
in the displayed play-
list.
The following activities can be carried out in playlist
management.
▶
Control playback.
▶
Change the order of a title in the list by holding and
moving
to the desired position.
▶
Delete title.
Settings
Manage favourites
›
To save, hold the desired functional area for fa-
vourites A .
›
Choose one of the available list entries B .
›
To delete, in the media main menu, tap on
man-
age favourites
.
›
To delete a favourite, tap on the list entry and con-
firm the deletion.
Or:
›
To delete all favourites, tap on
Delete all
and confirm
the deletion.
Trac
›
To turn on/o the trac monitoring during the
playback of media files, go to the Media main menu
and tap on
Trac programme (TP).
Supported sources and files
Source Interface Type Specification File system
USB
USB 1.x; 2.x 3.x
or higher with USB
2.x support
MSC
USB stick
VFAT
FAT16
FAT32
exFAT
NTFS
HDD
(without special
software)
USB devices that
use the USB mass
storage support
protocol
MTP
Devices running
the Android or
Windows Phone
operating system
that support the
Media Transfer
Protocol
Apple
Devices with the
iOS operating sys-
tem and the iAP2
protocol
HFS+
93
Infotainment Amundsen › Media
Source Interface Type Specification File system
Bluetooth® player Bluetooth® -
Bluetooth® proto-
cols
A2DP and AVRCP
(1.0 - 1.5)
-
Supported sources
Compatibility of mobile devices
It is possible to check the ŠKODA web pages to see if Infotainment is compatible with the selected mobile
device being tested. This check is carried out by using the following reference or by reading the QR code.
▶
http://go.skoda.eu/compatibility
Compression for-
mat
Codec type File exten-
sion
Max. bit rate
[kbps]
Max. sam-
pling rate
[kHz]
Multi channels
MPEG
MPEG 1 Layer 2
mp2
32 - 384 32, 44, 48
Mono, stereo,
Joint stereo
MPEG 2 Layer 2 8 - 160 16, 22, 24
MPEG 1 Layer 3
mp3
32 - 320 32, 44, 48
Mono, dual mono,
Stereo, Joint
Stereo
MPEG 2 Layer 3
8 - 160
16, 22, 24
MPEG 2.5 Layer 3 8, 11, 12
WMA
Windows Media
Audio 7
wma
6 - 192
8, 16, 22, 32,
44, 48, 96
Mono, stereo,
Joint stereo
Windows Media
Audio 8
8 - 384
8, 11, 16, 22,
32, 44, 48,
96
Windows Media
Audio 9 and 9.1
8 - 768
Windows Media
Audio 9.2
8 - 320
Windows Media
Audio 10
32 - 768
32, 44, 48,
96
ADTS
AAC LC
aac 16 - 2048
22, 24, 32,
44, 48
Stereo
AAC HE
16, 22, 24,
32, 44, 48
AAC HEv2
MP4
M4A LC
m4a
16 - 400
22, 24, 32,
44, 48
Stereo
M4A HE
16, 22, 24,
32, 44, 48
M4A HEv2 16 - 64
OGG OGG-Vorbis ogg 8 - 576
8, 11, 12, 16,
22, 24, 32,
44, 48, 96
Mono,
Stereo
FLAC FLAC flac -
8, 11, 12, 16,
22, 24, 32,
44, 48, 64,
88, 96, 192
Mono, stereo,
Joint stereo
RIFF WAV wav 64 - 3072
8, 11, 12, 16,
22, 24, 32,
44, 48, 96
Mono,
Stereo
Monkey's Monkey's ape 8 - 192
SBC Bluetooth A2DP - 8 - 345
8, 11, 12, 16,
22, 24, 32,
44, 48
Mono, stereo,
Joint stereo
94
Infotainment Amundsen › Media
Compression for-
mat
Codec type File exten-
sion
Max. bit rate
[kbps]
Max. sam-
pling rate
[kHz]
Multi channels
OPUS OPUS opus 6 - 2000 8 - 48
Mono, stereo,
Multichannel
Supported audio files
Files that are protected by DRM- and iTunes® methods are not supported by Infotainment.
Codec type File extension Max. recordings per second bit rate
[Mbit/s]
MPEG 1
mpg
mpeg
m1v
mPV
1.5
MPEG 2
mpg
mpeg
ps
m2v
15
MPEG 4 (H.264) m4p
mp4
m4v
mp4v
mov
50
MPJEG
MPEG 4 (ISO)
Xvid Xvid 20
WMV9
wmv
asf
50
Supported video files
Codec type File extension
M3U m3u
M3U8 m3u8
PLS pls
WPL wpl
ASX asx
Supported playlists
Images
Overview
Display main menu
›
Tap on .
A
Select source
Manage files
Settings
Operation
Touch operation
A
Look at images
▶
Show the next image
95
Infotainment Amundsen › Images
▶
Show the previous image
▶
Start slideshow
▶
Stop slideshow
B
View image
▶
Turn to the left
▶
Turn to the right
▶
Display in initial size
Gesture control
▶
Show the next image.
▶
Show the previous im-
age.
▶
Enlarge view.
▶
Zoom out.
▶
Turn 90°.
Settings
The following Infotainment functions are set in the
menu.
▶
Display image size.
▶
Display image duration during the slideshow.
▶
Slideshow repeat.
Supported sources and files
Source Interface Specifica-
tion
File system
USB
USB 1.x; 2.x
3.x
or higher
with USB
2.x support
USB stick
VFAT
FAT16
FAT32
exFAT
NTFS
HDD
(without
special
software)
Supported sources
Codec type File extension Max. resolution
[Mpx]
BMP bmp 4
JPG; JPEG jpg; jpeg 4 (Progressive
Mode)
64
GIF gif 4
PNG png 4
Supported files
The maximum supported image size is 20 MB.
User management
Functionality
User Management displays the accounts of the last
active users.
In the user management, new user accounts can be
edited and added.
96
Infotainment Amundsen › User management
Settings
Logging in
After turning on Infotainment, a menu of one of the
following user accounts is displayed.
▶
User account associated with the keywith which
the unlocking of the vehicle took place.
When the vehicle is locked, the Infotainment as-
signs the last used user account to the key.
The requirement is the activated
As-
sign vehicle keys automatically
menu item.
▶
User account of the last logged in user.
The
Assign vehicle keys automatically
menu
item is not switched on.
▶
Guest user account.
No user account was detected.
Some user accounts can be protected. Protected ac-
counts are in the user list showing the icon
.
To log in to the protected user account you need the
S-PIN created when creating the account on the
ŠKODA Connect Portal website, in the ŠKODA Con-
nect application or when registering the user in info-
tainment.
›
If you do not want to enter the S PIN next time,
please select the
Remember S-PIN
option.
Verification of the user by entering the S-PIN can
be switched o/on in the
Protect user
profile
Protect user profile
menu item.
›
To register another user, tap on Change users.
A menu with additional users and the option to enter
a new user will be displayed.
Log out user
When the ignition is switched on, the user logs o
automatically.
If the user account is protected by the S-PIN, the fol-
lowing functional areas are displayed.
▶
OK
- after switching on the ignition again within 30
minutes, no registration for the protected user ac-
count using the S-PIN is necessary.
▶
Sign out
- after switching on the ignition, the S-PIN is
required to log in to the protected user account.
Delete user
›
To display the user accounts , tap
De-
lete users
.
›
To delete the user, select the user and confirm the
deletion.
When the user is a “Main user”, the rights of the
main user can be withdrawn.
Delete the current user account
›
Tap
Delete user profile
and confirm the de-
letion.
User management
›
Tap on
.
Details of the currently selected user
▶
- A user account protected by the S-PIN
Change to another user / input data for a new user
Settings
Mobile device management
Overview
Using mobile device management, devices can be
connected, disconnected, and interchanged.
Display mobile device management
›
Tap on
Manage mobile devices
.
The device enables a connection via the Blue-
tooth®“hands-free profile”
The device is connected via the Blue-
tooth®“hands-free profile”
The device enables a connection via the Blue-
tooth® audio profile
The device is connected via the Bluetooth® audio
profile
97
Infotainment Amundsen › Mobile device management
Remove the device from the list previously con-
nected devices
The device enables a SmartLink connection to
be made via Android Auto
The device enables a SmartLink connection to
be made via Apple CarPlay
The device enables a SmartLink connection to
be made via MirrorLink
Connected / Previously connected devices
Available devices
Limitations of mobile devices and applications
Availability of features
The availability of certain features depends on the
type of mobile device, as well as that of the applica-
tions installed.
Compatibility of mobile devices
It is possible to check the ŠKODA web pages to see
if Infotainment is compatible with the selected mo-
bile device being tested. This check is carried out by
using the following reference or by reading the QR
code.
▶
http://go.skoda.eu/compatibility
Bluetooth® compatibility of mobile devices
Due to the large number of mobile devices, it is not
possible to guarantee total Bluetooth® compatibility
with Infotainment. Bluetooth® compatibility depends
on the Bluetooth® version as well as the implementa-
tion of Bluetooth® protocols by the manufacturer of
the mobile device.
Applications in mobile devices
Mobile devices can be used to install applications
that allow you to view additional information on the
Infotainment screen, or to operate the Infotainment
system.
Due to the variety of applications, as well as their on-
going development, the available applications may
not function on all mobile devices. ŠKODA AUTO as-
sumes no liability for their proper functioning.
The scope of available applications and their func-
tionality is dependent on the type of Infotainment, as
well as the vehicle and country.
Connection set-up
Connect a mobile device to Infotainment
›
Find available Bluetooth® devices in the mobile de-
vice.
A
B
›
Select the Infotainment Bluetooth® unit.
The unit name can be determined by tapping
Manage mobile devices
device name:
.
›
Confirm the PIN; enter it if necessary and then
confirm.
Connect Infotainment to a non-paired mobile de-
vice
›
Tap on
Manage mobile devices
.
›
Select the desired device from the list of available
devices.
›
Select the desired Bluetooth® profile.
›
Confirm the PIN; enter it if necessary and then
confirm.
›
If two devices are connected to the Infotainment,
select the device to be replaced.
Connect Infotainment to a previously connected
mobile device
›
Tap on
Manage mobile devices
.
Or:
›
Tap on
Select mobile phone
.
›
Select the desired device from the list of previous-
ly connected devices.
›
Select the desired Bluetooth® profile.
›
If two devices are connected to the Infotainment,
select the device to be replaced.
SmartLink Connection
Infotainment provides the ability to connect Smar-
tLink to compatible mobile devices using the follow-
ing connection types.
Android Auto
Apple CarPlay
MirrorLink
Mobile devices can be connected to the Infotain-
ment via USB cable or Wi-Fi, as long as the mobile
device supports it.
›
Connect the mobile device to the Infotainment.
›
Tap the icon of the supported connection.
Telephone
Telephone main menu
Display main menu
›
Tap on
.
Or:
›
Tap on .
98
Infotainment Amundsen › Telephone
A
Name of the connected telephone
▶
Tap: Show list of previously connected phones
B
Name of telephone service providers
▶
If the symbol is displayed in front of the name,
roaming is active.
C
Preset buttons for preferred contacts
Change the main telephone with the additional
telephone
Enter telephone number
Contact list
Text messages / emails
Call lists
Settings
Conditions for connecting a telephone with
Infotainment
✓ The Bluetooth® function of the Infotainment and
the telephone needs to be switched on.
The Bluetooth® function of the Infotainment is
switched on in the menu item
Manage mo-
bile devices
Bluetooth
.
✓ Visibility of the Infotainment is switched on.
The visibility of the Infotainment is switched on in
the menu item
Manage mobile devices
Visibility:
.
✓ The telephone is within signal range of the Info-
tainment's Bluetooth® unit.
✓ The telephone is compatible with Infotainment.
✓ Through Infotainment, no mobile device can be
connected using Apple CarPlay.
Telephone operation
Enter telephone number
›
In the Telephone main menu, tap
.
›
Enter the telephone number using the numeric
keypad that is displayed.
The displayed numeric keypad can also be used
for searching for contacts.
If, for example, the digits 32 are entered, contacts
with the letter sequence DA, FA, EB etc. are dis-
played next to the numeric keypad.
List of telephone contacts
The list of telephone contacts is imported from the
connected main telephone.
›
Tap to display the contact list in the telephone
main menu
.
›
To search within the list, tap
Enter contact
.
›
Enter the details you wish to find.
›
To establish a connection with a contact, tap the
functional area showing the desired contact.
If a contact has multiple telephone numbers, select
the telephone number from the displayed list.
›
To display the details for a contact, tap
.
Establish a connection to the voice mailbox num-
ber
›
In the Telephone main menu, tap .
Telephone conversation
Depending on the context of the telephone conver-
sation, the following functions can be selected.
End connection / reject incoming call / end call
Answer an incoming call / return to the held call
Switch the ringer o / on
Hold a call
Switch the microphone o / on
Show details of the caller
Answer a call from the second telephone during
a call on the first telephone
The ongoing call on the first telephone is termi-
nated by accepting the call.
›
To switch the call tone from the speakers to the
telephone, go to the telephone main menu and tap
on
hands-free
.
›
To switch the call tone from the telephone to the
speakers, tap
.
Conference call
A conference call is a joint telephone conversation
with a minimum of three and a maximum of six par-
ticipants.
›
Make the next call during an ongoing conversation/
conference.
Or:
›
Accept a new incoming call by tapping the function
area
.
›
To start a conference call, tap on the functional
area .
During an ongoing conference call, the following
functions can be selected depending on the context.
Hold the conference call and leave temporarily
(the conference will continue in the background)
/
/
99
Infotainment Amundsen › Telephone
Return to the conference being held
Switch the microphone o / on
End the conference
Show details of the conference call
In the details of the conference call, depending on
the connected telephone, the following functions
can be selected.
Show details of the conference call participants
End conversation with the conference call par-
ticipant
Conversation with a participant outside of the
conference call
Send a text message
›
In the Telephone main menu, tap
Messages
New text message
.
›
Write a text message and confirm; a view of the
message is displayed.
The message can be edited when the text area
within the view is tapped.
›
Search for or select the recipient of the message.
›
Add more recipients or confirm selected recipi-
ents.
›
Tap
Send
.
Display received text messages
›
In the Telephone main menu, tap
Messages
or .
›
Messages that are received are displayed as indi-
vidual messages or as messages in a conversation,
depending on the following setting.
In order to switch the display of text messages in
a conversation on or o, go to the Telephone
main menu and tap
Show messages as a conversation
.
›
To switch on or o a graphic notification regard-
ing the receipt of a new message, go to the Tele-
phone main menu and tap
New message notifications
.
Infotainment oers the possibility to read the
text message (context-dependent) by means of the
generated Infotainment voice if
is tapped.
Send E-mails
›
In the Telephone main menu, tap on
E-mails
New e-mail
.
›
Write an e-mail and confirm that an e-mail is dis-
played.
The text can be edited when the text area within
the view is tapped.
›
Search for or select the recipient of the email.
›
Add more recipients or confirm selected recipi-
ents.
›
Enter the subject of the e-mail.
›
Tap
Send
.
Show received e-mails
›
In the Telephone main menu, tap
E-mails
.
/
›
Select the desired e-mail.
›
To switch on or o,a graphic notification regard-
ing the receipt of a new e-mail, go to the Tele-
phone main menu and tap
New message notifications
.
Settings for Infotainment telephone functions
Telephone-Infotainment-Connection types
The way in which the telephone is connected de-
pends on the number of phones currently connected
to the Infotainment.
▶
No telephone - The telephone is connected as a
main telephone.
▶
One telephone - The telephone is connected as an
additional telephone.
▶
Two telephones - Select the telephone to be re-
placed.
›
To switch between the main telephone and the
supplementary telephone in the main menu, tap
telephone
.
Connect the telephone to Infotainment
›
Find available Bluetooth® devices on the phone.
›
Select the Infotainment Bluetooth® unit.
The unit name can be determined by the menu
item
Manage mobile devices
Device name
.
›
Confirm the PIN; enter it if necessary and then
confirm.
Connect Infotainment to a non-paired telephone -
no telephone is connected
›
Tap on .
Or:
›
Tap on
.
›
Follow the instructions in the Infotainment screen.
Connecting Infotainment to a non-paired tele-
phone - another telephone is connected
›
Tap on
Manage mobile devices
.
›
Select the desired device from the list of available
devices.
›
Select the desired Bluetooth® profile.
›
Confirm the PIN; enter it if necessary and then
confirm.
The telephone is connected as an additional tele-
phone.
Or:
›
If two telephones are connected to the Infotain-
ment, select the telephone to be replaced.
Connect Infotainment to a previously paired tele-
phone
›
Tap on
Manage mobile devices
.
Or:
100
Infotainment Amundsen › Telephone
Tap on
Select mobile phone
.
›
Select the desired device from the list of previous-
ly connected devices.
The telephone is connected as an additional tele-
phone.
Or:
›
If two telephones are connected to the Infotain-
ment, select the telephone to be replaced.
Manage preset buttons for preferred contacts
›
To save the desired preset button, press and hold
A .
›
Select a contact from the displayed list.
›
If the contact contains multiple telephone num-
bers, choose the desired telephone number.
›
To display the menu for deleting go to the Tele-
phone main menu and tap
manage favourites
.
›
To delete one preset, tap on the list entry and con-
firm the deletion.
Or:
›
To delete all presets, tap on
Delete all
and confirm the
deletion.
Import telephone contacts
After first connecting the main telephone with Info-
tainment, telephone contacts will start to be impor-
ted into the Infotainment memory.
Infotainment can import up to 5000 telephone con-
tacts together with contact pictures. Each contact
can include max. 5 telephone numbers.
Depending on the type of telephone, import confir-
mation may be required.
Update telephone contacts
When re-connecting the telephone with Infotain-
ment, an automatic update of the list is carried out.
›
For a manual update of the list in the telephone
main menu, tap on
Import contacts
.
Sort contacts in the phone book
›
In the telephone main menu, tap on
Sort by:
and
select the sort type.
Ringer
Some phones do not allow the use of the telephone
ringtone; instead, the Infotainment ringtone is used.
›
To set the Infotainment ring go to the Telephone
main menu and tap
Select ringtone
.
›
Select the ringtone.
Number for the voice mailbox
›
To set the voice mailbox number go to the Tele-
phone main menu and tap on
Mailbox number:
.
›
Enter the number of the voice mailbox.
Turn the graphic notice regarding receiving a new
message/email on or o
When the feature is on, the new message icon ap-
pears on the status bar and in the feature area for
the messages when a new message/e-mail is re-
ceived.
›
In the Telephone main menu, tap
New message notifi-
cations
.
Simultaneous calls
This applies to some countries.
Depending on the connected telephone, it is possible
to answer the next incoming call and hold the previ-
ous call.
›
To switch on simultaneous calls, tap on telephone
Parallel talks
.
Wi-Fi
Functionality
The Wi-Fi can be used for the internet connection or
for the SmartLinkConnection.
The Infotainment hotspot can connect up to 8 mo-
bile devices. At the same time, the Infotainment can
be connected to another hotspot.
›
To display the list of connected mobile devices, tap
Wi-Fi
Infotainment system as hotspot
Connected devi-
ces
.
Overview of available hotspots
Display available hotspots
›
Tap
Wi-Fi
Wi-Fi:
.
A
Previously connected hotspots
B
Available hotspots
101
Infotainment Amundsen › Wi-Fi
C
The hotspot supports the WPS connection
Currently connected hotspot
Delete information about the hotspot connection
Wi-Fi signal strength of the hotspot
The Wi-Fi signal from the hotspot is not available
Function restriction
The Infotainment system can only be connected to a
hotspot with WPA2 access protection.
Settings
Connect a mobile device to the Infotainment hot-
spot
›
Turn on the Infotainment’s Wi-Fi hotspot in the
menu item
Wi-Fi
Infotainment system as a hotspot
Use as a hotspot
.
›
Turn on the Wi-Fi on the mobile device.
›
In the list of available Wi-Fi devices, look for Info-
tainment Wi-Fi.
The name of the Infotainment is taken from the
menu item
Wi-Fi
Infotainment system as a hotspot
Network name:
.
›
Select the Infotainment hotspot and enter the re-
quired password.
The password for connecting to the Infotainment
hotspot is taken from the menu item
Wi-
Fi
Infotainment system as hotspot
Network key
.
›
Confirm the connection.
Connect Infotainment to the mobile device hot-
spot
›
Turn on the Infotainment’s Wi-Fi unit in the menu
item
Wi-Fi
Wi-Fi:
Wi-Fi on
.
›
Select the desired hotspot in the list of available
hotspots.
›
Enter the password for connecting to mobile devi-
ces.
Infotainment stores passwords for previously
connected hotspots.
Security level of the Infotainment hotspot
The security level is factory-set at
WPA2
and cannot
be changed.
Data transmission with the connected device
›
To turn data transmission with the connected de-
vice on or o, tap
Wi-Fi
Infotainment system as
hotspot
Connected devices
.
Change the name of the Infotainment hotspot
▶
Tap
Wi-Fi
Infotainment system as hotspot
Network
name:
.
▶
Enter the name and confirm.
Change password for connection to Infotainment
hotspot
The password must be a minimum of 8 and a maxi-
mum of 63 characters.
▶
Tap
Wi-Fi
Infotainment system as a hotspot
Network
key:
.
▶
Enter the password and confirm.
Quick connection of Infotainment with the mobile
device hotspot
›
On the mobile device, turn on the hotspot, its visi-
bility, and the option for WPS connection.
›
Tap
Wi-Fi
Wi-Fi:
WPS quick connection (WPS button)
.
Automatic WPS connection
›
Tap
Wi-Fi
Quick connection to Infotainment system
.
›
In the mobile device, switch on the option for con-
nection via WPS.
›
Wait for the connection to be established and, if
necessary, confirm the respective messages.
Manual WPS connection
›
In the mobile device, switch on the option for con-
nection via WPS PIN.
The mobile device display will show the WPS PIN
for connecting to the Infotainment.
›
Tap
Wi-Fi
Quick connection to Infotainment system
WPS PIN
.
›
Enter the WPS PIN in the Infotainment and con-
firm.
›
Wait for the connection to be established and, if
necessary, confirm the respective messages.
Automatic connection using the QR code
›
Tap
Wi-Fi
Quick connection to Infotainment system
.
›
In the mobile device, switch on the option for con-
nection via QR Code.
›
With the mobile device, read the QR code dis-
played on the Infotainment screen.
›
Wait for the connection to be established and, if
necessary, confirm the respective messages.
Tips for a perfect connection
▶
Keep only the hotspot to be connected switched
on and switch o the other hotspots.
▶
Delete unused hotspots. This shortens the time re-
quired to establish a connection.
▶
For some hotspots, the connection takes longer, so
wait for the connection to finish.
▶
If the connection is interrupted, recheck the availa-
ble hotspots and repeat the connection.
102
Infotainment Amundsen › Wi-Fi
SmartLink
Functionality
SmartLink oers the ability to display and operate
certified applications from a connected mobile de-
vice in the Infotainment screen.
Certification may be conditional upon the use of the
latest update to the particular SmartLink application.
Applications include, for example, apps for route
guidance, telephoning, listening to music, etc.
Mobile devices can be connected via a USB cable or
Wi-Fi.
Supported connection types
SmartLink supports the following connection types.
▶
Android Auto.
▶
Apple CarPlay.
▶
MirrorLink.
Overview of the SmartLink connection
Main menu SmartLink
›
Tap on .
A
Previously connected device
B
Currently connected device
Display information about SmartLink
Separation of the active connection
Settings for the SmartLink menu
Android Auto
Navigation applications
Telephone applications
Overview of running applications, phone calls, in-
coming text messages, and more.
Music applications
Display of other available applications as well as
the option to return to the SmartLink main menu
Turn on voice control (Google Voice)
Apple CarPlay
A
List of available applications
Depending on the duration of operation:
▶
Tap: Return to the Apple CarPlay main menu
▶
Hold: Turn on voice control (Siri)
MirrorLink
It is not possible to operate the application while
driving
Return to the SmartLink main menu
List of running applications
Display of the last running application in connec-
ted mobile devices
Settings
Connection conditions
General connection conditions
✓ The mobile device supports the following Smar-
tLink connection types: Android Auto. Apple Car-
Play and MirrorLink.
✓ Mobile devices, as well as the type of Smar-
tLinkconnection, are supported in the respective
market.
✓ Some connected mobile devices require the mo-
bile device to be “unlocked”.
103
Infotainment Amundsen › SmartLink
Conditions for Android Auto
✓ The device to be connected must have Android
AutoSupport.
A list of devices, supported regions and applica-
tions that the Android Auto connection supports
can be found on the websites of Google Inc..
✓ The Android Auto application needs to be instal-
led on the mobile device.
✓ Some applications require the data connection in
the mobile device to be turned on.
Conditions for Apple CarPlay
✓ The device to be connected must have Apple
CarPlaySupport.
A list of devices, supported regions and applica-
tions that the Apple CarPlay connection supports
can be found on the websites of Apple Inc..
✓ Siri voice control is on.
✓ The data connection is switched on in the mobile
device.
Conditions for MirrorLink
✓ The device to be connected must have Mirror-
LinkSupport.
A list of devices and applications that the Mirror-
Link connection supports can be found on the
websites of Car Connectivity Consorcium®.
✓ The MirrorLink application needs to be installed
on the mobile device.
✓ Some applications require the data connection in
the connected mobile device to be turned on.
Restriction
Restriction of the navigation function
If route guidance is currently being carried out
through Infotainment, this is ended when you start
route guidance in the Apple CarPlay application.
If there is route guidance in the Apple CarPlay appli-
cation, it is ended by starting the destination guid-
ance using Infotainment.
Restriction of SmartLink applications while driving
For safety reasons, operation of some SmartLinkap-
plications while driving is not possible or is restric-
ted.
Operation
Operation of the running MirrorLink application
Display of control surfaces at the bottom
Display of control surfaces at the top
Return to the MirrorLink main menu
SmartLink settings
Apple CarPlay - Connection via USB
›
Turn on the Infotainment.
›
Turn on the mobile device.
›
Connect the mobile device to the front USB input
using a cable.
›
Choose to connect via Apple CarPlay.
Apple CarPlay - Connection via Wi-Fi from Info-
tainment
›
Turn on Bluetooth® and Bluetooth® visibility in the
Apple mobile device.
›
Tap on
Manage mobile devices
.
›
In the displayed list, look for and select the desired
device with the symbol
.
›
Follow the instructions on the Infotainment screen
and confirm the Bluetooth® pairing.
›
If another device is connected to the Infotainment,
select the device to be replaced.
Apple CarPlay - Connection via Wi-Fi from mobile
devices
To establish a connection, the following conditions
must be met.
✓ The minimum iOS version is 9.
✓ No other mobile device can be connected via
SmartLink.
✓ Wi-Fi and Bluetooth® functionality is switched on
in the Infotainment system.
›
In the mobile device, turn on the CarPlay function.
›
Press and hold the
button on the multifunction
steering wheel.
The Infotainment screen displays a connection
message with the name of the Bluetooth® unit of
the Infotainment.
›
Find available Bluetooth® devices on the phone.
›
Select the Infotainment Bluetooth® unit.
›
If necessary, confirm the PIN.
›
In the Infotainment screen, select the connection
type Apple CarPlay.
Apple CarPlay – Disconnection
›
In the Apple CarPlay main menu, tap on the “ŠKO-
DA” functional area.
›
Tap on
.
Android Auto - Connection via USB
›
Turn on the Infotainment.
›
Turn on the mobile device.
›
Connect the mobile device to the front USB input
using a cable.
›
Choose to connect via Android Auto.
Android Auto - Disconnection
›
In the main menu of Android Auto tap on “Re-
turn to ŠKODA”.
104
Infotainment Amundsen › SmartLink
›
Tap on .
MirrorLink - Connection via USB
›
Turn on the Infotainment.
›
Turn on the mobile device.
›
Connect the mobile device to the front USB input
using a cable.
›
Choose to connect through MirrorLink.
MirrorLink - Disconnection
›
In the MirrorLink main menu, tap
.
›
Tap on
.
Change to another device / connection type
Infotainment allows you to switch between currently
connected devices and the connection type.
›
Tap on .
›
Select the desired device or connection type.
ŠKODA Connect online services
Functionality
ŠKODA Connect online service oer the option of
connecting the vehicle to the online world. They thus
represent an extension of the vehicle and Infotain-
ment functions.
For ŠKODA Connect Services functionality, the vehi-
cle must be within range of a mobile network
through which the ŠKODA Connect Services are
provided. The availability, the connection speed and
the technology used in the mobile network can be
dierent in the respective countries and are depend-
ent on the mobile network operator.
The ŠKODA Connect online services are not included
in the equipment of the vehicle. These will be pub-
lished separately on the ŠKODA Connect Portal
website, in the ŠKODA Connect application or or-
dered in Infotainment.
The oer of ŠKODA Connect online services de-
pends on the type of vehicle and its trim level, Info-
tainment and country. Availability in each country
can be checked on the ŠKODA Connect website.
The rights and obligations of the Parties with respect
to the provision of these services are governed by a
separate agreement. Current legal documents re-
garding the online services can be found on the
ŠKODA Connect Portal as well as the ŠKODA Con-
nect application.
ŠKODA Connect website
▶
http://go.skoda.eu/skoda-connect
For example, the ŠKODA Connect web-
site contains the latest information
about the online services, a link to the
ŠKODA Connect Portal as well as the
option of downloading the ŠKODA Connect applica-
tion.
ŠKODA Connect Portal website
▶
http://go.skoda.eu/connect-portal
The ŠKODA Connect Portal website is
used, for example, for registration, acti-
vation and ordering of online services. It
also provides the option of remote ac-
cess to the vehicle.
Information call
The information call may be used in the case of prob-
lems with the online services or for information re-
garding the products and services of the ŠKODA
brand.
✓ The functional condition represents the active
online ŠKODA Connect services.
›
Press the
button.
Breakdown call
The breakdown call can be used in the event of a
breakdown.
✓ The functional condition represents the active
online ŠKODA Connect services.
›
Press the
button.
ŠKODA Connect Application
The ŠKODA Connect application enables remote ac-
cess to the vehicle using a mobile device. It can also
be used for user registration and to activate and
configure the online services.
The application can be downloaded to the mobile de-
vice after scanning the following QR code or link.
▶
http://go.skoda.eu/skodaconnectapp
105
Infotainment Amundsen › ŠKODA Connect online services
Settings
Use of the ŠKODA Connect online services requires
prior registration of the main user and subsequent
activation of the online services.
Registration and activation of online services
User registration and activating ŠKODA Connect on-
line services is carried out on the ŠKODA Connect
Portal website, in the ŠKODA Connect application, or
in Infotainment.
In order to complete user registration, you will need
to access your e-mails.
To activate ŠKODA Connect online services in the
vehicle, , two original keys from your vehicle are re-
quired.
Registering and activating online services in info-
tainment - no user
›
Turn on the Infotainment.
›
In the welcome window that appears, tap
Register
.
›
Enter the required information and confirm.
›
Follow the instructions on the screen.
Registration and activation of online services in In-
fotainment - new user
›
Turn on the Infotainment.
›
Tap
New user
.
›
Enter the required information and confirm.
›
Follow the instructions on the screen.
Delete user
›
Tap
Delete user
.
›
Select the user and confirm the deletion.
Connection status of the online services
The status of the connection to the ŠKODA Connect
online services is displayed by the discolouration of
the
symbol shown in the status bar on the Info-
tainment screen.
▶
White - online services are available.
▶
Grey - online services are not available.
Setting the personal data protection level
The level of protection of personal data in ŠKODA
Connect online services is indicated by an icon in the
status bar on the Infotainment screen.
›
Open the Infotainment
control enter by hold-
ing down the bar at the
top of the screen and
pulling it down.
›
To Display informa-
tion, tap
for the respective protection levels.
›
To display the menu for Setting the protection
level, tap the A symbol.
›
Select one of the following options for sending ve-
hicle and user data.
Send only the legally required data.
Send the vehicle and user data.
Send the vehicle and user data as well as the da-
ta regarding the vehicle position.
Division of vehicle position data on the website
ŠKODA Connect Portal and in the ŠKODA Con-
nect application .
Switching the online service data connection on /
o
For ŠKODA Connect online services, the prepaid da-
ta connection for online services can be used.
›
Tap
Data connection
Integrated data connection (eSIM)
.
Overview of online service data connection usage
›
To display, tap
Data connection
Data plans
.
Navigation
Navigation announcements
Infotainment route guidance takes place using
graphic driving recommendations and navigation an-
nouncements.
The navigation announcements are generated by the
Infotainment system. Navigation announcement
clarity (e.g. road or city name) cannot always be
guaranteed.
Repeat the last navigation announcement
›
Tap on
.
Turn o navigation announcements
›
Tap on .
Navigation overviews
Display main menu
›
Tap on .
106
Infotainment Amundsen › Navigation
Map overview
A
Vehicle position
B
Route
C
Route view
End route guidance
D
Display the destination input and route view
menu
E
Trac obstruction
F
Following driving recommendation
G
POI
H
Change map orientation
▶
North-facing 2D map
▶
2D map facing the direction of travel
▶
3D map facing the direction of travel
I
Road sign for the aected route section
Find destination
Centre the map on the vehicle position
Displaying the settings menu
Turn o navigation announcements
Repeat the last navigation announcement
J
Display map in accordance with the following
setting
▶
Auto
- Map in day / night mode depending on the
vehicle lighting currently switched on
▶
Day
- Map in day mode
▶
Night
- Map in night mode
Show the entire route
K
End route guidance
Settings
Find destination
›
Tap on .
A
Input line
B
List of destinations that have recently been
searched for
C
POI categories
›
Tap: search for the selected category
Show destination list
Enter destination via address / find destination
Select the destination you are looking for
›
Enter the details for the destination search.
›
Select the desired destination.
Destination details are displayed with the option of
starting route guidance.
Selecting the destination entered via the address
›
Tap on .
A menu for entering the destination via the ad-
dress is displayed.
›
Enter the required information.
Destination details are displayed with the option of
starting route guidance.
List of stored destinations
›
Tap on
.
A
List of stored destinations
B
Select category of stored destinations
▶
- Favourites
▶
- Last destinations
▶
- Telephone contact destinations
Selecting the stored destination
›
Select the category of stored destinations.
›
Select the desired destination.
107
Infotainment Amundsen › Navigation
Destination details are displayed with the option of
starting route guidance.
Recommended destinations
›
Tap on .
A
North-facing vehicle position
B
Trac obstruction
Delete the recommended destination
The view can display up to 5 recommended destina-
tions in the following categories.
▶
Home address destination.
▶
Business address destination.
▶
Favourites.
▶
Last destinations.
Destination alignment depends on the direction in
relation to the current vehicle position. The function-
al surface with the destination displays information
about the estimated travel time to the destination.
If the vehicle has active online services and there is a
trac obstruction on the route to the destination,
the trac obstruction icon will be displayed.
Delete the recommended destination
›
Touch the functional surface for the recommended
destination and swipe left.
›
Tap on
.
Selecting destination by tapping the map point
›
Tap the desired item or the POI icon in the map.
A
Show destination details with the following pos-
sible settings
▶
- Save destination as a favourite
▶
- Delete favourites
▶
- Set destination as a starting point for
route guidance in demo mode
B
Start direct route guidance
C
Route calculation
Route calculation
A
Current vehicle position
B
Proposed fastest route
C
Alternative routes
D
Target position
E
15 s time countdown before automatic start of
the route guidance
›
Tap: Interrupt time countdown
F
Start route guidance
Show information on the selected route
Set parameters for route calculation
Route overview
›
Tap on .
A
Information on current vehicle position
B
Final route destination
Tap: the following menu items can be selected.
›
Show on map
›
Stop route guidance
C
Destination provided by Infotainment on the
route
Tap: the following menu items can be selected.
›
Show on map
›
Add stopover destination
D
Route stopover
108
Infotainment Amundsen › Navigation
Tap: the following menu items can be selected.
›
Show on map
›
Delete
E
Trac obstruction on the route
Tap: the following menu items can be selected.
›
Show on map
›
Avoid
F
Route view
Changing route destinations
In the route overview, it is possible to exchange the
destination and the intermediate destinations with
each other and thus change their order.
›
Hold the line with the desired destination until the
functional surface for the destination becomes
free.
›
Move the destination to the desired position and
release the functional surface.
The route is re-calculated.
Trac density
When ŠKODA online services are activated, trac
density information can be displayed in the form of
the following colour scale in the route view
F .
Low density
High density
Trac density information is not available
Touch operation
Move map
Enter destination by tapping the map item
Switch 2D/3D map display
Zoom into the map
Zoom out of the map
Rotate the map
Restriction
Infotainment may give incorrect driving recommen-
dations if the road conditions or the trac do not
match the navigation data. This can lead to the route
guidance being carried out using a dierent route or
proposing a change of direction in a one-way street.
Information for updating the navigation data must be
requested from a ŠKODA partner.
109
Infotainment Amundsen › Navigation
Settings
Avoiding trac obstructions
If the function is switched on and the Infotainment
receives information about a trac obstruction on
the route from online trac information, the route is
recalculated.
Infotainment may suggest a detour to avoid trac
obstructions, depending on the following attitude.
›
Tap
Route guidance
Avoid trac congestion
.
›
Select the desired menu item.
Showing information on the destination / waypoint
The status line displays information on the distance
and travel time to the destination, depending on the
following setting.
›
Tap
Route guidance
Show information for:
.
›
Select the desired menu item for the destination
type.
Showing arrival time information in the destina-
tion / driving time
The status line displays information on the travel
time depending on the following setting.
›
Tap
Route guidance
Time display:
.
›
Select the desired menu item.
Switching display of country-specific speed limits
on / o
When the function is switched on, the country-spe-
cific speed limits are displayed when crossing nation-
al borders.
›
Tap
Route guidance
Country information at border crossings
.
Switching the display of road signs on motorways
and expressways on / o
When the function is switched on, Infotainment dis-
plays trac and information signs on motorways and
expressways.
›
Tap
Route guidance
Information signs on motorways and dual
carriageways
.
Switching the fuel warning on / o
When the function is switched on and the fuel sup-
ply reaches the reserve area, a warning message ap-
pears with the option of going to the nearest petrol
station.
›
Tap
Route guidance
Fuel warning
.
Switching the speed limit warning on / o
›
Tap
Route guidance
Road signs
.
›
Set the note type and the value for exceeding the
permissible speed.
Toggle suggestions for frequently visited points of
interest
In order to search for or display destinations in rec-
ommended destinations, the suggestion of POIs can
be switched
on/o based on the frequency of desti-
nation guidance to these destinations.
›
In the Navigation main menu, tap
Basic functions
Learn usage pattern
.
Delete information for suggesting frequently vis-
ited points of interest
›
In the Navigation main menu, tap
Basic functions
Delete usage pattern
.
›
Confirm the deletion.
Towing a trailer
To calculate the correct route for trailer operation,
switch on trailer inclusion.
›
Tap
Route guidance
Trailer
Include trailer
.
Set the maximum speed for trailer operation to cor-
rectly calculate the route time.
›
Tap
Route guidance
Trailer
Maximum speed for trailers
.
›
Set the maximum speed for the trailer.
Setting navigation announcements
›
Tap
navigation announcements
.
›
Select and set the desired menu item.
Favourite POI categories
Favourite POI categories are displayed on the map
and provided in the destination search.
›
Tap
Basic functions
Define preferred POI categories
.
›
Set favourite categories.
Setting home address
The defined destination of the home address is dis-
played in the overview of recommended destina-
tions.
›
Tap
Basic functions
Enter home address
.
Setting business address
The defined destination of the business address is
displayed in the overview of recommended destina-
tions.
›
Tap
Basic functions
Enter business address
.
Switching demo mode on / o
In demo mode, the route guidance from the starting
point of the demo mode to the selected destination
is simulated.
When the function is switched on, Infotainment is-
sues a query before the start of route guidance as to
where whether the route guidance should be carried
out in the normal way or in demo mode.
›
Tap
Basic functions
Demo mode
.
Defining the starting point of the demo mode
›
Select or locate the desired destination to be the
starting point of demo mode.
›
In the displayed destination details, tap
More
.
110
Infotainment Amundsen › Navigation
Updating the navigation database
Information on updating the navigation database
must be requested from a ŠKODA partner, or refer
to the following ŠKODA websites.
▶
http://go.skoda.eu/updateportal
Automatic update
Infotainment automatically oers an update option if
the following conditions are met.
✓ The “Infotainment Online” online services are ac-
tivated.
✓ An update of the navigation database for the cur-
rent vehicle position or route destination is availa-
ble.
Determining the navigation database version
›
Tap
System information
.
Starting and driving
Starting with the key
Notes on starting
DANGER
Danger of poisoning by exhaust gases!
▶
Do not run the engine in an enclosed space.
Positions of the key in the ignition lock
1
Ignition o
2
Ignition switched on
3
Start the engine
Starting the vehicle with manual transmission
›
Secure the vehicle with the parking brake.
›
Move the shift lever to the neutral position.
›
Keep the clutch pedal depressed.
›
Turn the key to position
3 .
›
Release the key.
Starting the vehicle with automatic transmission
›
Secure the vehicle with the parking brake.
›
Keep the brake pedal depressed.
›
Move the selector lever to position or .
›
Turn the key to position 3 .
›
Release the key.
After switching on the ignition on vehicles with
diesel engines, the indicator light
- Preheating
system illuminates. The engine starts after goes
out.
CAUTION
Danger of unexpected vehicle movement!
▶
At temperatures below -10°C, start the vehicle
with the selector lever in the
position.
Stopping the engine
›
Secure the vehicle with the parking brake.
›
Turn the key to position 1 .
On vehicles with automatic transmission, the key can
only be removed when the selector lever is in the
position.
WARNING
Steering lock hazard!
During a journey with the engine stopped, the igni-
tion must always be switched on.
111
Starting and driving › Starting with the key
NOTICE
Risk of engine overheating!
▶
Do not switch the engine o immediately at the
end of your journey after the engine has been run-
ning at high loads. Leave it to run at an idling speed
for about 1 minute.
Start at the push of a button
Notes on starting
DANGER
Danger of poisoning by exhaust gases!
▶
Do not run the engine in an enclosed space.
Operating conditions
✓ The vehicle key is located in the vehicle interior.
NOTICE
Risk of key loss, possibly of key damage!
The system can detect the key even if it has been
forgotten on the vehicle roof.
▶
Always keep the key with you.
Switching the ignition on and o
›
Press the starter button.
Starting the vehicle with manual transmission
›
Secure the vehicle with the parking brake.
›
Move the shift lever to the neutral position.
›
Keep the clutch pedal depressed.
›
Press the starter button.
Starting the vehicle with automatic transmission
›
Secure the vehicle with the parking brake.
›
Keep the brake pedal depressed.
›
Move the selector lever to position
or .
›
Press the starter button.
After switching on the ignition on vehicles with
diesel engines, the indicator light - Preheating
system illuminates. The engine starts after goes
out.
CAUTION
Danger of unexpected vehicle movement!
▶
At temperatures below -10°C, start the vehicle
with the selector lever in the position.
Stopping the engine
›
Secure the vehicle with the parking brake.
›
Press the starter button.
WARNING
Steering lock hazard!
During a journey with the engine stopped, the igni-
tion must always be switched on.
NOTICE
Risk of engine overheating!
▶
Do not switch the engine o immediately at the
end of your journey after the engine has been run-
ning at high loads. Leave it to run at an idling speed
for about 1 minute.
Starting issues
Troubleshooting
NOTICE
Danger of engine and catalyst damage!
▶
Do not start the vehicle by towing.
The engine does not start
›
Switch o the ignition.
›
Wait 30 seconds and repeat the starting proce-
dure.
›
If the engine does not start, use the jump start ca-
bles with the battery of another vehicle » page 140
or seek the help of a specialist garage.
The engine does not start, the display shows a
message regarding the immobilizer
›
Use the other vehicle key.
›
If the engine does not start, seek the help of a spe-
cialist garage.
The key cannot be turned in the ignition
›
Move the steering wheel back and forth while
turning the key.
Starting is not possible with the starter button, the
system did not detect the key
›
Press the starter but-
ton with the key.
›
If the engine does not
start, seek the help of a
specialist garage.
The key might not be detected if the battery in
the key is nearly discharged or the signal is faulty.
The engine cannot be turned o with the starter
button
›
Hold the starter button or press twice.
The radiator fan keeps running even after the en-
gine has stopped
The radiator fan can continue to run for approxi-
mately 10 minutes after the engine is stopped. This is
not a defect.
112
Starting and driving › Start at the push of a button
The engine makes noises after the cold start
The increased running noise is due to the briefly in-
creased engine speed. This is not a defect.
START STOP
Usage
The START STOP system reduces environmentally
damaging emissions, including CO
2
, and saves fuel.
If the system determine that the engine is not nee-
ded when the vehicle stops, it turns o the engine
and starts it again when moving o.
Functionality
Vehicle with manual transmission
A system-related engine switch-o occurs when
stopping, when switching the gear lever into the
neutral position, and when releasing the clutch pedal.
A system-related engine start occurs when the
clutch pedal is pressed down.
Vehicle with automatic transmission
A system-related engine switch-o occurs when the
brake pedal is actuated and the engine is stopped.
A system-related engine start takes place after re-
leasing the brake pedal.
Status display in the instrument cluster display
Engine is switched o via the START-STOP
system
Engine is not switched o via the START-STOP
system due to operating conditions that are
not met
Display of detailed information in the infotainment
screen
Vehicle status
Or:
Vehicle status
Operating conditions
Some conditions are systemic and can neither be in-
fluenced nor recognised. Therefore, the system may
react dierently in situations which seem identical
from the driver's perspective.
The driver must fulfil the following conditions.
✓ The driver's door is closed.
✓ The driver has fastened the seat belt.
✓ The driving speed was higher than 4 km.h after
the last stop.
Settings
Automatic activation
▶
Upon start-up of the engine.
▶
By selecting driving mode Eco » page 115, Opera-
tion.
Deactivate/activate system
›
Press the
button.
When the system is deactivated, the symbol illu-
minates in the button.
If a system-related engine switch-o occurs and the
system is deactivated, the engine will start.
Troubleshooting
The engine does not switch o when stopping, or
it starts before starting up
The system has detected that the engine is running.
Manual gearbox
Operation
NOTICE
Danger of engine damage!
▶
Shift to a higher gear before reaching the red area
on the tachometer scale.
NOTICE
Danger of gearbox damage!
▶
Fully depress the clutch pedal when changing gear.
▶
When not shifting gear, do not put your hand on
the shift lever.
Engaging reverse gear
›
Stop the vehicle.
›
Fully depress the clutch.
›
Move the shift lever to the neutral position.
›
Push the shift lever down.
›
Turn it completely to the left.
›
Wait briefly.
›
Engage reverse gear.
113
Starting and driving › START STOP
Automatic gearbox
Lever positions
Parked vehicle
The drive wheels are
locked.
Only set the posi-
tion when the vehi-
cle is stationary.
Reverse gear
Only set the posi-
tion when the vehi-
cle is stationary.
Neutral
There is no transmission of engine power to the
wheels.
Forward drive / sports program
The gear is changed automatically.
Choose between and (spring-loaded posi-
tion)
In
mode, the gear is changed at higher speeds
than in mode.
Moving the selector lever out of the
or position
lights up - the selector lever is locked
›
Press the brake pedal,
and at the same time,
press the button in the
selector lever.
WARNING
Risk of the stationary vehicle rolling away automati-
cally!
▶
When the selector lever is in the position, po-
sition or in manual shift mode, secure the vehicle
with the brake.
Operation
Starting up
›
Keep the brake pedal depressed.
›
Start the engine.
›
Press the button in the selector lever and set it to
the desired position.
›
Release the brake pedal and accelerate.
Speeding up while driving (kick-down)
›
Fully depress the accelerator.
Stopping temporarily (e.g. at a junction)
›
Leave the selector lever in the position and se-
cure the vehicle with the brake pedal.
Stopping
›
Keep the brake pedal depressed.
›
Secure the vehicle with the parking brake.
›
Press the button in the selector lever and set it to
the position.
›
Turn o the engine.
Driving in neutral
If the system detects that no gear is engaged while
driving, it automatically switches to neutral position.
in the instrument cluster lights up.
Requirements for driving in neutral position
✓ Neither the accelerator nor the brake pedal is
pressed.
✓ Driving speed between 20-130 km/h.
✓ There is no device connected to the trailer sock-
et.
Manually switching gear with the selector lever
›
To turn on, put the selector lever in the
posi-
tion to the right (to the left for right-hand drive ve-
hicles).
›
To turn o, put the selector lever back in the
position.
+
Changing up a gear
-
Changing down a
gear
Manually changing gear with the shift paddles on
the steering wheel
-
Changing down a
gear
+
Changing up a gear
›
To switch on the rock-
er switch, press -
or
+
.
›
To Turn o the rocker
switch, hold
+
.
If none of the shift pad-
dles are pressed for a certain time, manual shift
mode turns o automatically.
If the engine threatens to over-rev
▶
The gearbox automatically changes to the next
higher gear.
114
Starting and driving › Automatic gearbox
▶
The transmission prevents changing to the next
lower gear.
Troubleshooting
The selector lever cannot be moved out of posi-
tion in the normal way
›
Unlock the lever like in an emergency » page 115.
Gearbox overheated
or illuminates
Message regarding the gearbox overheating
›
You may continue driving, exercising appropriate
caution.
or
illuminates
Message regarding the gearbox overheating
›
Stop driving! Stop the vehicle and stop the engine.
›
After the indicator light goes out, your journey can
continue.
›
If the warning light does not go out, stop driving!
Seek the help of a specialist garage.
Gearbox impaired
or
illuminates
Message regarding the gearbox in emergency
mode
›
You may continue driving, exercising appropriate
caution.
›
Immediately seek the help of a specialist garage.
or illuminates
Message regarding a gearbox fault
›
Stop driving! Seek the help of a specialist garage.
Starting up a vehicle that is stuck
›
Adjust the selector lever between and . The
vehicle will then start to rock and be easier to free.
Selector lever emergency unlocking
›
Secure the vehicle with the parking brake.
›
Insert a flat-head
screwdriver or push a
similar tool into the
gap in the area of ar-
row A
.
›
Carefully loosen and
lift the quadrant cover.
›
Push the foam insert
away until the yellow
release lever is visible.
›
Press with the vehicle
key on the release lev-
er, and at the same
time, press the key in
the selector lever.
›
Put the selector lever
in position.
Vehicle driving mode
Usage
The driving mode oers the possibility of adapting
the driving behaviour to the desired driving style.
Overview
Information about the selected driving mode is dis-
played in the status bar in the Infotainment screen as
well as in the digital instrument cluster.
Eco mode
Eco mode is suitable for a relaxed driving style and
helps to save fuel.
Normal mode
Normal mode is suitable for a normal driving style.
Sports mode
Sport mode is suitable for a sporty driving style.
Individual mode
Individual mode allows the individual configuration of
certain vehicle systems.
Operation
Select driving mode
›
Press the button.
In the Infotainment, a driving mode menu appears.
115
Starting and driving › Vehicle driving mode
A
Information on the system settings of the cur-
rently selected mode/system settings for the se-
lected Individual mode
B
Driving mode menu
›
Tap the relevant function surface B .
Or:
›
Press the button again.
Troubleshooting
Sport Chassis Preset shock absorber faulty
or illuminates
›
Drive on, exercising appropriate caution. Seek
the help of a specialist garage.
Economical driving style
Tips for economical driving and evaluation of
driving economy
Tips for economical driving
▶
Avoid unnecessary acceleration and braking.
▶
Observe the recommended gear » page 50, Display
overview and overview of the menu items in the
main menu.
▶
Avoid full throttle and too high speeds.
▶
Avoid engine idling during longer periods of sta-
tionary time.
▶
Do not warm up the engine while the vehicle is sta-
tionary. If possible, start your journey as soon as
the engine starts.
▶
Observe the prescribed tyre pressure » page 149,
Sticker with prescribed tyre pressures.
▶
Remove unnecessary ballast.
▶
Remove the roof rack when it is not needed.
▶
Switch on electric consumers for as long as neces-
sary.
▶
Do not leave the windows open while driving.
Display of evaluation in the infotainment screen
DriveGreen
Or:
Drive Green
A
A driving liquid display
With the driving is fluid, the display is located
near the green dot.
B
Leaf
The greener the leaf, the more economic the
driving style. Tapping the screen near the leaf
displays tips for reducing fuel consumption and
energy consumption.
C
Driving eciency chart
Each bar indicates driving eciency in 5 second
increments. The current bar is on the left. The
higher the green bars, the more economical the
driving style.
D
Point value (0-100)
The higher the indicated value, the more eco-
nomical the driving style. Tapping the screen
near the value D displays a rating for the last 30
minutes of driving.
E
Average fuel consumption
Tapping the screen near the value E displays the
average fuel consumption during the last 30 mi-
nutes of driving.
F
Information about the current driving style
▶
Economical driving style
▶
The speed has a negative eect on fuel con-
sumption
▶
The ride is not smooth
▶
Recommended gear
Consumption-friendly driving
In the following situations, a small reduction in fuel
consumption occurs. in the instrument cluster
lights up.
▶
Active cylinder management has temporarily disa-
bled some cylinders in the engine (applies to cer-
tain engine types).
▶
A vehicle with automatic transmission, rolls in neu-
tral position.
116
Starting and driving › Economical driving style
Towing a trailer
What you should be mindful of
WARNING
When driving with a trailer, special care is required!
NOTICE
With frequent towing, the vehicle is excessively loa-
ded so this must also be checked between service
intervals.
Recommendations for using a trailer
▶
Adjust the tyre pressure on the vehicle for full load.
▶
Do not exceed the maximum permissible total
weight of the vehicle and the combination weight
specified in the technical vehicle documentation
(e.g. in the vehicle registration documentation, in
the COC document) and on the type plate.
▶
For trailer operation, consider the current load con-
dition of the vehicle as well as the distribution of
the load in the trailer. The coupled trailer increases
the rear axle load and can therefore reduce the
payload.
▶
Adjust the headlight range of the headlights ac-
cording to the load status of the vehicle. The front
of the vehicle may lift up when a trailer is being
towed and the headlights may dazzle other road
users.
▶
A speed of 100 km/h should not be exceeded.
▶
Reduce the speed by releasing the accelerator
pedal as soon as a pendulum movement of the
trailer is noticeable. Never attempt to stop the
trailer from swaying by accelerating.
▶
If the trac area behind the trailer can not be
viewed, install additional exterior mirrors.
▶
Apply the brakes in good time. If the trailer is fitted
with a trailer brake, apply the brakes gently at first,
then brake firmly. This will avoid brake jolts result-
ing from the trailer wheels locking.
▶
Select a lower gear before descending to also use
the braking force of the engine.
Distribution of the load over the vehicle and trailer
combination
▶
Secure heavy objects against slipping, as close to
the trailer axle as possible.
▶
Transport small and light objects in the luggage
compartment.
Permitted trailer loads
The details in the technical vehicle documentation take precedence over the information in this Owner's Man-
ual.
WARNING
Risk of an accident!
Do not exceed the permissible trailer load.
Engine type Transmission Permissible trailer load,
braked (kg)
a)
Permissible trailer load,
unbraked (kg)
1.0 l/70 kW TSI Manual gearbox
-
b)
-
b)
1.0 l/85 kW TSI Manual gearbox 1200 610
DSG
c)
-
b)
-
b)
1.5 l/110 kW TSI Manual gearbox
-
b)
-
b)
DSG
c)
-
b)
-
b)
1.6 l/85 kW TDI CR Manual gearbox 1250 660
DSG
c)
1250 680
a)
With gradients up to 12%.
b)
The valueswere not available at the time of going to press.
c)
Automatic dual-clutch transmission.
117
Starting and driving › Towing a trailer
Towing eye and towing procedure
Towing eye
Removing the front cap
›
Press on the cap and
remove it.
Removing the rear cap
›
Press on the cap and
remove it.
Installing the towing eye
›
Screw in the towing
eye.
›
Insert the wheel
wrench or similar ob-
ject through the tow-
ing eye.
›
Tighten the towing
eye.
After the towing process
›
Unscrew the towing eye.
›
Insert the cover cap.
Towing the vehicle
WARNING
Risk of an accident!
▶
The tow rope must not be twisted.
▶
When towing, drive at a speed of max. 50 km/h.
WARNING
Risk of an accident!
▶
Use a braided synthetic fibre rope for towing. Do
not use a twisted tow rope.
NOTICE
▶
Always keep the tow rope taut during the towing
procedure.
▶
Do not exceed a towing distance of 50 km.
NOTICE
Danger of gearbox damage!
▶
If the gearbox no longer contains any oil, the vehi-
cle must only be towed with the front axle raised
clear of the ground or transported on a special
breakdown vehicle.
▶
Vehicles with automatic transmission must not be
towed with the rear axle raised.
Where should the tow rope or the tow bar be se-
cured?
▶
At the front towing eye.
▶
At the rear towing eye.
▶
On the ball bar of the factory-installed towing
hitch.
Information for the driver of the towing vehicle
›
Drive slowly and smoothly.
›
Only accelerate when the rope is taut.
Information for the driver of the towed vehicle
WARNING
Risk of an accident!
When the ignition is switched o, the brake booster
and the power steering do not work. In addition,
there is a risk that the steering lock will engage.
▶
If it is not possible to start the engine, switch on
the ignition!
›
Move the shift lever to the neutral position or the
selector lever to the
position.
Brakes
What you should be mindful of
WARNING
Problems and faults with the brake system can ex-
tend the braking distance of the vehicle!
118
Starting and driving › Towing eye and towing procedure
DANGER
Danger of a functional restriction of the brake boos-
ter!
▶
When braking in a vehicle with manual transmis-
sion, when the vehicle is in gear and at low revs,
depress the clutch pedal.
DANGER
Danger of the brakes overheating!
▶
Do not depress the brake pedal unless braking is
required.
▶
If the standard front spoiler is damaged, ensure the
air supply to the front brakes is guaranteed.
Checking the brake fluid level
Test conditions
✓ Park the vehicle on a horizontal surface.
✓ Engine turned o.
Checking
The fill level must be
within the marked range.
›
If the level is below the
mark
, do not con-
tinue.
›
Do not refill liquid.
›
Seek the help of a spe-
cialist garage.
If the brake fluid level is
too low, this will be indi-
cated in the instrument cluster by the illumination of
. Nevertheless, we recommend checking the
brake fluid level regularly directly at the reservoir.
Specification
The brake fluid must comply with the standard VW
501 14 (this standard meets the requirements of the
standard FMVSS 116 DOT4).
Have the brake fluid replaced by a specialist garage.
WARNING
Danger of brake failure!
▶
If the brake fluid change date is exceeded, heavy
braking may cause vapour bubbles to form in the
brake system.
▶
If the fluid level falls significantly within a short
time or drops below the mark , the brake sys-
tem may have become leaky.
Stop driving! Seek the help of a specialist garage.
Troubleshooting
Brake fluid level is too low
illuminates
›
Do not drive the vehicle! Seek the help of a special-
ist garage.
Brake system and anti-lock braking system faulty
illuminates together with
›
Do not drive the vehicle! Seek the help of a
specialist garage.
Reduced braking eect
Damp, frozen, salt-aected or corroded brakes can
impair the braking eect.
›
Clean the brakes by braking several times if trac
conditions allow it.
When the engine is stopped, the brake booster
does not work
›
Depress the brake pedal more forcefully.
Handbrake
Operation
WARNING
Risk of an accident!
An insuciently released parking brake will impair
the function of the brake system.
▶
Fully release the parking brake before driving.
Applying
›
Pull the lever up to the
stop position.
The display
lights
up.
Releasing
›
Pull the lever up a little and push in the lock button.
›
Press and hold the lock button and pull the lever
completely down.
119
Starting and driving › Handbrake
Driver assist systems
Braking and stabilising systems
Overview
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
ESC helps to stabilize the vehicle in borderline situa-
tions (e.g. when the vehicle starts to skid). ESC
brakes the individual wheels to maintain the direc-
tion of travel.
flashing - ESC is engaged
Anti-Slip Regulation (ASR)
ASR helps to stabilize the vehicle when accelerating
or driving on low-grip roads. ASR reduces the drive
power transmitted to the wheels when the wheels
spin.
flashing - ASR is engaged
Anti-lock Braking System (ABS)
ABS helps maintain control of the vehicle during
emergency braking. An ABS intervention is noticea-
ble by pulsating movements of the brake pedal.
Motor Slip Regulation (MSR)
MSR helps to keep control the vehicle when down-
shifting or abruptly decelerating, e.g. on an icy road
surface. If the drive wheels lock, MSR increases the
engine speed. As a result, the braking eect of the
engine is reduced and the wheels can turn freely
again.
Electronic Dierential Lock (EDL)
EDL helps to stabilize the vehicle when driving on
road surfaces with dierent grip under the individual
wheels. EDL brakes a spinning wheel and transmits
power to a dierent drive wheel.
Electronic Dierential Lock (XDL+)
XDL + helps to stabilize the vehicle during fast cor-
nering by braking the inside wheel of the driven axle.
Active steering assistance (DSR)
In dicult situations, the DSR provides the driver
with a steering recommendation in order to stabilise
the vehicle.
Hill Hold Control
Hill Hold Control helps when starting o on uphill
gradients by braking the vehicle for about 2 seconds
after the brake pedal is released.
Operating conditions
✓ The gradient is at least 5%.
✓ The driver's door is closed.
Multi-Collision Brake (MCB)
MCB helps to decelerate and stabilize the vehicle af-
ter a collision with an obstacle. This reduces the risk
of further collisions.
Operating conditions
✓ There has been a frontal, side and rear collision of
a certain severity.
✓ The impact speed was greater than 10 km/h.
✓ The brakes, ESC and other required systems re-
mained functional after the impact.
✓ The accelerator pedal is not pressed.
Trailer Stability Assist (TSA)
TSA helps to stabilize the trailer. As the trailer begins
to lurch, TSA stabilizes the trailer by slowing down
the individual vehicle wheels.
Operating conditions
✓ The hitch was supplied from the factory or pur-
chased from ŠKODA Genuine Accessories.
✓ The trailer is connected to the trailer socket.
✓ ASR activated.
✓ The driving speed is higher than 60 km/h.
Settings
Deactivating/activating ASR
The function is deactivated or activated in the fol-
lowing Infotainment menu.
Or:
When deactivating lights up in the instrument
cluster.
goes out on renewed activation.
Deactivating the ASR may be helpful in the following
situations.
▶
Driving with snow chains.
▶
Driving in deep snow or on very loose ground.
▶
Starting up a vehicle that is stuck.
Troubleshooting
ESC or ASR faulty/deactivated by the system
illuminates
›
Stop the engine and start again.
›
If the indicator light does not go out after covering
a short distance, seek the help of a specialist ga-
rage.
ABS faulty
illuminates
›
You may continue driving, exercising appro-
priate caution. Seek the help of a specialist garage.
120
Driver assist systems › Braking and stabilising systems
Brake system and anti-lock braking system faulty
illuminates together with
›
Stop driving! Seek the help of a specialist ga-
rage.
Front Assist
Functionality
Front Assist monitors the distance to the vehicle
ahead and points out when the safety distance is ex-
ceeded. In borderline situations, it helps to avoid a
collision by braking interventions.
Status display in the instrument cluster display
- Safety distance too small
or
- Warning in case of collision
Automatic braking if there is a risk of a collision
If there is a risk of a collision, the following symbol
or is displayed as a warning. If you do not re-
spond to the warning, the vehicle will slow down.
At a driving speed of up to 30 km / h, the vehicle is
braked without prior warning.
Automatic braking can be stopped by pressing the
accelerator pedal or by a steering intervention.
With automatic braking, the pressure in the brake
system increases. The brake pedal can not be oper-
ated by using the pedal as normal.
WARNING
Risk of an accident!
Front Assist does not respond to crossing or oncom-
ing vehicles.
Operating conditions
✓ ASR activated.
✓ The driving speed is higher than 5 km/h.
Function restriction
The function may be restricted or unavailable in the
following cases.
▶
About 30 seconds after starting. is lit up in the
instrument cluster.
▶
When driving around a sharp bend.
▶
During an ESC intervention.
Settings
Automatic activation
Front Assist is automatically activated when the igni-
tion is switched on.
Activation/deactivation in the instrument cluster
In the display in the
Assist systems
menu item
Activation / deactivation and setting in Infotain-
ment
In the menu:
Show system deactivation in the display of the in-
strument cluster
or - Front Assist is deactivated
Deactivate Front Assist when handling the vehi-
cle on a truck, a car ferry etc.
Troubleshooting
Front Assist is not available
›
Clean the front radar sensor.
›
Stop the engine and start again.
›
If Front Assist is still unavailable, check the brake
lights on the vehicle or on the attached trailer.
›
Replace the defective bulb.
›
If the brake lights are working and Front Assist is
still unavailable, seek the help of a specialist ga-
rage.
There was an unfounded warning or system inter-
vention
›
Clean the front radar sensor.
›
If the system is not working properly, disable Front
Assist and seek the help of a specialist garage.
Pedestrian detection system
Functionality
Pedestrian recognition helps to prevent a collision
with crossing pedestrians by enabling automatic
braking interventions.
Status display in the instrument cluster display
or - Risk of collision
Risk of collision in a speed range of 5-30 km/h
The system triggers automatic braking.
Risk of collision in a speed range of 30-60 km/h
The system warns of a collision hazard first. If the
driver does not respond, the vehicle is automatically
braked.
121
Driver assist systems › Front Assist
Operating conditions
✓ Front Assist activated.
✓ Driving speed between 5-60 km/h.
Speed limiter
Functionality
The speed limiter controls the maximum driving
speed according to the set speed limit.
If the limit is exceeded when driving downhill, brake
the vehicle with the brake pedal.
Status display in the instrument cluster display
- Speed limiter is activated
When the control starts, is highlighted and the
set limit is displayed.
illuminated - Control is active
flashing - the set limit is exceeded
Operating conditions
✓ The driving speed is higher than 30 km/h.
Operation
Variant without GRA
A
Activate limiter (control inactive)
Deactivate limiter
Interrupt control (sprung position)
B
Resume control
1)
/Increase limit
C
Start control with current speed/Reduce
limit
Variant with GRA
A
Activate GRA (condition for the subsequent
activation of the limiter).
To activate the speed limiter, press button D
or
E
.
Deactivate limiter
Interrupt control (sprung position)
B
Resume control
1)
/Increase limit
C
Start control with current speed/Reduce
limit
D
Depending on the equipment:
Switch between GRA and speed limiter
Or:
Show menu of assist systems - Possibility of
switching between GRA and speed limiter
Switching to GRA interrupts the control.
E
Show menu of assist systems - Possibility of
switching between GRA and speed limiter
Switching to GRA interrupts the control.
Adjusting the speed limit with the buttons
B and
C
By pressing in steps of 1 km/h.
By holding in steps of 10 km/h.
1)
If no speed limit is set, the current speed is set as the speed limit.
122
Driver assist systems › Speed limiter
Variant with ACC
Activate ACC (condition for the subsequent
activation of the limiter). To activate the limit-
er, press button A .
Resume control
1)
/Increase limit in steps of 1
km/h (sprung position)
Interrupt control (sprung position)
Deactivate the limiter
Increase limit in steps of 10 km/h
Decrease limit in steps of 10 km/h
Start control/Reduce limit in steps of 1 km/h
A
Change between ACC and speed limiter (by
switching to GRA, control is interrupted)
Limit exceeded
›
Fully depress the accelerator.
Control will continue as soon as the vehicle has de-
celerated to below the set limit.
Troubleshooting
Speed limiter faulty
illuminates
›
Seek the help of a specialist garage.
Cruise control system
Functionality
The cruise control system maintains the set speed
without the accelerator pedal having to be operated.
However, this is only done to the extent permitted
by engine performance or engine braking.
WARNING
Risk of the cruise control system starting uninten-
tionally!
▶
Deactivate cruise control after use.
Status display in the instrument cluster display
- the cruise control system is activated
- cruise control is active
When cruise control starts, the set speed is
displayed.
Operating conditions
✓ The driving speed is higher than 20 km/h.
Operation
Operating with the lever
A
Activate cruise control (cruise control deacti-
vated)
Deactivate cruise control
Interrupt control (sprung position)
B
Resume cruise control
2)
/Increase speed
C
Start control with current speed/Reduce
limit
D
Show menu of assist systems - Possibility of
switching between GRA and speed limiter
Accelerate temporarily
›
Depress the accelerator pedal.
After you release the accelerator, the speed drops to
the previously stored value.
Interrupting cruise control
▶
After pressing the brake pedal.
▶
After an ESC intervention.
1)
If no speed limit is set, the current speed is set as the speed limit.
2)
If no speed is set, the current speed is adopted.
123
Driver assist systems › Cruise control system
Troubleshooting
Cruise control system faulty
illuminates
›
Seek the help of a specialist garage.
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
Functionality
Control
ACC maintains the set speed. When your vehicle ap-
proaches the vehicle in front, ACC will automatically
start to maintain the set distance to this vehicle.
Maintaining the set speed and the distance will here-
inafter be referred to as Control.
WARNING
ACC does not respond to stationary objects or to
crossing or oncoming objects.
ACC is intended primarily for use on motorways.
Speed range
Depending on the equipment, ACC allows a speed
setting in the range of 30-160 or 30-210 km/h.
If control is started at a speed of less than 30 km/h
on vehicles with an automatic transmission, the
speed is automatically increased to 30 km/h or con-
trolled according to the speed of the vehicle ahead.
Distance level
The distance from the vehicle ahead can be adjusted
in the range from 1 to 3.6 s in five dierent levels.
Automatic stop and start
A vehicle with an automatic transmission can be de-
celerated to a stop using the ACC and start moving
again. In the event of a long stop, a message will ap-
pear in the display, indicating that you must operate
the brake pedal.
›
Keep the brake pedal depressed until the vehicle in
front starts moving.
If the brake pedal is not depressed, control is inter-
rupted.
Overtaking
If your vehicle changes to the fast lane and no vehi-
cle is detected in front, ACC accelerates up to the
set speed.
Status display in the instrument cluster display
- ACC is activated
Depending on the equipment:
or
along with - Control is active
When the control starts, the set speed is dis-
played.
- ACC does not decelerate
suciently
›
Depress the brake pedal.
Operation
Operating with the lever
Activate ACC (control inactive)
Start or resume control/Increase speed in
steps of 1 km/h (sprung position)
Interrupt control (sprung position)
Deactivate ACC
Increase speed in steps of 10 km/h
Reduce speed in steps of 10 km/h
Set distance level
Start control/Reduce speed in steps of 1
km/h
Starting control with the current speed
›
Tap on .
Or:
›
If no speed is saved, move the lever to the sprung
position
.
Set distance level
›
Move the switch to the sprung position
or .
Line
A
appears in the
display, indicating the
change in distance.
›
Use the switch
to set the desired dis-
tance level.
For temporary acceleration
›
Depress the accelerator pedal.
124
Driver assist systems › Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
The vehicle accelerates and control is temporarily in-
terrupted. Upon releasing the accelerator, control is
resumed.
Interrupting cruise control
▶
After pressing the brake pedal while driving.
▶
By operating the clutch pedal for a long time.
▶
After an ESC intervention.
▶
After deactivation of the ASR.
Resuming control
›
If a speed is stored, move the lever to the sprung
position
.
The vehicle is controlled at the set speed. The set
speed is shown in the instrument cluster display.
Function restriction
WARNING
▶
Be particularly attentive and alert in the following
situations.
Regulation according to the vehicle in the adjacent
lane
If your vehicle is moving faster than the vehicle in
the next lane on the driver's side, at a speed of more
than 80 km/h, this may cause your vehicle to be con-
trolled according to that vehicle.
When cornering
When cornering, a vehicle in the next lane may enter
the detected area. Your vehicle will be controlled ac-
cording to this vehicle.
Narrow or staggered vehicle
ACC detects a narrow or staggered vehicle only
when it is in the area covered by the radar.
Lane change by another vehicle
A vehicle that changes to the lane a short distance
away may not be recognized by the ACC in time.
Stationary vehicle
If a vehicle in front turns and there is a stationary ve-
hicle in front of this vehicle, the ACC will not respond
to the stationary vehicle.
Vehicles with special load or special bodies
A load or superstructure that protrudes outside the
vehicle might not be detected by the ACC.
Settings
In the infotainment system, in menu:
◼
ACC (Automatic cruise control)
▶
Driving programme:
- Setting the vehicle acceleration
when the ACC is switched on (this setting is
made for vehicles with driving mode selec-
tion » page 115)
▶
Last selected distance
- Switch the last selected dis-
tance level on/o
▶
Distance:
- Setting the distance to vehicles in front
Troubleshooting
ACC not available
or is lit up
›
Stop the engine and start again.
›
If ACC is still unavailable, check the brake lights on
the vehicle or on the attached trailer.
›
Replace the defective bulb.
›
If the brake lights are working and ACC is still un-
available, seek the help of a specialist garage.
125
Driver assist systems › Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
Lane Assist
Usage
Lane Assist helps to keep the vehicle within the lane.
It is based on the boundaries of a lane. These may in-
clude lane markings, road edges or objects such as
curbs or possibly trac cones.
The system is intended primarily for use on high-
ways.
Functionality
As the vehicle approaches a lane marking, the sys-
tem executes a steering movement in the opposite
direction from the lane marking. The steering inter-
vention can be overridden manually.
No system intervention occurs when changing lane
with the turn signal on.
Status display in the instrument cluster display
lights up - System is activated and ready to
intervene
lights up - System is activated and ready to
intervene
lights up - System intervenes
lights up - System intervenes
Display
Display example in monochromatic display.
Lane boundary highligh-
ted on the right: system
intervenes on the right
when approaching the
lane marking.
In the coloured display,
the lines are highlighted
in colour.
Warning through steering wheel vibrations
If the steering wheel vibrates, this means the system
is unable to keep the vehicle in the lane.
›
Correct the steering movement.
Operating conditions
✓ The driving speed is higher than 60 km/h.
✓ The lane markings are clearly visible.
Function restriction
The system function may be restricted in the follow-
ing cases.
▶
The field of view of the sensor is limited by a dirty
screen or an obstacle or a preceding vehicle.
▶
In the event of unfavourable weather conditions.
▶
When driving around a sharp bend.
▶
When driving on a steep road or in ruts.
▶
Driving lane too narrow.
WARNING
Danger of incorrect steering intervention!
Certain objects or markings on the road may be erro-
neously recognized as lane markings.
▶
Always keep your hands on the steering wheel and
be prepared to override the steering intervention.
Settings
Activation/deactivation in the instrument cluster
In the display in the
Assist systems
menu item
Setting in Infotainment
In the menu:
Troubleshooting
Message regarding system unavailability
›
Clean the windscreen in the sensor area.
›
Stop the engine and start again.
›
If the system is still not available, seek the help of a
specialist garage.
Lane change assist system Side Assist
Usage
Side Assist monitors the area beside and behind the
vehicle up to a distance of approximately 70 m.
The system uses optical signals in the exterior mirror
to alert the driver to vehicles that could be danger-
ous when changing lanes.
Functionality
The system warns of an approaching vehicle through
the illumination of the indicator light in the exteri-
or mirror cover on the vehicle side where the vehicle
is detected.
126
Driver assist systems › Lane Assist
Driving situations in which a system warning oc-
curs
Your vehicle is overtaken by vehicle
A
. The faster
vehicle
A approaches, the sooner the warning is giv-
en by the indicator light.
Vehicle
B is overtaken by your vehicle at a speed
that is faster by max. 10 km/h. If the speed increases
the overtaking process, no warning will be provided
by the indicator light.
Indicator light
illuminated - There is another vehicle behind your
vehicle
flashing - There is another vehicle behind your ve-
hicle, and the turn signal on the same side is switch-
ed on
For vehicles with Lane Assist, the indicator light will
also flash if your vehicle crosses the lane markings in
the direction of the approaching vehicle. The system
will trigger a steering wheel vibration in this case.
For this, Lane Assist must be activated and the lane
marking between the vehicles must be detected.
Operating conditions
✓ The driving speed is higher than 15 km/h.
✓ No accessories are connected to the trailer sock-
et.
Function restriction
The system cannot detect lane width. For this rea-
son, it may, for example, draw attention to a vehicle
in a distant lane in the following cases.
▶
Driving on a road with narrow lanes or on the lane
edge.
▶
Driving round bends.
The system can draw attention to objects along the
road, such as high guard rails or noise barriers.
The system might not warn of a vehicle e.g. in the
following cases, or a warning may only be issued in-
correctly.
▶
Unfavourable weather conditions.
▶
A very fast approaching vehicle.
▶
When going round a sharp bend or a roundabout.
Settings
The system settings are made in the display of the
instrument cluster in menu item
Assist Systems
.
The system settings are made in the infotainment
system in the following menu.
Troubleshooting
Message regarding system unavailability
›
Stop the engine and start again.
›
If the system is still not available, seek the help of a
specialist garage.
Crew Protect Assist proactive occupant
protection
Usage
The Crew Protect Assist system increases occupant
protection in the front seats if a collision is imminent.
Functionality
The first level of protection
With a dynamic driving style, the system tightens
the front seat belts on the body.
The second level of protection
If the system evaluates the situation as critical:
▶
The front seat belts are tightened on the body.
▶
Open windows are closed except for a small gap.
Settings
Automatic activation
The system is automatically activated when the igni-
tion is switched on.
Deactivation of the first protection level
The first protection level can be deactivated as fol-
lows.
▶
By deactivating the ASR.
▶
By selecting the driving mode Sport.
▶
In Infotainment, in the
menu.
127
Driver assist systems › Crew Protect Assist proactive occupant protection
Troubleshooting
Crew Protect Assist faulty
illuminates
Message concerning unavailability or function-
al restriction
›
Seek the help of a specialist garage.
Driver Alert fatigue detection assistant
Functionality
Driver Alert evaluates the steering behaviour. If it de-
tects fatigue in the driver, a break is recommended.
In the display of the instrument cluster, the lights
up.
WARNING
There will be no system warning during the so-called
micro-sleep.
Resetting the break recommendation
The break recommendation is reset in the following
cases.
▶
The vehicle stops and the ignition is switched o.
▶
The vehicle stops, the seat belt is removed and the
driver's door is opened.
▶
The vehicle stops for more than 15 minutes.
In some situations, the system may erroneously
issue a break recommendation.
Operating conditions
✓ Driving speed between 60-200 km/h.
Settings
Activation/deactivation
In the infotainment system, in menu:
Park Assist systems
Park Pilot parking aid
Functionality
If an obstacle is detected, the Infotainment will dis-
play a visible message and an audible signal will
sound. The interval between the signals becomes
shorter as the clearance is reduced. At a distance of
less than 30 cm from the obstacle, a continuous tone
sounds.
If the driver does not respond to the warning, the
system triggers automatic emergency braking at
speeds below 8 km/h in order to reduce the impact.
Automatic braking can be activated and deactivated
in the infotainment.
Display
The recorded areas vary according to the equipment.
A
Route controlled at the current steering angle
Acoustic signals on/o
One-time deactivation/activation of automatic
braking
Change to the rear view camera display
System fault
Obstacle at a distance of less than 30 cm
Obstacle at a distance of more than 30 cm
Obstacle outside the route
Operating conditions
✓ The driving speed is lower than 15 km/h.
✓ No accessories are connected to the trailer sock-
et.
Operation
Switching on
›
Engage reverse gear.
Or:
128
Park Assist systems › Driver Alert fatigue detection assistant
›
Press the button.
Automatic switch-on during forward travel
When approaching an obstacle at a speed of less
than 10 km/h.
Automatic switch-on does not activate automatic
braking.
Switching o
›
Disengage reverse gear.
Or:
›
Press the
button.
Automatic switch o
The driving speed is higher than 15 km/h.
Function restriction
The system might not warn of an obstacle e.g. in the
following cases, or a warning may only be issued in-
correctly.
▶
Unfavourable weather conditions.
▶
The detected obstacles are moving.
▶
Sensor signals are not reflected by the surface of
the obstacles.
▶
It is a small obstacle, e.g. a stone or a pillar.
Settings
The system settings are made in the infotainment
system in the following menu.
Or:
Troubleshooting
After switching on, an audible signal sounds for 3
seconds and there is no obstacle near the vehicle
›
Seek the help of a specialist garage.
After switching on, the symbol flashes in the
button
›
Seek the help of a specialist garage.
After switching on, not all scanned areas are dis-
played on the Infotainment screen
›
Move the vehicle a few meters forwards or back-
wards.
›
If the scanned areas are still not displayed, seek the
help of a specialist garage.
Rear view camera
Functionality
When reversing, the area behind the vehicle is dis-
played in the Infotainment screen complete with ori-
entation lines.
The camera is equipped with a cleaning system.
Cleaning takes place automatically when the rear
window is washed.
Orientation lines and functional surfaces
Orientation lines
A
Distance about 40 cm
B
Distance about 100 cm
C
Distance about 200 cm
The distance between the side lines corresponds ap-
proximately to the vehicle width including mirrors.
Function surfaces
Brightness, contrast and colour settings of the
screen
Turns o the display of the area behind the vehi-
cle
Switching audible parking signals on/o
One-time deactivation/activation of automatic
braking
Park Pilot full screen view.
Operating conditions
✓ The luggage compartment lid is closed.
129
Park Assist systems › Rear view camera
✓ The ignition is switched on.
✓ The driving speed is lower than 15 km/h.
Operation
Switching on
›
Engage reverse gear.
Switching o
›
Disengage reverse gear.
Restriction
The camera image is distorted in contrast to the nak-
ed eye. The display may only be used to estimate the
distance.
Some items may not be displayed properly on the
screen. These include narrow columns, wire mesh
fences, grids or road bumps.
Rear Trac Alert
Functionality
When reversing, the
Rear Trac Alert warns
of approaching vehicles.
If the driver does not re-
spond to the warning,
the vehicle is braked au-
tomatically at a speed
below 10 km/h.
WARNING
When the ESC/ASR system is deactivated, automat-
ic braking is not performed.
Vehicle with Park Pilot
If an approaching vehicle is detected in the area be-
hind your vehicle, a graphical warning is displayed in
the Infotainment. At the same time, a continuous
tone sounds.
Vehicle in collision area - danger of collision!
Approaching vehicle
Vehicle without Park Pilot
If an approaching vehicle is detected in the area be-
hind your vehicle, the a warning is displayed in the in-
strument cluster display, indicating to the driver to
monitor the trac behind. At the same time, an
acoustic signal sounds.
Operating conditions
✓ ASR activated.
✓ No accessories are connected to the trailer sock-
et.
Function restriction
Manoeuvre Assist’s functionality may be limited in
unfavourable weather conditions.
Settings
The system is activated or deactivated in the instru-
ment cluster display in the
Assist systems
menu item.
The system is activated or deactivated in the follow-
ing menu in the Infotainment system.
Or:
Troubleshooting
Message regarding system unavailability
›
Stop the engine and start again.
›
If the system is still not available, seek the help of a
specialist garage.
Park steering assistant
Usage
Park Assist helps drivers park in parallel and perpen-
dicular parking places and to manoeuvre out of par-
allel parking spaces.
What you should be mindful of
Do not use the system in the following cases.
▶
On unpaved or slippery surfaces.
▶
If snow chains or a spare wheel are mounted on
the vehicle.
▶
If the system chooses an inappropriate parking
space for parking.
130
Park Assist systems › Rear Trac Alert
Functionality
The system looks for a parking space and only takes
over the steering during the parking procedure or
when leaving a parking place. The driver operates the
pedals and the shift lever/gear selector.
The system displays information and notes on the in-
strument cluster display.
If the system detects a risk of collision, automatic
emergency braking takes place to prevent a collision.
Operating conditions
✓ The driving speed is lower than 7 km/h.
✓ The ASR is activated and there is no intervention.
✓ There is no driver intervention in the automatic
steering operation.
✓ No accessories are connected to the trailer sock-
et.
Operation
Turn on/turn o
›
Press the
button.
When the system is switched on, the symbol lights
up in the button
.
Select the lane side for the parking procedure
The system automatically searches for a suitable
parking space on the passenger side.
›
Press the driver's side indicator to find a parking
space on this side of the road.
Operation while searching for a parking space
›
Drive past a number of parked vehicles at a dis-
tance of 0.5–1.5 m.
›
To search for a parking space across the road, drive
slower than 20 km/h.
›
To search for a parking space along the road, drive
slower than 40 km/h.
If the symbol
(km/h) appears in the display, reduce
the driving speed. If the system finds a parking
space, the display will show the recommended park-
ing mode.
Changing the parking mode
If a suitable parking space is found, the following
Park modes can be shown in the display.
Park backwards longitudinally
Park backwards crosswise
Park forwards across
The parking mode can be changed by pressing the
button .
Press the button again and the system is switch-
ed o.
›
To return to the original recommended parking
mode, press the button again.
Before the parking process
›
If a suitable parking space is found, stop and drive
backwards or forwards as indicated by the arrow in
the display.
›
When a steering intervention message is displayed,
release the steering wheel. The steering operation
is taken over by the system.
Parking operation
CAUTION
Risk of injury!
▶
Do not reach between the steering wheel spokes
during the parking manoeuvre.
▶
Only operate the pedals and the shift / selector
lever.
›
Observe the area around the vehicle and drive
backwards or forwards in accordance with the ar-
row in the display.
›
As soon as the symbol
appears in the display
and an audible signal sounds, stop the vehicle. The
steering wheel is taken over accordingly. The sym-
bol
goes out.
›
Travel backwards or forwards in accordance with
the arrow in the display.
As soon as the parking process is completed, the
corresponding message is displayed and an audible
signal sounds.
The parking procedure can be ended at any time by
pressing the button
.
When partially parked in a suitable transverse
parking space forward, press button . The parking
process is completed by the system.
131
Park Assist systems › Park steering assistant
Exiting a parking space
›
Press the button.
When the system is switched on, the symbol lights
up in the button
.
›
Follow the instructions on the screen.
Automatic speed reduction
If a speed of 7 km/h is exceeded during the parking
process, the system will reduce the speed.
Upon the speed being exceeded by 7 km/h a second
time, the parking process is terminated.
Function restriction
If the parking space is too small, it is not possible to
use the system to initiate a parking manoeuvre. A
message is shown on the instrument cluster display.
Troubleshooting
Message regarding system unavailability
›
Stop the engine and start again.
›
If the system is still not available, seek the help of a
specialist garage.
Incorrect resulting position of the vehicle in the
parking space
The correct parking procedure depends on the size
of the wheels. If other wheels approved by ŠKODA
AUTO are fitted, have the system readjusted by a
specialist garage.
Engine, exhaust system and fuel
Bonnet
Opening the bonnet
Before opening
›
Make sure the windscreen wiper arms are folded
down onto the windscreen.
›
Keep everyone away from the engine compart-
ment.
To open
›
Pull the release lever
underneath the dash
panel.
›
Release the lock.
›
Open the bonnet.
›
Remove the bonnet
stay from the holder
and insert the end of
the stay into the open-
ing in the bonnet.
Closing
›
Lift the bonnet.
›
Unhook the bonnet stay and insert it into the hold-
er.
›
Fold the bonnet down and release it with a dis-
tance of 30 cm remaining.
›
Check that the bonnet is closed.
NOTICE
▶
Do not press down on an unclosed bonnet.
132
Engine, exhaust system and fuel › Bonnet
Engine oil
Checking the fill level and topping up
Test conditions
✓ Park the vehicle on a horizontal surface.
✓ The parked engine is warm.
Checking the level
›
Wait a few minutes for the engine oil to flow back
into the oil sump.
›
Remove the dipstick and wipe with a clean cloth.
›
Insert the dipstick as far as it will go and pull it out
again.
›
Read the oil level and push the dipstick back in
again.
The oil level must be within the marked range.
NOTICE
Risk of damage to the engine and the exhaust sys-
tem!
▶
The oil level must not be outside the marked range.
If it is not possible to top up the engine oil or if the
oil level is above the marked range, do not continue
driving. Stop the engine and seek the help of a spe-
cialist garage.
▶
Do not use any oil additives.
Depending on driving style and operating conditions,
the engine consumes some oil, up to 0.5 l/1000 km.
Consumption may be higher over the next 5000 km.
Refilling
›
Unscrew the cover of the engine oil filler opening.
›
Top up the oil to the correct specification in 0.5 li-
tre portions.
›
Check the oil level.
›
Screw on the cover of the engine oil filler opening.
Specification
Ask a specialist garage for the correct engine oil
specification for your vehicle.
If no oil of the correct specification is available, max.
0.5 l of oil with the following specifications may be
used until the next oil change.
▶
Petrol engines: VW 504 00, VW 508 00,
ACEA C3, ACEA C5.
▶
Diesel engines: VW 507 00, ACEA C3 or API CJ-4.
For vehicles without a particulate filter, VW 505 01
can be optionally used.
Changing
Have the oil changed by a specialist garage.
Troubleshooting
Engine oil pressure too low
or flashes
›
Check the engine oil level.
The oil level is OK, the warning light continues to
flash:
›
Stop the engine and seek the help of a specialist
garage.
Engine oil level too low
or
illuminates
Message regarding required engine oil top up
›
Check the engine oil level, top up with oil if re-
quired.
Engine oil level too high
or illuminates
Message regarding the need to reduce the
engine oil level
›
Check the engine oil level.
The oil level is too high:
›
Drive on, exercising appropriate caution.
›
Seek the help of a specialist garage.
Engine oil level sensor impaired
or
illuminates
Message regarding the engine oil sensor
›
Drive on, exercising appropriate caution.
›
Seek the help of a specialist garage.
Coolant
Coolant temperature gauge
A
Cold area
133
Engine, exhaust system and fuel › Engine oil
›
Avoid high engine speed.
B
Operating range
C
High temperature range
Checking the fill level and topping up
Test conditions
✓ Park the vehicle on a horizontal surface.
✓ The engine is turned o and cooled.
Checking the level
The fill level must be
within the marked range.
›
If the fill level is below
the mark
, top up
the coolant.
NOTICE
Danger of damage to the engine compartment!
Do not top up the coolant above the marked area.
The coolant could be forced out of the cooling sys-
tem when heated.
NOTICE
There must be a small quantity of coolant in the tank.
Do not add coolant when the tank is empty.
▶
Stop driving! Seek the help of a specialist garage.
Refilling
CAUTION
Risk of scalding!
The cooling system is pressurised. Do not open the
cap of the coolant expansion tank while the engine is
warm. Let the engine cool down.
›
Place a rag on the lid of the tank and carefully un-
screw the lid.
›
Refill with coolant of the correct specification.
›
Screw on the cap until it clicks into place.
Specification
For refilling, use coolant additive G12evo (TL 774 L)
or G13 (TL 774 J).
NOTICE
Risk of damage to the cooling system and the en-
gine!
Adding coolant that does not conform to the correct
specification can reduce the corrosion protection of
the cooling system.
Troubleshooting
Coolant level is too low
or illuminates
Message concerning the required coolant
check
›
Check the coolant level.
The coolant level is OK:
›
Check the fuse for radiator fan, replace if re-
quired » page 141, Replacing a fuse.
The fuse is OK, the indicator light comes on again:
›
Stop driving! Seek the help of a specialist garage.
Coolant temperature too high
or
illuminates
Report regarding the engine overheating
›
Stop driving.
›
Stop the engine and allow it to cool.
›
Drive on after the indicator light goes out.
Engine fault
or lights up.
›
Stop driving!
›
Stop the engine and seek the help of a specialist
garage.
There is no coolant of the correct specification
available
›
Top up with distilled or demineralised water.
›
Have the correct coolant mixing ratio corrected by
a specialist garage as soon as possible.
Another substance was used for topping up, other
than distilled or demineralised water:
›
Have the coolant changed by a specialist garage.
It is not possible to top up with a sucient amount
of coolant
›
Stop driving.
›
Stop the engine and seek the help of a specialist
garage.
There is a loss of coolant
›
Top up the coolant and seek the help of a specialist
garage.
Engine electronics
Troubleshooting
Petrol engine control faulty
illuminates
Driving in emergency mode is possible - a
noticeable reduction in engine performance may oc-
cur.
134
Engine, exhaust system and fuel › Engine electronics
›
Continue driving, exercising appropriate caution,
and seek the help of a specialist garage.
Diesel engine control faulty
flashing
Driving in emergency mode is possible - a noticeable
reduction in engine performance may occur.
›
Continue driving, exercising appropriate caution,
and seek the help of a specialist garage.
Diesel preheating system faulty
illuminates, or does not illuminate after the
ignition is switched on
Driving in emergency mode is possible - a noticeable
reduction in engine performance may occur.
›
Continue driving, exercising appropriate caution,
and seek the help of a specialist garage.
Particle filter
Troubleshooting
Clogged particle filter
or
illuminates
›
Clean the filter.
When the indicator light is on, it must be as-
sumed that fuel consumption will be higher, engine
power will be reduced, and the START-STOP func-
tion will not be available.
Filter cleaning
Conditions for cleaning
✓ The engine is warm.
Procedure for vehicles with diesel engines
›
Drive at a speed of at least 60 km/h at engine
speeds of at least 2000 rpm.
If the filter is successfully cleaned, the indicator light
goes o.
If the indicator light does not go o within 40
minutes, no filter cleaning was performed.
›
Continue driving, exercising appropriate caution,
and seek the help of a specialist garage.
Procedure for vehicles with petrol engines
›
Drive at a speed of at least 80 km/h at engine
speeds between 3000-5000 rpm.
›
Release the accelerator pedal and let the vehicle
roll with the gear engaged for a few seconds.
›
Repeat this procedure several times.
If the filter is successfully cleaned, the indicator light
goes o.
If the indicator light
does not go o within 30
minutes, no filter cleaning was performed.
›
Continue driving, exercising appropriate caution,
and seek the help of a specialist garage.
Exhaust control system
Troubleshooting
Emission control system faulty
illuminates
Driving in emergency mode is possible - a no-
ticeable reduction in engine performance may occur.
›
Continue driving, exercising appropriate caution,
and seek the help of a specialist garage.
Fuel filter
Troubleshooting
Water in the diesel fuel filter
or illuminates
›
Continue driving, exercising appropriate caution,
and seek the help of a specialist garage.
Fuel filler flap
Opening the fuel filler flap
›
Press the flap and open
it.
AdBlue
Regulations
Only use AdBlue
®
that complies with the ISO 22241-1
standard. Do not mix any additives to the AdBlue
®
.
AdBlue
®
is a registered trademark of VDA and is also
known as OFF 32 (Aqueous Urea Solution) or DEF
(Diesel Exhaust Fluid).
135
Engine, exhaust system and fuel › Particle filter
Functionality
In order to reduce pollutant emissions, a urea solu-
tion is automatically injected into the exhaust system
- AdBlue
®
.
AdBlue
®
freezes at temperatures below - 11 C. Sys-
tem function is ensured by an automatic heating sys-
tem.
Checking the fill level and topping up
Checking the level
The AdBlue
®
level is automatically monitored.
The range with the existing AdBlue
®
tank fill level as
well as the indication of the minimum and maximum
AdBlue
®
top up quantity can be displayed in the driv-
ing data in the instrument cluster display.
If the range with the existing AdBlue
®
tank filling level
drops to 0 km, it is not possible to start the engine.
›
If possible, top up AdBlue
®
to the maximum level.
Requirements for refilling
✓ Vehicle unlocked.
✓ Ignition switched o.
✓ Park the vehicle on a horizontal surface.
Methods of refilling
▶
With the fuel nozzle at the gas station.
▶
With the refill bottle.
▶
At a specialist garage.
We recommend refilling with a refill bottle, using re-
fill bottles from the ŠKODA Genuine Parts. These are
equipped with an overfill protection.
Refilling
›
Open the tank flap.
›
Turn the tank cap in
the direction of the ar-
row and remove it.
›
Place the tank cap on
the tank flap.
›
Top up AdBlue
®
.
The AdBlue
®
tank is full
when the fuel nozzle
switches o or as soon
as no more AdBlue
®
flows out of the refill bottle. Do not continue refilling.
›
Place the tank cap on the filler neck and turn it in
the opposite direction to the arrow until it clicks
into place.
›
Close the tank flap and click into place.
›
Before starting the engine, leave the ignition on for
30 seconds to allow the system to detect the refill-
ing.
NOTICE
Risk of damage to the AdBlue
®
system!
▶
Do not exceed the maximum refill quantity speci-
fied in the instrument cluster.
▶
The service life of AdBlue
®
is 4 years. If the tank
contents are not consumed within this period, have
them replaced by a specialist garage. For refilling,
do not use any AdBlue
®
which has passed its expiry
date.
Troubleshooting
AdBlue
®
level too low
or or lights up.
›
Top up AdBlue
®
.
AdBlue
®
system impaired.
or or lights up
›
Seek the help of a specialist garage.
Technical data
The AdBlue
®
tank capacity is approximately 12 litres.
Petrol
What you should be mindful of
DANGER
Risk of death!
Fuel and fuel vapours are explosive.
NOTICE
Risk of damage to the engine and the exhaust sys-
tem!
›
Never empty the fuel tank completely!
If you would like to operate your vehicle in a country
other than that intended for vehicle operation,
please contact a ŠKODA Partner. They will let you
know whether a suitable fuel is oered in the associ-
ated country.
Regulations
Standards
Petrol must comply with European standard EN 228
(in Russia, GOST 32513-2013).
Only use unleaded petrol that contains max 10% bi-
oethanol (E10).
We recommend using petrol with additives,
which is available at petrol stations at the petrol
pumps.
136
Engine, exhaust system and fuel › Petrol
Octane number
Use the petrol with the octane number prescribed
for your vehicle.
Petrol with an octane number that is one higher than
the one prescribed for your vehicle can be used
without restriction.
NOTICE
Risk of damage to the engine and the exhaust sys-
tem!
▶
If petrol is used that has an octane number that is
lower than the one prescribed for your vehicle,
then drive at moderate speeds with minimal engine
stress.
▶
Fill up with the prescribed octane number as soon
as possible.
▶
Do not use petrol with an octane number that low-
er than 91!
Prescribed petrol 95 / min. 92 or 93 RON / ROZ
We recommend using95 RON petrol.
92 or. 93 RON petrol may be used as an option (low
power loss, slightly increased fuel consumption).
In an emergency, 91 RON petrol may be used (low
power loss, slightly increased fuel consumption).
Prescribed petrol min. 95 RON / ROZ
Use min. 95 petrol.
Using higher octane petrol than 95 RON may result
in improved performance and lower fuel consump-
tion.
In an emergency 91. 92 or. 93 RON may be used
(low power loss, slightly increased fuel consump-
tion).
Prescribed petrol 98 / (95) RON / ROZ
We recommend using98 RON petrol.
95 RON petrol may be used as an option (low power
loss, slightly increased fuel consumption).
In an emergency 91. 92 or. 93 RON may be used
(low power loss, slightly increased fuel consump-
tion).
Additive
NOTICE
Risk of damage to the engine and the exhaust sys-
tem!
▶
Do not use petrol containing metal-based addi-
tives, e.g. manganese, iron, lead, and do not use, for
example, any LRP petrol – lead replacement petrol.
▶
Do not add any additional additives to the petrol in
accordance with EN 228.
▶
If petrol is not used in accordance with EN 228, we
recommend obtaining information from a specialist
company regarding the possible use of petrol addi-
tives approved by ŠKODA AUTO.
Requirements for refuelling
✓ Vehicle unlocked.
✓ Ignition switched o.
Refilling
Refilling
›
Open the tank flap.
›
Turn the tank cap in
the direction of the ar-
row and remove it.
›
Place the tank cap on
the tank flap.
›
Insert the fuel nozzle
into the fuel filler neck
up to the stop and re-
fuel.
›
Do not continue refuel-
ling after the fuel noz-
zle switches o.
›
Remove the fuel nozzle and put it back on the pet-
rol pump.
›
Place the fuel cap on the fuel filler neck and turn it
in the opposite direction to the arrow until it clicks
into place.
›
Close the tank flap and click into place.
Troubleshooting
If fuel other than unleaded petrol has been refuel-
led according to the standards applicable to your
vehicle
›
Do not start the engine or switch on the ignition.
›
Seek the help of a specialist garage.
Technical data
The fuel prescribed for your vehicle is indicated on a
sticker on the inside of the fuel filler flap.
A
Unleaded petrol
B
Organic share as a
percentage
The fuel tank has a capacity of about 50 litres, in-
cluding a reserve of approx. 7 litres.
The fuel supply has reached the reserve area.
137
Engine, exhaust system and fuel › Petrol
Diesel
What you should be mindful of
DANGER
Risk of death!
Fuel and fuel vapours are explosive.
NOTICE
Risk of damage to the engine and the exhaust sys-
tem!
›
Never empty the fuel tank completely!
If you would like to operate your vehicle in a country
other than that intended for vehicle operation,
please contact a ŠKODA Partner. They will let you
know whether a suitable fuel is oered in the associ-
ated country.
Regulations
Standards
The diesel fuel must comply with European standard
EN 590 (in Russia, GOST 32511-2013 or GOST R
55475-2013).
Only use a diesel fuel that contains a maximum of 7
% biodiesel (B7).
We recommend using diesel with additives,
which is available at petrol stations at the petrol
pumps.
Operation in dierent weather conditions
Only use a diesel fuel according to the current or the
expected weather conditions.
Additive
NOTICE
Risk of damage to the engine and the exhaust sys-
tem!
▶
Do not use RME biofuel, even as a diesel fuel addi-
tive.
▶
Do not add any additional additives to the diesel in
accordance with EN 590.
▶
If diesel is not used in accordance with EN 590, we
recommend obtaining information from a specialist
company regarding the possible use of diesel addi-
tives approved by ŠKODA AUTO.
Requirements for refuelling
✓ Vehicle unlocked.
✓ Ignition switched o.
Refilling
Misfuelling protection
The fuel filler neck on diesel vehicles may be equip-
ped with a misfuelling protection device.
In some countries, the diameter of the diesel fuel
nozzle may be identical to that of the petrol nozzle.
Before driving in these countries, have the protec-
tion device removed by a specialist garage.
Refilling
›
Open the tank flap.
›
Turn the tank cap in
the direction of the ar-
row and remove it.
›
Place the tank cap on
the tank flap.
›
Insert the fuel nozzle
into the fuel filler neck
up to the stop and re-
fuel.
›
Do not continue refuel-
ling after the fuel noz-
zle switches o.
›
Remove the fuel nozzle and put it back on the pet-
rol pump.
›
Place the fuel cap on the fuel filler neck and turn it
in the opposite direction to the arrow until it clicks
into place.
›
Close the tank flap and click into place.
Troubleshooting
If a fuel other than diesel fuel has been refuelled to
the appropriate standard
›
Do not start the engine or switch on the ignition.
›
Seek the help of a specialist garage.
The diesel fuel nozzle cannot be correctly inserted
into the filler neck
›
If the fuel nozzle cannot be properly inserted into
the fuel filler neck, move it slightly back and forth
when inserting it.
Technical data
The fuel prescribed for your vehicle is indicated on a
sticker on the inside of the fuel filler flap.
A
Diesel
B
Organic share as a
percentage
The fuel tank has a capacity of about 50 litres, in-
cluding a reserve of approx. 7 litres.
138
Engine, exhaust system and fuel › Diesel
The fuel supply has reached the reserve area.
Vehicle battery and fuses
Vehicle battery
Functionality - Discharge protection
Possible causes of battery discharge
▶
Frequent short-distance trac.
▶
Low temperatures.
▶
Vehicle stationary for a long period of time.
System-related discharge protection measures
▶
Increasing the engine idling speed.
▶
Switching o certain consumers or limiting their
power.
Measures to be taken when vehicle stationary for
more than three weeks
›
Disconnect the
terminal of the vehicle battery.
Checking and charging the vehicle battery
Checking the condition
The battery condition is checked by a specialist ga-
rage during servicing.
Checking the acid level
Applies to a vehicle battery with an acid level indica-
tor.
›
Tap on the indicator
before testing, to clear
air bubbles.
Black colour - the acid level is OK.
Colourless or pale yellow colour - acid level is too
low, the battery must be replaced.
Requirements for the charging process
✓ Ignition switched o.
✓ Power consumers switched o.
Vehicle battery charging process
To charge the vehicle battery fully, set a charging
current of max. of 0.1 times the battery capacity.
139
Vehicle battery and fuses › Vehicle battery
›
Connect the termi-
nal of the charger to
the terminal of the
vehicle battery.
›
Connect the
termi-
nal of the charger to
the earth point
A .
›
Plug the charger's
power cable into the
socket and switch on
the device.
›
After charging, switch o the charger and unplug
the power cable from the socket.
›
Disconnect the charger terminals from the vehicle
battery.
WARNING
Risk of explosion!
▶
During charging, hydrogen is released. An explo-
sion can also be caused by sparks, for example,
when disconnecting or loosening the cable con-
nector.
▶
Never charge a frozen or thawed vehicle battery.
▶
Do not carry out the so-called quick charging of
the vehicle battery yourself, but have it carried out
by a specialist garage.
NOTICE
A discharged vehicle battery can freeze easily.
Troubleshooting
Vehicle battery does not charge while the engine is
running
or
is lit up
›
Seek the help of a specialist garage.
Engine fault
or is lit up
›
Stop driving!
›
Stop the engine and seek the help of a specialist
garage.
Disconnecting, connecting and replacing
CAUTION
Risk of fire!
▶
Do not mix up the connection cables.
Disconnecting
›
Close the electric boot lid, all windows and the
electric sunblind.
›
Switch o the ignition and any connected power
consumers.
›
Disconnect the
terminal and then the termi-
nal.
Earth point
Connecting
›
Connect the terminal and then the terminal.
After switching on the ignition, the warning lights
are lit up.
.
›
If, after a short distance, one of the above-men-
tioned indicator lights does not go out, seek the
help of a specialist garage.
Commission these functions after disconnecting
and connecting the vehicle battery
▶
Clock setting » page 48.
▶
Window operation » page 25.
▶
Sunblind » page 25.
Changing
The new vehicle battery must have the same param-
eters as the original battery. Have the replacement
carried out by a specialist garage.
Using the jump-starting cable
What you should be mindful of
WARNING
Risk of explosion and chemical burns!
▶
Do not jump start with the battery of another vehi-
cle under the following conditions.
▶
The discharged vehicle battery is frozen. A dis-
charged vehicle battery can freeze at tempera-
tures just below 0°C.
▶
The battery acid level is too low » page 139.
Use jump leads with a sucient cross section and in-
sulated terminal clamps.
The rated voltage of both batteries must be 12V. The
capacity (in Ah) of the charging battery must not be
significantly lower than the capacity of the dis-
charged battery.
Jump-starting with the battery of another
vehicle
WARNING
Risk of injury and danger of vehicle damage!
▶
Lay the jump start cables so that they cannot be-
come caught by rotating parts in the engine com-
partment.
NOTICE
Short circuit!
▶
The non-insulated parts of the terminal clamps
must not touch each other.
▶
The cable connected to the positive pole of the
battery must not come into contact with electri-
cally conductive vehicle parts.
▶
The vehicles must not touch each other.
140
Vehicle battery and fuses › Using the jump-starting cable
Start the engine
›
Connect the terminal clamps of the jump start ca-
bles in the order shown in the legend.
1
pole of the flat battery.
2
pole of the current-giving battery.
3
pole of the current-giving battery.
4
Earth point of the engine to be started.
›
Start the engine of the
current-giving vehicle
and let it idle.
›
Start the engine of the
vehicle with the flat
battery.
›
If the engine of the ve-
hicle with the dis-
charged battery does
not start within 10 sec-
onds, repeat the start-
ing procedure after ap-
proximately 30 seconds.
Disconnecting the cable
›
Disconnect the cables in the reverse order from
connection.
Fuses
What you should be mindful of
NOTICE
Fire hazard and risk of damage to the electrical sys-
tem.
▶
Do not repair fuses or replace them with stronger
fuses.
▶
Replace the defective fuse with a new fuse with
the same amperage.
▶
We recommend using replacement fuses from the
ŠKODA Genuine Accessories range. These guaran-
tee reliable and safe consumer protection.
▶
If a newly inserted fuse blows again, seek the help
of a specialist garage.
One fuse may belong to several consumers. One
consumer may have several fuses.
Earth point
Functionality
Blown fuse
Conditions for the replacing a fuse
✓ Ignition key removed (vehicle without starter
button).
✓ Ignition switched o and driver's door open (vehi-
cle with starter button).
✓ All consumers switched o.
Replacing a fuse
›
Replace the fuse with
the clamp located on
the inside of the fuse
box cover in the engine
compartment.
›
Use the appropriate
end of the clamp ac-
cording to the fuse di-
mensions.
Fuses in the dash panel
Overview
Access to the fuses
›
Open the storage compartment on the driver's
side.
›
Press the button and
open the tray.
›
Pull the tray out by
pulling it towards you.
›
Change the fuse.
›
Insert and close the
tray at the original lo-
cation.
141
Vehicle battery and fuses › Fuses
Fuses overview
Fuse
number
Consumer
1 Tow hitch
2 LED headlights - left side
3 Music amplifier
4 Headlight washers
5 Tilting/sliding sunroof
6 Central locking, windscreen washer,
rear window wiper
7 Seat heating - rear
8 Climatronic
9 LED headlights - right side
10 Tow hitch
11 Electric boot lid
12 Heated steering wheel
13 Light switch, diagnosis connection, rain
sensor, control lever under the steering
wheel, front windscreen heating
14 Windscreen washer system
15 Instrument cluster, emergency call
16 Light - right side
17 Electric windows - right side
18 Windscreen wiper
19 Infotainment
20 Heated rear window
21
SCR (AdBlue
®
)
22 Not used
23 Reversing camera
24 Phonebox, GSM antenna, USB connec-
tion, Infotainment screen
25 Control lever under the steering wheel
26 Databus
27 Shock absorber adjustment (adaptive
suspension)
Fuse
number
Consumer
28 Alarm system sensor
29 Alarm system horn
30 Ignition (ignition lock)
31 Air conditioning, heating
32 Passenger belt tensioners
33 Electric windows - left side
34 Driver belt tensioners
35 Light - left side
36 Horn
37 Heating of the front seats
38 Interior lighting, button lighting, head-
light cleaning system, ambient lighting,
manual air conditioning, heating
39 Assist systems
40 Light switch, headlights, headlight level-
ling, diagnostic connection, reversing
light switch, control lever under the
steering wheel
41 Interior mirror dimming, exterior mirror
adjustment
42 Clutch pedal switch, engine start, air
conditioning
43 Rear window wiper
44 Airbag system, airbag control lamp
45 Windscreen wiper
46 Seat heating - rear
47 Not used
48 Electric steering column lock, Kessy
(keyless lock and start system)
49
SCR (AdBlue
®
)
50 USB connections at the back
51 Not used
52 Cigarette lighter / 12 volt socket in front
53 Ignition key trigger lock, automatic
transmission
54 12 volt socket in the luggage compart-
ment
55 Not used
56 Manual air conditioning, heating
57 Not used
58 Windscreen washer system
59 Exterior mirror heating, washer nozzle
heating
60 Tow hitch
61 Tow hitch
142
Vehicle battery and fuses › Fuses in the dash panel
Fuses in the engine compartment
Overview
Access to the fuses
›
Simultaneously press
the locking buttons on
the fuse box cover and
remove the cover.
›
Change the fuse.
›
Fit the cover and click
into place.
NOTICE
Danger of water entering the fuse box.
▶
Fit the cover correctly and click into place secure-
ly.
Fuses overview
Fuse
number
Consumer
1 Engine control unit
2 Exhaust flap, coolant pump, radiator
blinds, SCR (AdBlue
®
), engine compo-
nents
3 Lambda sensors, NOx control unit
4 Fuel pump, engine components
5 Radiator fan, boost pressure regulator,
oil level and oil temperature sensor, en-
gine components
6 Crankcase breather, glow plug system,
engine components
7 Brake system (vacuum pump)
8 Fuel pump, engine components
9 Brake light switch
10 Databus, BCM controller, battery data
module
11 Not used
12 Air Conditioning
13 Not used
14 ESC, engine control system, engine
components
Fuse
number
Consumer
15 Automatic gearbox
16 Not used
17 Engine control system
18 Starter
19 Not used
20 ESC
21 ESC
22 Not used
23 Not used
24 Not used
25 Electric auxiliary heater, radiator fan
27 Electric auxiliary heater, radiator fan
28 Electric auxiliary heater
29 Heated windscreen
143
Vehicle battery and fuses › Fuses in the engine compartment
Wheels
Tyres and rims
What you should be mindful of
NOTICE
▶
Protect tyres from contact with lubricants and
fuel.
▶
Always store wheels or tyres in a cool, dry and,
where possible, dark place. Tyres without rims
should be stored in an upright position.
▶
Alloy rims can be damaged by grit.
Causes of uneven tyre wear
▶
Improper tyre pressure.
▶
Driving style (e.g. fast cornering, rapid acceleration
and deceleration).
▶
Wheel alignment error.
▶
Incorrect wheel balancing.
Wheel changes
For uniform wear on all
tyres, we recommend
that you change the
wheels every 10,000 km
according to the sched-
ule.
Advice for tyre assembly
›
Follow the specified running direction, otherwise
the driving characteristics may be impaired. The di-
rection of rotation of the tyres is marked by ar-
rows on the wall of the tyre.
›
Always replace the tyres by the axle.
Additional information
Only fit radial tyres of the same type, size (rolling cir-
cumference) and the same tread pattern on one axle.
Approved tyre sizes are specified in the technical ve-
hicle documentation and in the declaration of con-
formity (in the so-called COCDocument).
The declaration of conformity can be obtained from
a ŠKODA Partner (valid for some countries and some
models).
Overview of tyre labelling
Explanation of tyre markings
e.g. 205/60 R 16 92 H
Tyre width in mm
Height/width ratio in %
Code letter for the type of tyre - Radial
Diameter of wheel in inches
load index
Speed symbol
205
60
R
16
92
H
load index
The load index indicates the maximum permissible
load for each individual tyre.
560 kg
580 kg
600 kg
615 kg
630 kg
650 kg
670 kg
690 kg
Speed symbol
The speed symbol indicates the maximum permissi-
ble speed for a vehicle fitted with tyres in the cate-
gory concerned.
180 km/h
190 km/h
200 km/h
210 km/h
240 km/h
270 km/h
300 km/h
WARNING
▶
Do not exceed the maximum permissible load bear-
ing capacity and speed for the tyres fitted.
Tread wear indicators
Wear indicators are loca-
ted in the profile of the
tyres that display the
permissible minimum
tread depth.
Markings on the walls of
the tyres with the letters
“TWI” or other symbols
(e.g.
) indicate the po-
sition of the wear indica-
tors.
A tyre is to be regarded as worn out when this wear
indicator is flush with the tread.
The tread depth can be measured using a tread
depth gauge on the ice scraper. The ice scraper is lo-
cated on the inside of the fuel filler flap.
WARNING
Risk of an accident!
▶
Do not use worn tyres.
Tyre manufacturing date
The date of manufacture is indicated on the tyre
sidewall.
For example, DOT ... 10 19 means that the tyres were
produced in the 10th week of the year 2019.
WARNING
Risk of an accident!
▶
Do not use tyres that are older than 6 years.
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
S
T
U
H
V
W
Y
144
Wheels › Tyres and rims
Troubleshooting
Help with a flat tyre
▶
Spare and emergency spare wheel » page 145.
▶
Changing the wheel and raising the vehicle.
▶
Breakdown kit » page 147.
Change of tyre pressure
Change of tyre pressure
›
Stop the vehicle.
›
Check the tyres and tyre pressures.
The tyre highlighted by the system can be seen in
the infotainment in the following menu item.
Vehicle status
Or:
Vehicle status
All-season or winter tires
Usage
All-season (or "winter") tyres improve handling in
winter weather conditions. They are characterised
by ‘M+S’ and a mountaintop and snowflake symbol
.
What you should be mindful of
For the best possible handling, use tyres on all four
wheels with a minimum tread depth of 4 mm.
Change winter tyres to summer tyres at the appro-
priate time. Summer tyres have better driving and
braking characteristics on snow- and ice-free roads
and at temperatures above 7 °C.
Usage conditions
If all-season tyres are installed that have a lower
speed category than the actual specified maximum
vehicle speed, then proceed as follows.
›
In infotainment, set the speed limit according to
the category of tyres fitted.
›
In the driver's field of view, ax a warning label
with the maximum value of the speed category in-
tended for the tyres fitted (applies only to certain
countries).
Settings
The speed limit setting for tyres is set in the infotain-
ment in the following menu item.
Or:
Snow chains
Usage
The snow chains improve driving in wintry road con-
ditions.
WARNING
Risk of accident as well as tyre damage!
▶
Do not use chains on routes that are free from
snow and ice.
What you should be mindful of
›
Before fitting the snow chains, remove the full
wheel trims.
›
Only mount the snow chains on the front wheels.
Technical data
Permitted rim/tyre combinations for mounting of
snow chains.
Rim size Tyre size
6Jx16 ET35 195/60 R16
Only fit snow chains with links and locks that are no
larger than 13 mm.
Spare and emergency spare wheel
Overview
Spare wheel
▶
A full spare wheel is identical to the wheels moun-
ted on the vehicle.
▶
A temporary spare wheel is provided with a warn-
ing label on the rim. This wheel is intended to ena-
ble you to reach the nearest specialist garage.
Inflate a space saver wheel with the maximum pre-
scribed pressure.
Emergency wheel
A warning label is displayed on the rim of the tempo-
rary spare wheel. This wheel is intended to enable
you to reach the nearest specialist garage.
An emergency wheel is significantly narrower than
the wheels mounted ex-factory.
145
Wheels › All-season or winter tires
Remove the wheel on vehicles without sound
system and replace
The spare wheel or emergency wheel is mounted in a
recess under the floor covering or the variable load-
ing floor in the boot.
Removing
›
Loosen the retaining belt and take out the box with
the tool kit.
›
Unscrew the locking screw.
›
Take out the wheel.
Inserting
›
Insert the wheel into the wheel well with the out-
side facing downwards.
›
Pull the fixing band through the opposite holes in
the wheel rim.
›
Screw in the locking screw until it stops.
›
Replace the box with the tool kit into the wheel
and secure it with the tape.
Remove the wheel on vehicles with sound
system and replace
Removing
›
Press the safety button
and remove the plug.
›
Unscrew the lock nut.
›
Remove the bass loud-
speaker.
›
Take out the wheel.
Inserting
›
Insert the wheel into the wheel well with the out-
side facing downwards.
›
Insert the bass loudspeaker.
›
Screw in the locknut until it stops.
›
Insert the connector in the bass loudspeaker.
Changing the wheel and raising the
vehicle
What you should be mindful of
Before changing
›
Park the vehicle securely and secure it from rolling
away.
›
Turn o the engine.
›
Let all of the occupants get out. During the wheel
change they should not stand on the road, e.g. be-
hind the crash barriers.
›
All doors, the luggage compartment and tailgate
close.
›
Uncouple any trailers.
Raise vehicle
WARNING
Always ensure the base plate of the lifting jack can-
not slip!
▶
Provide a wide and firm base under the jack on
loose surfaces.
▶
Create a non-slip base (e.g. a rubber floor mat) un-
der the jack on a smooth surface.
▶
Always raise the vehicle with the doors closed.
▶
Do not insert any body parts under the raised vehi-
cle.
▶
Do not start the engine of the lifted vehicle.
NOTICE
Danger of damage to vehicle!
▶
Make sure that the jack is attached correctly to the
bridge of the sill.
After having been changed
›
Check the tyre pressure on the mounted wheel
and adjust if necessary.
›
In vehicles with a tyre indicator, save the tyre pres-
sure values in the system.
›
Have the tightening torque of the wheel bolts of
the mounted tyres checked with a torque wrench
as soon as possible.
The specified tightening torque is 120 Nm.
Drive carefully until the tightening torque is checked.
Replace the damaged tyre. It is not recommended to
repair the tyre.
146
Wheels › Changing the wheel and raising the vehicle
WARNING
Risk of an accident!
▶
Too low a tightening torque may cause the wheel
to disengage while driving.
▶
Too high a tightening torque can damage the
threads and cause the rim to deform.
WARNING
Risk of an accident!
▶
Do not grease or lubricate screws.
▶
Do not use corroded or damaged screws.
Changing the wheel and raising the vehicle
Release screws
›
If the vehicle has covers over the wheel bolts or
wheel trims, remove them.
WARNING
If you step on the key end when loosening the screw,
hold on to the vehicle for better stability.
Some vehicles may have
anti-theft wheel bolts
that protect the wheels
from theft.
›
Insert the upper sec-
tion on the anti-theft
wheel bolt until it
stops.
›
Place the key on the
wheel bolt or on the
attachment piece.
›
Turn the screw a maxi-
mum of half a turn so
that the wheel does
not come loose and fall
o.
Jacking points for the jack
The jacking points are located on the lower sill of the
vehicle.
A
- 15.5 cm
B
- 25.8 cm
Position the jack and lift the vehicle
Use the jack from the tool kit.
›
Position the jack at the jacking point closest to the
wheel to be replaced.
›
Insert the crank into the mount on the car jack.
›
Support the base plate of the jack with its full area
resting on level ground and ensure that the jack is
located in a vertical position at the jacking point.
›
Use the crank to raise the jack until its claw enclo-
ses the bar.
›
Continue to lift the vehicle until the wheel is just
o the floor.
Changing a wheel
›
Unscrew the screws and place them on a clean
surface.
›
Remove the wheel carefully.
›
Attach the wheel.
›
Slightly screw in the screws.
›
Lower the vehicle.
NOTICE
Applies to wheel trims supplied ex-factory or from
ŠKODA Original Accessories: the anti-theft wheel
bolt should be installed in the position marked on the
back of the wheel trim.
Tighten screws
›
Tighten the opposite wheel bolts including the an-
ti-theft wheel bolt one after the other.
›
Reinstall the cover caps of the wheel bolts or the
full wheel covers.
Keep the label with the code number of the anti-
theft wheel bolts. A replacement upper section can
be acquired from ŠKODA original parts based on
this.
Breakdown kit
Content overview
The kit is located in a box under the floor covering in
the luggage compartment.
147
Wheels › Breakdown kit
A
Sticker with speed indication
B
Valve remover
C
Inflation hose with plug
D
Air compressor (the layout of the controls may
be dierent depending on the type of air com-
pressor)
E
Tyre inflation hose
F
Button for pressure reduction
G
Pressure indicator
H
12 volt cable connector
I
ON and OFF switch
J
Tyre inflation bottle
K
Replacement valve core
The declaration of conformity is included with the air
compressor or the log folder.
Usage conditions
Performing a repair with the breakdown kit not at all
intended to replace a permanent repair on the tyre.
The purpose of the repair is to get you to the nearest
specialist garage.
Change the tyre repaired by the breakdown kit as
soon as possible.
Before using the kit
›
Park the vehicle securely and secure it from rolling
away.
›
Turn o the engine.
›
Let all of the occupants get out. During the wheel
repair they should not stand on the road, e.g. be-
hind the crash barriers.
›
Close all doors as well as the bonnet and boot lid.
›
Uncouple any trailers.
After using the kit
If a tyre pressure of 2.0 bar can not be achieved, the
tyre is too damaged and cannot be sealed with the
puncture set.
›
Stop driving. Seek the help of a specialist garage.
Once a tyre pressure of 2.0–2.5 bar is achieved, con-
tinue the journey at a maximum speed of 80 km/h
(50 mph).
›
Avoid full accelerations, strong braking and fast
cornering.
Information for driving with repaired tyres
›
The pressure of the repaired tyre must be checked
after driving for 10 minutes.
›
If the tyre pressure is 1.3 bar and less, do not con-
tinue! Seek the help of a specialist garage.
›
If the tyre pressure is higher than 1.3 bar, correct
the pressure to the correct value of at least 2 bar
and continue driving.
NOTICE
Danger of damage to the compressor!
▶
After the maximum running time of the air com-
pressor, allow it to cool for a few minutes.
WARNING
Risk of burns!
The tyre inflation hose and the air compressor may
become hot when inflated.
▶
Allow the air compressor and hose to cool for a
few minutes.
Usage restrictions
Do not use the kit in the following cases.
▶
The rim is damaged.
▶
The outdoor temperature is below the minimum
temperature indicated in the manual of the tyre fill-
ing bottle.
▶
Tyre punctures are greater than 4 mm.
▶
There is damage to the tyre wall.
▶
The expiry date stated on the tyre inflation bottle
has expired.
Self-help
Seal the tyres
›
Unscrew the valve cap from the damaged tyre.
›
Unscrew the valve core with the valve insert and
place it on a clean surface.
›
Shake the tyre inflation bottle back and forth with
sealant.
›
Screw the inflation hose onto the tyre inflater bot-
tle. The film on the closure is pierced automatically.
›
Remove the plug from the inflation hose and push
it fully onto the tyre valve.
›
Hold the bottle with the bottom facing upwards
and fill all of the sealing agent into the tyre.
›
Remove the filler plug from the valve.
›
Screw in the valve insert.
148
Wheels › Breakdown kit
Inflate tyres
›
Fit the tyre inflation hose of the air compressor to
the tyre valve.
›
Secure the vehicle with the parking brake.
›
Start the engine.
›
Plug the connector into the 12 volt socket .
›
Turn on the air compressor.
›
Once a tyre pressure of 2.0-2.5 bar is reached, turn
o the air compressor.
Observe the maximum running time of the air com-
pressor according to the directions of the repair kit
manufacturer.
›
If an air pressure of 2.0 - 2.5 bar has not been
reached, remove the tyre inflation hose from the
valve.
›
Drive approx. 10 metres forwards or backwards to
allow the sealing agent to distribute in the tyre.
›
Replace the tire inflation hose on the valve and re-
peat the inflation procedure.
Tyre pressure
What you should be mindful of
NOTICE
▶
Always adjust the tyre pressure to the load.
▶
Check the pressure in all tyres at least once a
month and before each longer ride.
▶
Check the pressure when the tyres are cold. If nec-
essary, do not reduce the elevated pressure when
the tyres are warm.
▶
After each tyre pressure change, save the new val-
ues in the tyre pressure monitoring system.
WARNING
Risk of an accident!
If tyre pressure loss is very quick, try to stop the ve-
hicle carefully without heavy steering or heavy brak-
ing.
Sticker with prescribed tyre pressures
The sticker with prescribed tyre pressures is located
on the inside of the fuel filler flap.
A
Inflation pressure for
half load
B
Inflation pressure for
environmentally
friendly operation
(slightly lower fuel
consumption and
emissions)
C
Inflation pressure for
full load
D
Tyre diameter in inches
This information only serves as information for
the prescribed tyre pressure. This is not a listing
of approved tyre sizes for your vehicle. These
are listed in the technical vehicle documentation
and in the declaration of conformity (in the so-
called COCDocument).
E
Tyre pressure reading for the front axle tyres
F
Tyre pressure reading for the rear axle tyres
G
Prescribed tyre pressure value for the emergen-
cy wheel
Tyre pressure monitoring system
Functionality
The tyre pressure monitoring indicator indicates a
change in tyre pressure.
Warning when pressure changes
Illuminated - Tyre pressure change
›
Stop the vehicle.
›
Check the tyres and tyre pressures.
Show tyres with modified pressure
›
In Infotainment, select the following menu.
Vehicle status
Or:
Vehicle status
Function restriction
The system is unable to provide a warning in the
event of a very rapid tyre pressure loss, e.g. sudden
puncture.
The system function may be restricted in the follow-
ing cases.
▶
Uneven loading of the wheels, e.g. with a trailer at-
tached.
▶
Sporty driving style.
▶
Driving on dirt roads.
▶
Snow chains fitted.
Saving tyre pressure values
Store the tyre pressure values in the infotainment
›
Inflate the tyres to the prescribed inflation pres-
sure.
›
Turn on the ignition.
›
In Infotainment, select the following menu.
Vehicle status
Or:
149
Wheels › Tyre pressure
Vehicle status
›
Tap on the functional surface .
Using the functional surfaces select the tyre
control display menu.
›
Then follow the instructions on the screen.
Save the tyre pressures in the following cases.
▶
Change of tyre pressure.
▶
Change of one or more wheels.
▶
Change of position of a wheel on the vehicle.
▶
Always after covering a distance of 10,000 km or
once a year.
Troubleshooting
Tyre pressure monitoring system faulty
flashes for about 1 minute and stays on
›
Stop the vehicle, switch o the ignition and
start the engine.
If the
symbol flashes again after starting the en-
gine, there is a system fault.
›
Continue driving, exercising appropriate caution,
and seek the help of a specialist garage.
Wheel bolt cover caps
Remove cover caps and install
Disconnecting
›
Push the pull-o clamp onto the cover cap up to
the stop.
›
Remove the cover cap.
Installing
›
Push the cover cap onto the wheel bolt to the stop.
Full wheel frame
Removing and installing the trim
Applies to factory built or original accessory trims
from ŠKODA.
Disconnecting
›
Hang the clamps for removing the wheel trims at
the edge of one of the openings in the trim.
›
Push the wheel wrench through the clamp, support
on the tyre and pull o the wheel trim.
Installing
›
Press the wheel trim onto the wheel rim at the
designated valve opening.
When using an anti-theft wheel bolt, it must be lo-
cated at the location indicated on the bezel.
›
Press the trim, starting at the valve, into the rim on
both sides until it engages around the entire cir-
cumference.
NOTICE
▶
Use hand pressure, do not hit the wheel cover.
150
Wheels › Wheel bolt cover caps
Storage space and interior
equipment
Equipment in the boot
Overview
A
Storage tray
Max. load 2.5 kg
The partition wall of the storage compartment
on vehicles with the variable loading floor cannot
be removed.
B
Trailer hitch switch
C
Removable light
D
Storage compartment for spare or emergency
wheel and vehicle tools
E
12 volt socket
F
Storage tray
Max. load 1.5 kg
Emergency equipment
Overview of the emergency equipment
Emergency equipment in the luggage compart-
ment
A
Placing the first-aid kit
B
Tool kit
C
Placing of the warning triangle
Storage compartment for the reflective vest
The storage compartment for the reflective vest is in
the storage compartment of the front door.
Fire extinguisher under the passenger seat
Tool kit
Depending on the equipment, not all of the following
components may be included in the tool kit.
A
Attachment for the anti-theft wheel bolts
B
Towing eye
C
Bracket for removing the full wheel covers
D
Jack with sign and crank
E
Wheel wrench
F
Removal clip for the wheel bolt cover caps
G
Breakdown kit
H
Screwdriver
The declaration of conformity is enclosed with the
jack or the logbook folder.
Fasteners in the boot
Overview
Vehicle without variable loading floor
A
Bag hooks
151
Storage space and interior equipment › Equipment in the boot
Max. load 7.5 kg
B
Fasteners for securing the fastening nets
C
Hook for securing the storage bag
Max. load 1.5 kg
D
Lashing eyes for securing the fixing nets and the
storage bag
E
Lashing eyes for securing the load and the fas-
tening nets
Max. load 350 kg
Vehicle with variable loading floor
A
Bag hooks
Max. load 7.5 kg
B
Fasteners for securing the fastening nets
C
Hook for securing the storage bag
Max. load 1.5 kg
D
Lashing eyes for securing the fixing nets and the
storage bag
E
Lashing eyes for securing the load and the fas-
tening nets
Max. load 350 kg
F
Lashing eyes for securing the load and the fas-
tening nets
Max. load 350 kg
Other fasteners
A
Net on the luggage compartment cover
Max. load 1.5 kg
B
Hook for securing the load to the eyelet of the
TOP TETHER system
Max. load 5 kg
C
Cargo elements
Max. load 8 kg
A storage compartment for the cargo elements
is located under the floor covering in the luggage
compartment.
›
Fold up the cargo element and fasten it to the
floor covering in the luggage compartment.
Fastening nets
Overview
The side net has a lockable storage bag.
The maximum load of the lockable storage bags is
0.5 kg.
The maximum load of the fastening net with the
lockable storage bag is 0.5 kg.
152
Storage space and interior equipment › Fastening nets
The maximum load of the other fastening nets is
1.5 kg.
Storage pocket
Suspension
›
The storage bag at the
attachment points
A .
B or C is hung.
The maximum load of
the other fastening nets
is 3.5 kg.
Net partition
Attach the net partition
Attach at the back
›
Place the crossbar in the supports A .
›
Snap the carabiners B
into the lashing eyes.
›
Pull the straps firmly at the free ends C .
Fasten in the front
The procedure is analogous to the process behind.
The lashing eyes for the carabiner are located under
the central body pillars.
Releasing
Loosening takes place in the reverse order for fixing.
Double-sided floor covering
Overview
Depending on the equipment, the vehicle may be
equipped with a double-sided floor covering in the
luggage compartment. One side is made of fabric,
the other side is washable.
Removable light
Overview
A
Button for switching on and o
B
Light (lights up when the light is in the bracket
and the boot lid is open)
C
Light (lights up when the light is outside the
bracket)
The batteries in the light are charged while the
engine is running.
A full charge of the batteries takes about 3 hours.
Remove and insert
NOTICE
▶
Protect the light from moisture.
Removing
›
Grasp the light in area A and swivel it out.
Thanks to the integrated magnets, the light can
be attached, for example, to the vehicle body.
Inserting
›
Insertion takes place in reverse order.
153
Storage space and interior equipment › Storage pocket
Replace batteries
›
Pry o the cover with a narrow, pointed object in
the area of the arrow.
›
Replace the batteries.
›
Fit the cover and click into place.
NOTICE
New batteries must comply with the specifications
of the original battery.
Rigid boot cover
Remove and insert
The maximum load of the other fastening nets is
1 kg.
Removing
›
Unhook the straps.
Remove the cover by
pulling it quickly.
The cover is released by
slowly pulling on the
floor of the boot.
Inserting
›
Insert the cover until it clicks into place.
›
Hook in the retaining straps.
Store the cover behind the rear seats
›
Hook the cover behind
the rear seats.
Variable loading floor in the boot
Setting the position
The maximum load of the variable loading floor is
75 kg.
Set the variable loading floor to the upper or lower
position
›
Lift the variable load
floor and pull it to-
wards you.
›
To set in the upper po-
sition, position the vari-
able loading floor in the
front area on area
A .
›
To set in the lower po-
sition, position the vari-
able loading floor in the
front area on space
B .
›
Press the variable load-
ing floor forward and
hang up.
154
Storage space and interior equipment › Rigid boot cover
Fasten the raised variable loading floor in the up-
per position
›
Secure the raised vari-
able loading floor with
the help of hinged cor-
ners in areas A .
Remove and insert
›
Lift the variable loading floor up to a distance of
about 15 cm below the luggage compartment cov-
er and then remove it.
›
Insertion takes place in reverse order.
Overview of passenger compartment
Overview of practical equipment in the front
A
Make up mirror
B
Ticket holder
C
Ticket holder
D
Spectacles compartment
Max. load 0.25 kg
›
To open, press the button.
E
Storage compartment with air outlet nozzle
Max. load 3 kg
›
Pull the handle to open the compartment.
›
Turn the knob to position to open the air
outlet nozzle.
F
Storage tray
▶
Bottle holder with a capacity of max. 1.5 l
▶
Storage compartment for the waste container
▶
Storage compartment for the reflective vest
G
USB connections
The USB connection can be used for charging
and for data transfer.
H
12 volt socket
I
Openable and adjustable armrest with storage
compartment
In the lower part of the armrest, there is a card
holder.
›
Pull the handle to open the compartment.
J
Storage tray
Max. load 0.5 kg
›
Pull on the handle to open.
NOTICE
▶
Do not leave heat-sensitive objects behind in the
glasses compartment
D .
Overview of the practical equipment in the
rear
A
Coat hook
Max. load 2 kg
B
Folding table
C
Storage pocket
D
Storage tray
155
Storage space and interior equipment › Overview of passenger compartment
▶
Bottle holder with a capacity of max. 0.5 l
▶
Storage compartment for the reflective vest
E
Storage pocket
F
USB connections
The USB connection is for charging only.
Storage compartment under the front
seat
Opening the storage compartment
The maximum permissi-
ble load for storage
compartment is 1.5 kg.
Storage compartment for an umbrella
Overview
Phonebox
What you should be mindful of
CAUTION
Risk of burns during charging.
▶
The phone may get warm, remove it carefully from
the storage compartment.
▶
Do not leave any metal objects in the compartment
under the phone. If there is a metallic object in the
storage compartment, which has become hot, re-
move the phone and let it cool down in the storage
compartment!
Functionality
Functions of the Phonebox
▶
Wireless charging of phones.
▶
Amplification of the telephone signal (only valid for
some countries).
The Phonebox is located in the storage compartment
in the centre console at the front.
Insert a telephone with a maximum size of 160x80
mm into the storage compartment.
Charging Indicator
The state of charge is indicated by the colour of the
symbol in the status bar on the Infotainment
screen.
▶
White - the phone is in the storage compartment,
is detected and is charging.
▶
Grey - the phone is not in the storage compart-
ment/does not support wireless charging/is fully
charged.
▶
Red - the phone is in the storage compartment, is
detected, but cannot be charged.
▶
No icon displayed - the function is not available.
Recommendations for optimal function
✓ The phone is positioned with the screen facing
up.
✓ The protective cover of the phone is removed.
✓ The phone is centred on the phone icon on the
pad.
Operating conditions
Conditions for wireless charging
✓ Ignition is switched on.
✓ The phone supports the Qi standard.
✓ There is no object between the pad and the
phone.
Troubleshooting
A message has been displayed on the Infotainment
screen indicating that the mobile phone cannot be
charged.
▶
Check that there is no object between the pad and
the phone to be charged. If this is the case, remove
the phone and the item. Place the phone centrally
on the phone symbol on the pad again.
▶
Check that the position of the phone to be charged
has not changed. If this is the case, remove the
phone and put it back in the centre of the phone
symbol on the pad.
156
Storage space and interior equipment › Storage compartment under the front seat
Cup holder
Overview
Front cup holder
In the front holder area, a
bottle can be opened
with one hand.
›
Press the bottle into
the holder and un-
screw the cap.
Rear cup holder
CAUTION
Risk of scalding!
▶
Never put hot beverage containers in the cup hold-
er.
NOTICE
Risk of damage to the electrical system and to the
panels due to spilled drinks.
Multimedia holder
Overview
The multimedia holder is inserted in the cup holder.
A
Storage compart-
ment for coins
B
Storage compart-
ment for the vehicle
key
C
Storage compart-
ment for a mobile
phone
Waste container
Replace bags
Ashtray and cigarette lighter
What you should be mindful of
CAUTION
Risk of burning or fire!
▶
Do not use the ashtray for storing hot or burning
objects.
▶
Handle the lighter carefully.
Operation
The ashtray is inserted in the cup holder.
Open the ashtray
Remove the lid
157
Storage space and interior equipment › Cup holder
Cigarette lighter
›
Push in the lighter.
›
Wait until the glowing
lighter pops back out.
›
Remove the lighter and
use.
›
Push the lighter back
in.
The socket of the ciga-
rette lighter serves as a
12 V socket.
Folding table
Operation
Fold up the table
›
Fold the table up to the
desired position.
Unfold the table
›
Press the safety button
and unfold the table.
Slide out the cup holder
The maximum load for the table is 8.5 kg.
CAUTION
Risk of injury!
▶
During the trip to the table must be in folded-
down .
12-Volt power socket
Operating conditions
NOTICE
Risk of damage to the electrical system of the vehi-
cle!
▶
Use the sockets only for the connection of ap-
proved electrical accessories with a total power
consumption of up to 120 watts.
NOTICE
Danger of damage to the connected consumers!
▶
Switch o the consumers before switching the ig-
nition on or o and before starting the engine.
158
Storage space and interior equipment › Folding table
Roof rack and hitch
Roof rack
Overview
The maximum weight of the load incl. roof rack is
75 kg.
Swivelling hitch
What you should be mindful of
WARNING
Risk of an accident!
▶
Do not manipulate the switch for swinging the tow
bar in and out while a trailer or another accessory
is coupled to the tow bar. The tow bar could be un-
locked.
CAUTION
Risk of injury!
▶
Handle the trailer coupling carefully.
▶
When swinging out the tow bar, do not stand in
the middle area of the rear bumper.
NOTICE
Risk of damage to the trailer coupling!
▶
When not using the towing device, swing the tow
bar under the bumper.
Tow bar: swivel out/in
Swing out the tow bar
›
Pull on the switch. The
tow bar swings out.
The indicator light
inside the switch illu-
minates.
›
Press the tow bar until
it audibly clicks into
place.
Check latchings: the
indicator light
within
the switch lights up.
Swivel tow bar
NOTICE
▶
No trailer or any other accessory can be connected
to the tow bar.
▶
A socket or adapter may not be plugged into the
socket.
›
Pull on the switch. The
tow bar is unlocked.
The indicator light
inside the switch illu-
minates.
›
Swing in the tow bar
under the bumper until
it audibly clicks into
place.
Check latchings: the
indicator light
within
the switch lights up.
Couple or unhitch trailer or accessory
The following information describes the procedure
for coupling and uncoupling a trailer. The information
also refers to another accessory, e.g. a bike carrier.
WARNING
Risk of an accident!
▶
Do not use the safety eye for towing.
▶
Distribute and fix the load correctly.
The trailer has a 13-pin electrical socket. If the
trailer have a 7-pin connector, use a corresponding
adapter from the ŠKODA Original Accessories.
Coupling
›
Swing out the tow bar.
›
Put the trailer drawbar onto the ball head.
›
Plug the electrical trail-
er plug into the socket
A
.
›
Hook the tear-o rope
of the trailer onto the
safety eye B
. The
tear-o rope must sag
against the vehicle in
all trailer positions.
Uncoupling
Uncoupling takes place in reverse order.
159
Roof rack and hitch › Roof rack
Power supply of the trailer power network
In the electrical connection between the vehicle and
trailer, the trailer is powered by the vehicle.
NOTICE
Risk of damage to the vehicle electronics!
The total power consumption of all consumers con-
nected to the trailer power supply must not exceed
350 watts.
Troubleshooting
Trailer coupling error
The indicator light inside the switch does not light
up or flash, or the tow bar does not lock into place.
›
Do not use the trailer coupling.
›
Seek the help of a specialist garage.
Tow bar not locked
illuminates
›
Engage the tow bar.
Technical data
Maximum vertical load for trailer operation
The maximum vertical load for trailer operation de-
pends on the engine type and the vehicle equipment.
The valid specification for your vehicle can be found
in the technical vehicle documentation, (e.g. vehicle
approval documentation, COC document) or at a
ŠKODA partner.
Other information (e.g. on the nameplate of the trail-
er device) merely provides information on the test
values of the device.
Support load with mounted accessories
When using the accessories (e.g. bicycle carrier), the
maximum length and the permissible total weight in-
cluding load must be considered.
The maximum length of the mounted accessories
(from the ball of the towing device) may not exceed
70 cm.
The permissible total weight of the installed acces-
sory, including its load, corresponds to the maximum
load on trailers.
This value applies if the centre of gravity is at a dis-
tance of no more than 30 cm from the towing device
ball head.
If the distance of the centre gravity of the load to
the ball head of the towing device is greater than
30 cm, then the max. permissible total weight of the
accessory, including its load, decreases (e.g. at a dis-
tance of 60 cm from the ball head, the permissible
weight decreases by half).
WARNING
Risk of an accident!
▶
Do not exceed the maximum vertical load.
▶
The permissible trailer load and the weight of an-
other accessory, e.g. of the bike carrier, is not to be
exceeded.
NOTICE
Risk of damage to the trailer and the vehicle itself!
▶
When using the accessory (e.g. bicycle carrier), ob-
serve the maximum length and the permissible to-
tal weight of the accessory incl.
160
Roof rack and hitch › Swivelling hitch
Maintaining and cleaning
Service events
Service intervals
Compliance with service intervals is crucial for the
life and value of the vehicle.
You will be notified about a due service appointment
by the symbol and the corresponding message in
the instrument cluster display.
The specialist garage will inform you of the type of
service interval, the option of changing this and the
scope of service.
All services and the replacement or refilling of op-
erating fluids are chargeable to the customer, even
during the warranty period, unless the ŠKODA AUTO
warranty conditions or other binding agreements de-
termine otherwise.
Proof of service
A specialist garage stores the proof of service in the
information system called Digital Service Plan.
The proof of service can be printed out.
Show service appointment
In Infotainment, select the following menu.
Service
Or:
Service
Resetting information
We recommend that you do not reset the informa-
tion regarding service events on your own. It can
lead to incorrect setting of the service intervals and
thus also to possible faults in the vehicle.
For vehicles with a variable service interval, new
service interval values calculated according to the
previous operating conditions will be displayed after
the oil change service indicator is reset. These values
will then continue to be adjusted according to the
current operating conditions.
Service work, adjustments and technical
changes
The instructions and guidelines from ŠKODA AUTO
must be observed when carrying out any modifica-
tions, repairs or technical alterations to the vehicle.
Adhering to these instructions and guidelines helps
ensure road safety and helps keep the vehicle in a
good technical condition.
We advise only using ŠKODA Original Accessories
and ŠKODA Original Parts which have been expressly
approved for use on your vehicle. Reliability, safety
and suitability for your vehicle are guaranteed with
these.
ŠKODA Service Partner
All ŠKODA Service Partners operate according to
the most recent guidelines and instructions from
ŠKODA AUTO. Service and repair work is therefore
carried out on time and at the appropriate quality.
Adhering to these instructions and guidelines helps
ensure road safety and helps keep the vehicle in a
good technical condition.
We therefore advise having all modifications, repairs
and technical alterations to the vehicle carried out by
a ŠKODA Service Partner.
ŠKODA original parts
We recommend the use of ŠKODA Original Parts for
your vehicle, as these parts are approved by ŠKODA
AUTO. These parts correspond exactly to the ŠKO-
DA AUTO regulations and are identical to the parts
used in series production.
ŠKODA AUTO is able to warrant the safety, suitabili-
ty, and long life of these products.
ŠKODA Service Partners are liable for any defects of
ŠKODA Genuine Parts for a period of 2 years after
sale in accordance with the materials defect liability,
unless agreed otherwise in the purchase agreement.
ŠKODA original accessories
We recommend that you use ŠKODA Genuine Ac-
cessories in your vehicle. With these accessories,
ŠKODA AUTO stands for safety, reliability and the
suitability for your vehicle type.
ŠKODA Service Partners are liable for any defects of
ŠKODA Genuine Accessories for a period of 2 years
after installation or delivery in accordance with the
materials defect liability, unless agreed otherwise in
the purchase agreement or any other agreements.
Spoiler
WARNING
Risk of an accident!
▶
Only use the original spoiler on the front bumper in
combination with the original spoiler on the boot
lid.
▶
The original spoiler on the front bumper cannot be
left on its own without the spoiler on the luggage
compartment lid or in combination with an unsuita-
ble spoiler on the luggage compartment lid.
▶
We recommend that you consult the ŠKODA Serv-
ice Partner for any repairs to or replacement, addi-
tion or removal of spoilers.
Component protection
Some electronic vehicle components (such as the in-
strument cluster) are factory-equipped with compo-
nent protection. This component protection ensures
the functional limitation of these components in a
161
Maintaining and cleaning › Service events
non-legitimate installation in another vehicle (e.g. af-
ter a theft) or operation outside the vehicle.
Interior
What you should be mindful of
NOTICE
▶
Use cleaning agents intended for cleaning and care
of the individual materials.
▶
Do not use aggressive cleaning agents or chemical
solvents.
Natural leather / Faux leather / Alcantara
®
suede /
material
NOTICE
▶
Remove impurities as soon as possible.
▶
Do not use solvents, floor wax, shoe cream, stain
remover or similar agents on Alcantara
®
suede seat
upholstery.
▶
Make sure that natural leather is not moistened
when cleaning and that no water seeps into the
seams.
▶
Do not clean the roof cladding with a brush.
NOTICE
Risk of fading to the cover fabric.
▶
If necessary, do not leave the covers for long peri-
ods in the blazing sun.
▶
During use, the leather and Alcantara® and suede
materials may show minor changes (e.g. folds, dis-
colouration).
▶
Some clothing fabrics, e.g. dark denim, sometimes
do not have sucient colour fastness. As a result,
discolouration that is clearly visible on the seat up-
holstery can occur. This is not a defect in the fab-
ric.
▶
Sharp-edged zippers, rivets, clamps and similar
garments can damage the upholstery in the vehi-
cle. Such damages cannot be subsequently recog-
nised as a justified complaint.
Plastic parts
NOTICE
Risk of damaging the dash panel.
▶
Do not attach fragrances and air fresheners to the
dash panel.
Windows
NOTICE
Risk of damage to the filaments or the glass antenna.
▶
Do not stick stickers on the heating filaments.
Covers of electrically heated seats
NOTICE
Risk of damaging the heating system.
▶
Do not clean the seats with water or other liquids.
▶
Do not dry the seats by switching on the heating.
Seat belts
NOTICE
Risk of damage to the seat belts.
▶
Do not dry clean the seat belts.
▶
Allow cleaned belts to dry before rolling up.
Instructions for cleaning
Natural leather / Faux leather / Alcantara
®
suede /
material
›
Remove dust and dirt on the surface with a vac-
uum cleaner.
›
Remove fresh impurities with water, slightly mois-
tened cotton cloth or woolen cloth; if necessary,
use a mild soap solution and wipe with a dry cloth.
›
Remove stubborn stains with a suitable cleaning
agent.
›
For regular care of natural leather, use the equip-
ment provided for this purpose. After each clean,
use a care cream with light protection and impreg-
nation eect.
›
When looking after Alcantara
®
, remove stubborn
hair from suede and fabric surfaces with a cleaning
brush. Remove pills from materials with a brush.
Plastic parts
›
Remove impurities with water, slightly moistened
cloth or sponge with a suitable cleaning agent if
necessary.
Windows
›
Remove impurities with clean water and dry with a
cloth provided for this purpose.
Covers of electrically heated seats
›
Remove impurities with a suitable cleaning agent.
Seat belts
›
Remove impurities with a soft cloth and mild soap
solution.
Exterior
What you should be mindful of
WARNING
Risk of an accident!
After washing the vehicle, the functionality of the
brake system may be aected by moisture and, in
winter, by ice.
▶
Dry and clean the brakes by braking several times.
162
Maintaining and cleaning › Interior
NOTICE
▶
Bird droppings, insect residues, litter and sea salt
residues, overflowed fuel, AdBlue
®
etc. are to be re-
moved as soon as possible.
▶
Do not use rough sponges, scourers or similar to
remove dirt.
▶
Use cleaning agents intended for cleaning and care
of the individual materials.
▶
Do not use aggressive cleaning agents or chemical
solvents.
▶
Do not polish the vehicle in a dusty environment.
NOTICE
AdBlue
®
picks up some materials, e.g. paint and plas-
tics.
▶
Clean the aected area with a damp cloth and cold
water.
▶
Remove any dried solution with warm water and a
sponge.
NOTICE
▶
Paint damage should be repaired as soon as possi-
ble.
▶
Do not treat painted parts with or hard waxes.
▶
Do not polish panels.
▶
Door seals and window guides must not be treated
with anything. Exempted from this are products
that are ŠKODA Original accessories. These ensure
that the protective lacquer layer of the seals and
window guides is not attacked.
▶
Do not use abrasive cleaners to clean the reversing
camera.
Before driving through a car wash
›
Observe the usual specifications of the car wash,
e.g. close all windows, fold the mirrors, etc.
›
Move the windscreen wiper lever to position
to adjust.
›
If there are special attachments on your vehicle,
observe the instructions of the car wash operator.
NOTICE
In vehicles with an electric boot lid, this can open au-
tomatically due to the pressure of the washing
brushes.
▶
Lock the vehicle, e.g. with the central lock button.
After washing with a wax preservation
›
Wipe o the windscreen wiper blades with a dry
cloth.
Wash with a pressure washer
NOTICE
▶
Follow the operating instructions for the high-
pressure cleaner. This particularly applies to infor-
mation with respect to the pressure and spray dis-
tance from the vehicle surface.
▶
Do not direct the water jet directly at the following
vehicle parts.
▶
Foils.
▶
Locks.
▶
Columns on the vehicle.
▶
Trailer connection.
▶
Swivelling ball bar.
▶
Sensors.
▶
Camera lenses.
▶
Plastic, chromed and anodised parts.
Remove snow and ice
NOTICE
▶
Remove snow and ice with a plastic scraper or a
suitable deicing agent.
▶
Clean the cameras with a hand brush.
▶
Only move the scraper in one direction.
▶
Do not use scratchers or other sharp objects for
foils.
▶
Do not remove snow and ice with hot or warm wa-
ter.
▶
Do not remove snow and ice from surfaces with
coarse dirt.
Instructions for cleaning
Handwash
›
Wash the vehicle from top to bottom with a soft
sponge or wash glove and plenty of water, if nec-
essary with additional suitable cleaning agents.
›
For foils and headlights, use a mild soap solution
that contains two tablespoons of white neutral
soap to one litre of lukewarm water.
›
Use a glass cleaner for the windscreen wiper
blades.
›
Wash the cameras with clean water and dry with a
suitable clean wipe.
NOTICE
▶
Wash out the sponge or wash mitt regularly.
▶
Use a dierent sponge for wheels, sills and the
lower part of the vehicle than that used for the
other vehicle parts.
▶
Do not wash the vehicle in the blazing sun.
▶
Do not dry the headlights or use sharp objects.
▶
Do not put pressure on the bodywork when wash-
ing.
▶
The temperature of the washing water may be a
max. 60 °C.
After hand washing
›
Rinse the vehicle and wipe it with a suitable clean
cloth.
Vehicle paint
›
Preserve the varnish at least twice a year with hard
wax.
›
Use a polish for matt lacquers.
163
Maintaining and cleaning › Exterior
Foils
Films will age and become brittle – this is entirely
normal: this is not an error.
The following factors have a negative eect on the
life or colour fastness of the films.
▶
Sun rays.
▶
Moisture.
▶
Air pollution.
▶
Stones, e.g. the rebound of the cargo during trans-
port on the roof rack.
Protection of hollow spaces
Corrosion-prone cavities of the vehicle are perma-
nently protected by preservative wax at the factory.
›
Remove spilled wax with a plastic scraper, clean
stains with mineral spirits.
Underbody protection
The underside is permanently protected by the fac-
tory against chemical and mechanical influences.
›
Have the protective coating checked by a special-
ist garage before starting and at the end of the
cold season.
Wheels
›
After washing, preserve the wheels with suitable
means.
NOTICE
Severe dirt on the wheels can result in the wheels
unbalancing.
Car jack
›
If necessary, treat moving parts with suitable
grease.
Trailer towing coupling
›
Coat the ball head of the towing device with a suit-
able grease whenever necessary.
Technical data and
specifications
Requirements for the technical data
The emission standard, information on fuel con-
sumption and other information pertaining to your
vehicle can be found listed in the technical vehicle
documentation and in the declaration of conformity,
in the so-called COCDocument. The information can
also be requested from a ŠKODA partner.
The declaration of conformity can be obtained from
a ŠKODA partner.
The details in the technical vehicle documentation
take precedence over the information in this Own-
er's Manual.
The listed performance values were determined
without performance-reducing equipment, e.g. air
conditioning system.
The values listed are for the basic model without any
optional equipment. The values have been deter-
mined in accordance with the rules and conditions
specified in statutory or technical regulations for de-
termining operational and technical data for motor
vehicles.
Vehicle identification data
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
The vehicle identification number is found at the fol-
lowing locations.
▶
Directly in the engine compartment on the suspen-
sion turret.
▶
On a plate under the wind shield in the lower left
corner.
▶
On the rating plate at the bottom of the middle
body pillar on the right side of the vehicle.
Type plate.
A
Vehicle manufacturers
B
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
The display of the VIN takes place in the infotain-
ment in the following menu item.
Service
Or:
164
Technical data and specifications › Requirements for the technical data
Service
Engine number
The engine number is embossed in the engine block.
Maximum permissible weights
The maximum permissible weights are listed on the
nameplate.
The type plate is located at the bottom of the middle
body pillar on the right side of the vehicle.
A
Maximum permissible gross weight
B
Maximum permissible towed weight (towing ve-
hicle and trailer)
C
Maximum permissible front axle load
D
Maximum permissible rear axle load
Maximum permissible towed weight
The specified value is valid for altitudes up to 1000
m above sea level.
The engine output falls as altitude increases, as does
the vehicle's climbing power.
Therefore, for every additional 1,000 m in height (or
part), the maximum permissible towed weight must
be reduced by 10 %.
The towed weight is made up of the actual weights
of the loaded towing vehicle and the loaded trailer.
Payloads
It is possible to calculate the approximate maximum
payload from the dierence between the permissible
total weight and the operating weight.
The payload consists of the following weights.
▶
The weight of the passengers.
▶
The weight of all items of luggage and other loads.
▶
The weight of the roof load including the roof rack
system.
▶
The weight of the equipment that is excluded from
the operating weight.
▶
Trailer bearing load for trailer towing » page 160.
WARNING
Risk of accident and danger of vehicle damage!
▶
Do not exceed the specified values for the maxi-
mum permissible weights.
Operating weight
Information about the operating weight
The specification corresponds to the lowest possible
operating weight without additional weight-increas-
ing equipment. This includes 75 kg driver's weight,
the weight of the operating fluids and the on-board
tool kit and a fuel tank filled to min. 90%.
Operating weight - Kamiq
Engine type Transmission Operating weight (kg)
1.0 l/70 kW TSI Manual gearbox
-
a)
1.0 l/85 kW TSI Manual gearbox 1231
DSG
b)
-
a)
1.5 l/110 kW TSI Manual gearbox
-
a)
DSG
b)
-
a)
1.6 l/85 kW TDI CR Manual gearbox 1336
DSG
b)
1364
a)
The valueswere not available at the time of going to press.
b)
Automatic dual-clutch transmission.
Ask about the exact vehicle weight in a specialist garage.
165
Technical data and specifications › Maximum permissible weights
Vehicle dimensions
Dimensions
Specification Value (in mm)
Vehicle height 1531
Vehicle width with folded-in mirrors 1793
Vehicle width with folded-out mirrors 1988
Ground clearance of the vehicle 182
Vehicle length 4241
Engine specifications
Overview
▶
1.0 l/70 kW TSI » page 166.
▶
1.0 l/85 kW TSI » page 166.
▶
1.5 l/110 kW TSI » page 167.
▶
1.6 l/85 kW TDI CR » page 167.
1.0 l/70 kW TSI engine
Power (kW at 1/min) 70/5000-5500
Highest torque (Nm at 1/min) 175/2000-3500
Number of cylinders/displacement (cm
3
)
3/999
Transmission Manual gearbox
Maximum speed (km/h)
-
a)
With specified gear engaged
-
a)
Acceleration 0-100 km/h (s)
-
a)
a)
The valueswere not available at the time of going to press.
1.0 l/85 kW TSI engine
Power (kW at 1/min) 85/5000-5500
Highest torque (Nm at 1/min) 200/2000-3500
Number of cylinders/displacement
(cm
3
)
3/999
Transmission Manual gearbox
DSG
a)
Maximum speed (km/h) 194
-
b)
With specified gear engaged
5
-
b)
Acceleration 0-100 km/h (s) 9.9
-
b)
a)
Automatic dual-clutch transmission.
b)
The valueswere not available at the time of going to press.
166
Technical data and specifications › Vehicle dimensions
1.5 l/110 kW TSI engine
Power (kW at 1/min) 110/5000-6000
Highest torque (Nm at 1/min) 250/1500-3500
Number of cylinders/displacement
(cm
3
)
4/1498
Transmission Manual gearbox
DSG
a)
Maximum speed (km/h)
-
b)
-
b)
With specified gear engaged
-
b)
-
b)
Acceleration 0-100 km/h (s)
-
b)
-
b)
a)
Automatic dual-clutch transmission.
b)
The valueswere not available at the time of going to press.
1.6 l/85 kW TDI CR engine
Power (kW at 1/min) 85/3250-4000
Highest torque (Nm at 1/min) 250/1500-3250
Number of cylinders/displacement
(cm
3
)
4/1598
Transmission Manual gearbox
DSG
a)
Maximum speed (km/h) 193 192
With specified gear engaged
6 7
Acceleration 0-100 km/h (s) 10.2 10.4
a)
Automatic dual-clutch transmission.
Event Data Recorder
The vehicle is equipped with a device that acts as an
event data recorder (hereinafter referred to solely as
“EDR”). The main purpose of the EDR is to record da-
ta during a trac accident or other exceptional traf-
fic situation (hereinafter referred to solely as “acci-
dent”) during which the restraint systems are activa-
ted.
The EDR records the accident in a short time (ap-
proximately 10 seconds), including the following in-
formation, for example:
▶
The function of certain systems in the vehicle.
▶
The seat belt status of the driver and front passen-
ger.
▶
The actuation of the brake and accelerator pedals.
▶
The speed of the vehicle at the time of the acci-
dent.
The recorded data helps with the analysis of how the
vehicle systems were behaving shortly before, dur-
ing and shortly after the accident, thereby ensuring
better information regarding the circumstances un-
der which the accident occurred, resulting in materi-
al damage and possibly personal injury.
The data relating to assist systems in the vehicle is
then also recorded. In addition to the information on
whether the aected systems were switched on or
o at the relevant time, whether these were only
partially available or were inactive, it is also possible
to track whether these vehicle functions controlled,
accelerated or braked the vehicle during the acci-
dent. Depending on the equipment, these functions
are, e.g:
▶
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC).
▶
Lane Assist.
▶
Park Assist.
▶
Emergency brake function (Front Assist).
EDR data is only recorded if an accident causes the
restraint systems to be activated. Under normal driv-
ing conditions no data is recorded and there is no au-
dio or video recording of the vehicle interior or the
vehicle environment. Personal data such as name,
gender, age or location at which the accident occur-
red is also not stored in the EDR. However, third par-
ties such as law enforcement authorities may use
certain resources to connect EDR content to other
data sources, and therefore deduce the identification
of some of the people involved in the accident when
investigating the causes of the accident.
Reading out the EDR data requires special equip-
ment with specific access authorisation, a legally
prescribed diagnostic connection in the vehicle (“on-
board diagnostics”) and the ignition to be switched
on.
ŠKODA AUTO will not read or otherwise process any
accident data from the EDR without the approval of
167
Technical data and specifications › Event Data Recorder
the vehicle owner or other person authorised for use
of the vehicle. Exceptions are specified in the con-
tractual arrangements, or are subject to generally
binding regulations.
Due to legal requirements, ŠKODA AUTO is required
to monitor the quality and safety of its products,
meaning that it is only entitled to use data from the
EDR to monitor the product on the market, for fur-
ther research and development, and to improve the
quality of the vehicle's safety systems. For the pur-
pose of research and development, ŠKODA AUTO
will also make data available to third parties. This is
done exclusively in anonymous form, i.e. without any
connection to the specific vehicle, the vehicle owner
or any other authorised user.
Information about the radio systems in
the vehicle
Your vehicle has various radio systems.
Manufacturers of this radio equipment declare that
this equipment complies with the requirements of
Directive 2014/53 / EU and the Technical Regula-
tion on Radio Equipment, approved by the Deci-
sion of the Cabinet of Ministers of Ukraine of 25
May 2017 no. 355.
To display information about Directive 2014/53 /
EUon the approximation of the laws of the Member
States relating to the marketing of radio equipment,
Technical regulation on radio equipment, approved
by the decision of the Cabinet of Ministers of Uk-
raine of May 25, 2017 No. 355 as well as regarding
declaration of conformity ,proceed as follows.
1. Import the QR code or enter the following ad-
dress in the web browser.
http://go.skoda.eu/owners-manuals
2. Click on “Choose your manual”.
3. Select the desired model - a menu with the in-
structions will be displayed.
4. Select the construction period and the language.
5. Choose the Information on Directive 2014/53 /
EU or Information on the Technical Regulations
on Radio Systems No. 355 file in PDF format.
Rights arising from defective
performance, ŠKODA Warranty for new
cars, ŠKODA Mobility Warranty and
Optional ŠKODA Extended Warranty
Rights arising from defective performance
Your ŠKODA Partner, as a seller, is liable to you for
material defects in your new ŠKODA vehicle, ŠKODA
Genuine Parts and ŠKODA Genuine Accessories, in
accordance with the legal requirements and the pur-
chase contract.
The buyer is entitled to assert the rights arising from
defective performance with the responsible ŠKODA
partner from the time of vehicle handover. The date
of the vehicle handover is properly documented to-
gether with the vehicle identification number (VIN) in
the chapter "Documentation of vehicle handover" in
this Owner's Manual.
ŠKODA warranty for new cars
Beyond the rights arising from defective perform-
ance under the law, the company ŠKODA AUTO
grants you the ŠKODA warranty for new cars (here-
inafter referred to as ŠKODA Warranty), according
to the conditions described below.
Under the ŠKODA Warranty, the company ŠKODA
AUTO shall provide the following services.
▶
Free repair of damage due to a defect that occurs
in your vehicle within two years of the start of the
ŠKODA Warranty.
▶
Free repair of damage due to paintwork flaws that
occur on your vehicle within three years of the
start of the ŠKODA Warranty.
▶
Free repair of rust corrosion on the body, which
occurs on your vehicle within twelve years of the
start of the warranty. In terms of rust corrosion on
the body, the ŠKODA Warranty shall cover only
rust corrosion through body panels from the inside
to the outside.
The start of the ŠKODA Warranty is the day on
which the new car is handed over for use by a ŠKO-
DA partner to the first buyer who is not a ŠKODA
Partner
1)
.
The ŠKODA Partner enters this date into the corre-
sponding systems of the manufacturer. Any one
ŠKODA Partner can notify you of this date on re-
quest.
Vehicle repairs under the ŠKODA Warranty can be
carried out by means of a replacement or repair of
the defective parts. The ŠKODA Service Partner de-
cides about the type of vehicle repair. The vehicle re-
pair takes place in accordance with the availability of
the ŠKODA Service partners and within a reasonable
1)
Due to the requirements of the generally binding country-specific legal regulations, the date of the first
registration can be specified instead of the date of the vehicle handover.
168
Technical data and specifications › Information about the radio systems in the vehicle
period of time. Replaced parts become the property
of the ŠKODA service partner.
There shall be no entitlement to further claims from
the ŠKODA Warranty. In particular, no claim for re-
placement, no right of withdrawal, no claim to provi-
sion of a replacement car for the duration of repair
and compensation.
The ŠKODA Warranty can be claimed at any ŠKODA
service partner.
There are no claims under the ŠKODA warranty if
vehicle damage has occurred in causal connection
with one of the following circumstances.
▶
The service work was not carried out on time and
professionally according to the specifications of
ŠKODA AUTO, or its execution was not proven by
the customer when asserting claims under the
ŠKODA Warranty.
▶
Damage refers to parts that are subject to natural
wear, such as tyres, spark plugs, wiper blades,
brake pads and brake discs, clutch, bulbs, syn-
chronizer rings, batteries, etc.
▶
The damage refers to third-party superstructures,
third-party installations and third-party installa-
tions as well as defects in the vehicle caused by
these.
▶
The same applies to accessories that were not in-
stalled and/or delivered by the factory.
▶
On/in the vehicle, parts have been attached, instal-
led or connected, the use of which has not been
approved by ŠKODA AUTO, or the vehicle has
been modified in a manner not approved by ŠKO-
DA AUTO (e.g. tuning).
▶
Unauthorized use, improper handling (e.g. use in
motor sport competitions or overloading), improp-
er care and maintenance or unauthorized modifica-
tions to your vehicle.
▶
Failure to comply with regulations in the Owner's
Manual or in other factory-supplied instructions.
▶
External impact or influences (e.g. accident, hail,
flood, etc.).
▶
Damage has not been reported immediately to a
specialist company or has not been properly rem-
edied.
The customer shall prove the lack of causation.
The present ŠKODA Warranty shall not aect the
purchaser's statutory rights arising from unsatisfac-
tory performance in respect of the seller of the vehi-
cle and possible claims arising from product liability
laws.
ŠKODA Mobility warranty
The Mobility Warranty provides you with a sense of
certainty for journeys in your vehicle.
As part of the mobility warranty, if your car breaks
down as a result of an unexpected fault when you
are on the move, you can access services to ensure
your continued mobility. These services include the
following: Breakdown service at the breakdown lo-
cation and towing to the ŠKODA Service Partner,
technical assistance by phone or on-site operation.
If your vehicle is not repaired on the same day, then
the ŠKODA service partner may, if necessary, ar-
range additional subsequent services, such as re-
placement transport (bus, train, etc.), the provision of
a replacement vehicle, and the like.
Claims for free provision of services under the ŠKO-
DA Mobility Warranty only exist if your vehicle has
remained in a causal connection with a defect which
is to be remedied on the basis of fulfilment under the
ŠKODA Warranty.
Check the conditions for provision of the Mobility
Warranty for your vehicle with your ŠKODA Partner.
They will also inform you of the detailed terms and
conditions of the Mobility Warranty in relation to
your vehicle. In the event that your vehicle is not
covered by a mobility warranty, he will inform you of
the possibilities for subsequent conclusion.
Optional ŠKODA Extended Warranty
If you also purchased a ŠKODA warranty extension
when purchasing your new car, ŠKODA AUTO will
provide you with a free repair of vehicle damage
caused by a defect in the vehicle during the warranty
period.
The ŠKODA Extended Warranty for your vehicle is
valid for the agreed period or until the agreed mile-
age limit is reached, whichever comes first.
For the evaluation of claims under the ŠKODA Exten-
ded Warranty, the same rules apply as for the ŠKO-
DA Warranty.
The vehicle repair under the ŠKODA Extended War-
ranty can therefore only be carried out by replace-
ment or repair of the defective parts, whereby the
ŠKODA service partner decides on the type of vehi-
cle repair. The vehicle repair takes place in accord-
ance with the availability of the ŠKODA Service part-
ners and within a reasonable period of time.
There shall in any case be no entitlement to further
claims from the ŠKODA Extended Warranty. In par-
ticular, no claim for replacement, no right of with-
drawal, no claim to provision of a replacement car
for the duration of repair and compensation.
The ŠKODA Extended Warranty does not apply to
exterior and interior foils.
Your ŠKODA partner will provide you with informa-
tion about the detailed conditions of the ŠKODA Ex-
tended Warranty.
The ŠKODA Mobility Warranty and the ŠKODA
Extended Warranty are only available in some coun-
tries.
169
Technical data and specifications › Rights arising from defective performance, ŠKODA Warranty for new cars, ŠKODA Mobility Warranty and Optional ŠKODA Extended Warranty
Index
A
ABS
Functionality
120
Troubleshooting 120
ACC 124
Automatic stop and start 124
Distance adjustment
124
Functionality 124
Indicator light 124
Interruption of cruise control
125
Lever 124
Operation 124
Restriction 125
Setting in Infotainment 125
Troubleshooting
125
Accident data recorder 167
Active steering assistance
DSR 120
Adaptive Cruise Control
see ACC
124
AdBlue 135
Check 136
functionality 136
Indicator light
136
Refilling 136
Safety 14
standard 135
tank capacity 136
Air bag
Switch o
37
Air conditioning system
see Climatronic 47
Airbag 37
Deployment 37
Functionality
37
Overview 37
Safety 15
Switching o front passenger airbag 38
Troubleshooting 37
Alarm system
22
Conditions 22
Deactivation 22
Functionality 22
Setting
22
Trailer 22
All-season tyres
Conditions 145
Settings 145
Usage
145
What you should be mindful of 145
Ambient lighting 43
Analogue
instrument panel
48
Analogue instrument cluster
Overview 48
Setting 48
Analogue instrument panel
48
Android Auto
Infotainment Amundsen 103
Infotainment Bolero 81
Infotainment Swing 65
see electronic version of the manual
5
Anti-lock Braking System
see ABS 120
Anti-Slip Regulation
see ASR 120
Apple CarPlay
Infotainment Amundsen
103
Infotainment Bolero 81
Infotainment Swing 65
see electronic version of the manual 5
Armrest
Front 29
Rear 29
Ashtray 157
ASR
Deactivation and activation
120
Functionality 120
Troubleshooting 120
Assist systems
Driver assist
120
Park Assist 128
Assistance systems
Safety 16
Automatic gearbox
114
Driving in neutral 114
indicator light 115
Kick-down 114
Lever positions 114
Manually changing gear with the selector lever
114
manually changing gear with the shift paddles on
the steering wheel 114
Operation
114
Releasing selector lever 114
Selector lever emergency unlocking 115
Starting up 114
Stopping 114
Troubleshooting
115
Automatic gearbox modes 114
Automatic headlights system
Setting 40
Automatic transmission
Starting
111, 112
B
Backup camera
Functional surfaces 129
Orientation 129
Battery
see vehicle battery 139
Battery acid
139
Blinker
see flashing light 39
170
Index
Bluetooth
see electronic version of the manual 5
Bonnet 132
Boot 151
12 volt socket 151
Double-sided floor covering
153
Fasteners 151
Hitch switch 151
Rigid cover 154
Storage compartments 151
Transporting objects safely
16
Variable loading floor 154
Boot cover 154
Boot lid
Automatic locking 26
electrical operation 26
manual operation 26
Boot storage
see boot compartment lid 26
Brake fluid
119
Checking 119
Indicator light 119
Safety 14
Specification 119
Brakes
118
Brake fluid 119
Hand brake 119
Troubleshooting 119
What you should be mindful of
118
Braking systems 120
Breakdown call
Infotainment Amundsen 105
Infotainment Bolero 83
Infotainment Swing
67
Breakdown kit
Conditions 148
Overview 147
Purpose
148
Restriction 148
Bulbs 42
Rear turn signal - Replacing 42
Reversing light - Replacing 43
Safety
42
C
Car adaptations
Recommendations 161
Car wash
Outside 163
Cargo elements 151
Central locking
19
Central locking system
Button 20
Fault 20
Functionality 19
Operation
20
SAFE function 19
Setting 20
Centre console
9
Changing gear
Manually changing gear with the selector lever
114
manually changing gear with the shift paddles on
the steering wheel
114
Changing gear with a
manual gearbox 113
Changing gears with an
automatic gearbox 114
Changing the
protective door strip
23
Charging your phone wirelessly 156
Check the vehicle before your journey 14
Child lock 23
Child seat 33
Child seat fastened with a belt 35
Grouping 34
i-Size 35
Installation
36
ISOFIX 35, 36
Keyword child seat 33
On the passenger seat 33
Recommended child seats 34
Safety
15
Securing children properly 15
TOP TETHER 36
What you should be mindful of 33
Cigarette lighter
157
Cleaning the vehicle
Outside 162
Climatronic
Automatic mode 47
Climatronic Display
47
Operating conditions for the cooling system 47
Operation 47
Recirculated air mode 47
Setting
47
Setting the blower speed 47
Troubleshooting 48
What you should be mindful of 47
COMING HOME 41
functionality
41
Operating conditions 41
Setting 41
Compartments 155
Configuration wizard
Infotainment Amundsen
86
Infotainment Bolero 70
Infotainment Swing 54
Control centre
Infotainment Amundsen
85
Control Centre
Infotainment Bolero 69
Infotainment Swing 53
Convenience signalling
39
Setting 40
Coolant 133
Checking 134
171
Index
Indicator light 134
Refilling 134
Safety 14
Specification 134
Temperature gauge 133
Troubleshooting
134
Crew Protect Assist
Functionality 127
see Proactive occupant protection 127
Troubleshooting 128
Crew Protect Assist system
Deactivation
127
Cruise control 123
Functionality 123
Indicator light 123
Operation 123
Troubleshooting 124
Cup holder 157
D
Date
Infotainment Amundsen 86
Infotainment Bolero 70
Infotainment Swing
54
Daytime running lights 39
Diesel 138
Misfuelling protection 138
Prescribed fuel 138
Refilling
138
Requirements for refuelling 138
Standards 138
Tank capacity 138
Troubleshooting
138
Digital
instrument cluster 49
Digital instrument cluster 49
Additional Information 49, 50
Overview
49
Presentation 49
Setting 49
Display of the instrument cluster
Operation
50
Door
Opening/closing 23
Door protect
see door protection strip 23
Door protection strip
functionality
23
Double-sided floor covering in the boot
Double-sided floor covering 153
DriveGreen 116
Driver Alert
Activation/deactivation
128
fatigue detection assistant 128
Functionality 128
Indicator light 128
Driver's seat
9
Driving data 51
Display
51
Memory 51, 52
Overview 51
Setting 52
Speed limit warning 52
Driving with trailer
Safety
16
Trailer Stability Assist 120
DSR 120
E
Earth point 141
Economical driving
Drive Green 116
Tips for economical driving
116
EDL 120
Electric windows
Activation 25
Buttons on the door
24
Force limiter 24
Operation 24
Settings 25
Troubleshooting 25
Electronic Dierential Lock
EDL
120
XDL+ 120
Electronic Stability Control 120
Emergency
Emergency call
17
Selector lever emergency unlocking 115
Towing the vehicle 118
Unlocking/locking the door 20
Using jump start cables
140
Emergency call 17
Emergency equipment
Extinguisher 151
First aid kit
151
Jack 151
Reflective vest 151
Tool kit 151
Warning triangle 151
Emergency wheel
145
Safe driving 16
Take out and insert 146
Engine compartment 10
Bonnet 132
Brake fluid
119
Coolant 133
Engine oil 133
Safety 14
Vehicle battery
139
Windscreen washer fluid 44, 45
Engine number 164
Engine oil 133
Changing 133
Checking
133
Indicator light 133
Refilling 133
172
Index
Safety 14
Specification 133
Engine start
Ignition lock 111
Starter button 112
Troubleshooting
112
Using jump start cables 140
EPC 134
Equipment in the boot 151
ESC 120
Functionality
120
Troubleshooting 120
Exhaust control system 135
Explanations 6
Exterior
lighting 39
Exterior mirror 31
External Mirrors
Adjust the position of the mirror surface and the
mirror housing
31
Extinguisher 151
F
Fasteners in the boot 151
First aid kit 151
Fog light
Rear 40
Fog lights 40
Front
40
Fogged windows 47
Folding table 158
Freewheeling
See Driving in neutral
114
Front Assist 121
automatic braking 121
distance warning system 121
Functionality 121
Operating conditions
121
restriction 121
setting 121
Troubleshooting 121
Front seats
Electrical adjustment
28
Manual adjustment 28
Front vehicle area 7
Fuel
Diesel
138
Petrol 136
Fuel filler flap 135
Fuel filter 135
Fuel tank 135
Opening the flap
135
Full LED headlights 39
Fuses
Blown fuse 141
In the dash panel 141
In the engine compartment
143
Replacing 141
H
Handbrake 119
Hazard warning light system 40
Headlights
Full LED 39
Full LED setting 40
Headlight range control 40
Headrests
Adjusting the height
29
Removing and inserting 29
Heated
steering wheel
31
Heated seats
Conditions 30
Heated steering wheel
Conditions
30
Operation 31
Settings 31
Heated windscreen
Operation
25
Setting 26
Heating 46
HHC
see Hill Hold Control 120
High beam assist system
Functionality
41
High-beam
High-beam assist system 41
High-beam assist
Activation and deactivation in the infotainment
system 41
Conditions
41
Switching o 41
Switching on 41
High-beam assist system 41
Hill Hold Control
120
Hook
In the interior 155
Hooks
in the boot 151
Hotspot
see electronic version of the manual
5
I
i-Size 35
Ice scraper 8
Ignition lock 111
Images
see electronic version of the manual
5
Images - Infotainment Amundsen
Gesture control 95
Main menu overview 95
Settings 96
Show main menu
95
Supported sources 96
Touch operation 95
Immobilizer 112
Indicator lights
173
Index
Foreword 10
Overview 10
Information call
Infotainment Amundsen 105
Infotainment Bolero 83
Infotainment swing
67
Infotainment Amundsen
Contactless operation 87
Function restriction 86
Keypad 88
Operation by touch
87
Overview 85
Restart 86
System update 87
System version 87
Voice control 89
Infotainment Amundsen overview 85
Infotainment Bolero
Contactless operation 71
Function restriction
70
Keypad 71
Operation by touch 71
Overview 69
Restart 70
System update
70
System version 70
Infotainment control centre
Infotainment Amundsen 85
Infotainment keyboard
see electronic version of the manual
5
Infotainment keyboard Amundsen
Additional keypad languages 88
Character variants 88
Find
88
Service 88
Setting additional keypad languages 89
Infotainment keypad Amundsen
Overview
88
Infotainment keypad Bolero
Additional keypad languages 72
Character variants 72
Overview 71
Search
72
Service 72
Setting additional keypad languages 72
Infotainment keypad Swing
Additional keypad languages
56
Character variants 56
Find 56
Operation 56
Overview 55
Setting additional keypad languages
56
Infotainment Operation Centre
Infotainment Bolero 69
Infotainment Swing 53
Infotainment overview Bolero
69
Infotainment Overview Swing 53
Infotainment screen Amundsen
Overview 87
Settings
88
Infotainment screen Bolero
Overview 71
Settings 71
Infotainment screen Swing
Overview
55
Settings 55
Infotainment Swing
contactless operation 55
Contactless operation 55
Function restriction
54
Keypad 55
Operation by touch 55
Overview 53
Restart 54
System update 54
System version 54
Touch operation 55
Instrument cluster
Instrument cluster display
50
Instrument cluster display 50
Menu 50
Overview 50
Interior
lighting
43
Interior lighting 43
Ambient lighting 43
Operation 43
Settings
43
Interior monitoring - Deactivation 22
Interior rear-view mirror 31
see interior rear-view mirror 31
ISOFIX
Functionality
36
Use of child seats 35
J
Jump start cables 141
Jump-starting 140
K
Key
Changing the battery 19
Overview 19
Troubleshooting 19
Key switch for switching o airbag
38
Keyless locking (KESSY) 21
Deactivation 21
Operation 21
Protection against locking the key inside the
vehicle
21
Purpose 21
Troubleshooting 21
L
Lane Assist
126
Conditions 126
Restriction 126
174
Index
see Lane Assist 126
Setting 126
Troubleshooting 126
Lane change assist system
see Side Assist 126
LEAVING HOME
41
functionality 41
Operating conditions 41
Setting 41
Lever
ACC
124
Cruise control 123
High beam 39
High-beam assist 41
Speed limiter 122
Turn signal 39
Windscreen wiper and washer 44
Liability for defects 168
Light 39
Change bulbs
42
Changing bulbs 42
Clean headlights 44
CORNER function 39
Daytime running lights 39
Driving in the opposite direction of trac
40
Fog light 40
Full LED headlights 39
Hazard warning lights 40
Headlight range control of the headlights
40
High beam 39
High-beam assist system 41
Indicator light 41
Low beam 39, 40
Parking light
40
Sidelights 40
Switching on and o 39
Switching on and o automatically 39, 40
Troubleshooting
41
Turn signal 39
Light Assist
see high beam assist system 41
Light switch 39
Lighting
Ambient lighting
43
Lighting range 40
Limiter
see speed limiter
122
List of radio stations
see electronic version of the manual 5
Loads 165
Lock
Setting
20
Locking
Central locking button 20
Emergency locking 20
functionality
19
Keyless 21
Low beam 39, 40
Luggage compartment
Fastening nets
152
Net partition 153
Storage pocket 153
Luggage Storage
removable light 151
M
Main beam 39
Manoeuvre Assist
Operating conditions
130
Restriction 130
Troubleshooting
130
Manual air conditioning
Operating conditions for the cooling system 46
Operation
46
Recirculated air mode 46
see manual air conditioning 46
Troubleshooting 47
What you should be mindful of
46
Manual gearbox 113
MCB 120
Media
Playlist 93
see electronic version of the manual
5
Media - Infotainment Amundsen
Main menu 92
Manage favourites 93
Service
92
Settings 93
Supported audio files 93
Supported playlists 93
Supported sources 93
Supported video files
93
Trac news 93
what you should be mindful of 92
Media - Infotainment Bolero
iCloud
75
Main menu 75
Operation 75
Play online media from an Apple device 75
safely remove the connected USB device 75
Settings
75
Supported audio files 76
Supported playlists 76
Supported sources 76
things to be considered 74
Title playback including subfolders
75
Trac 75
Media - Infotainment Swing
iCloud 59
Main menu
59
Play online media from an Apple device 59
Safely remove the connected USB device 59
Service 59
Settings 59
Supported audio files
60
Supported playlists 60
Supported sources 60
175
Index
Title playback including subfolders 59
Trac news 59
what you should be mindful of 58
Mirror
see exterior mirror 31
MirrorLink
Infotainment Amundsen
103
Infotainment Bolero 81
Infotainment Swing 65
see electronic version of the manual 5
Mirrors
Set functions
31
Troubleshooting 32
Mobile device management - Infotainment
Amundsen
Connect a mobile device to Infotainment 98
Connect Infotainment to a non-paired mobile
device 98
Connect Infotainment to a previously connected
mobile device
98
Mobile Device Management - Infotainment
Amundsen
Applications in mobile devices 98
Mobile device Bluetooth compatibility 98
Mobile device compatibility
98
Overview 97
Show main menu 97
SmartLink connection 98
Mobile device management - Infotainment Bolero
Applications in mobile devices
77
Bluetooth compatibility of mobile devices 77
Compatibility of mobile devices 77
Connect a mobile device to Infotainment 78
Connect Infotainment to a non-paired mobile
device
78
Connect Infotainment to a previously connected
mobile device 78
Mobile Device Management - Infotainment Bolero
Display main menu
77
Overview 77
SmartLink connection 78
Mobile device management - Infotainment Swing
Connect a mobile device to Infotainment
62
Connect Infotainment to a non-paired mobile
device 62
Connect Infotainment to a previously connected
mobile device
62
Mobile Device Management - Infotainment Swing
Applications in mobile devices 61
Mobile device Bluetooth compatibility 61
Mobile device compatibility 61
Overview
61
Show main menu 61
SmartLink connection 62
Motor Slip Regulation
see MSR
120
MSR 120
Multi-Collision Brake
see MCB 120
Multimedia holder
157
N
Navigation - infotainment Amundsen
Fuel warning 110
Navigation - Infotainment Amundsen
Automatic update
111
Business address 110
Change route destinations 106
Delete the recommended destination
106
Demo mode 110
Destination information 110
Driving with a trailer
110
Enter destination via the address
106
Find destination 106
Home address 110
Information on driving time
110
List of stored destinations 106
Map overview 106
Navigation announcements 106
Navigation database version 111
POI categories
110
Recommended destinations 106
Route calculation 106
Route summary 106
Select destination in the map
106
Select destination you are looking for 106
Select the stored destination 106
Set navigation announcements 110
Settings 110
Show main menu 106
Speed limit warning 110
Speed limits
110
Starting point of demo mode 110
Touch operation 109
Trac density 106
Trac obstruction
110
Trac sign display 110
Update the navigation database 111
Net partition 153
Nets in the luggage compartment 152
O
Oil
see engine oil 133
Online services - Infotainment Amundsen
Breakdown call
105
Connection status 106
Delete users 106
Information call
105
Registration and activation of online services 106
Registration and activation of online services in
Infotainment 106
Rights and obligations 105
Set the level of protection for personal data
106
Settings 106
ŠKODA Connect application 105
ŠKODA Connect Portal website 105
176
Index
ŠKODA Connect website 105
Switch data services on / o 106
Use of data services 106
Online Services - Infotainment Bolero
Breakdown call 83
Connection status
84
Delete user 84
Information call 83
Registration and activation of online services 84
Rights and obligations 83
Service management
84
Setting the level of protection of personal data 84
Settings 84
ŠKODA Connect Application 83
ŠKODA Connect Portal Website 83
ŠKODA Connect Website 83
Online Services - Infotainment Swing
Breakdown call 67
Connection status 68
Delete user
68
Information call 67
Registration and activation of online services 68
Rights and obligations 67
Service management 68
Setting the level of protection of personal data
68
Settings 68
ŠKODA Connect Application 67
ŠKODA Connect Portal Website 67
ŠKODA Connect Website
67
Online services ŠKODA Connect
Infotainment Swing 67
Operating Infotainment Amundsen
by language 89
Operation of Infotainment Amundsen
by touch
87
contactless 87
Operation of Infotainment Bolero
by touch
71
contactless 71
Overspeed limiter
functionality 122
P
Park Assist
Change parking mode 131
exiting from a longitudinal parking space 132
functionality
131
Operating conditions 131
Operation 131
Parking 131
Parking operation
131
Purpose 130
Restriction 132
see park steering assistant 130
Troubleshooting 132
Turn on/turn o
131
What you should be mindful of 130
Park Assist systems 128
Park Pilot
Operating conditions 128
Operation 128
Restriction 129
Setting 129
Troubleshooting
129
Parking
Park steering assistant 130
Parking aid 128
Parking the vehicle safely 17
Rear Trac Alert
130
Reversing camera 129
Parking aid
functionality 128
Overview 128
Parking brake 119
Parking light 40
ParkPilot
see parking aid 128
Particle filter
135
Particle Filter
Troubleshooting 135
Particulate Filter
Cleaning 135
Passenger seat
9
Pedestrian detection
functionality 121
operating conditions 122
Petrol
136
Prescribed fuel 137
Prescribed petrol 137
Refilling 137
Requirements for refuelling 137
standards
136
Tank capacity 137
Troubleshooting 137
Phonebox
Functionality
156
operating conditions 156
What you should be mindful of 156
Pictures - Infotainment Amundsen
Supported files 96
Power assisted steering
30
Practical equipment 155
12 volt socket 151, 155, 158
Ashtray 157
Cigarette lighter
157
Coat hook 155
cup holder 157
Folding table 158
Make up mirror 155
Multimedia holder
157
Spectacles compartment 155
Storage compartment for the umbrella 156
Storage compartment under the front seat 156
Storage compartments
155
Storage pockets 155
Ticket holder 155
Waste container 157
177
Index
R
Radio
see electronic version of the manual 5
Radio - Infotainment Amundsen
Arrow buttons 91
Assign station logo 91
Automatic station logo assignment 91
Delete favourites 91
Find stations manually
90
Information on the station 91
List of available stations 90
Main menu overview
90
Other DAB announcements 91
Radio text 91
RDS 91
Regional station logo
91
Restriction 90
Save station to favourites from station list 91
Save station to favourites from the main menu 91
SCAN function
90
Select station 90
Settings 91
Show main menu 90
Stations displayed in the list of available stations
91
Switch o the station logo display 91
Switch to a similar station if reception is poor 91
Trac programme (TP) 91
Radio - Infotainment Bolero
Arrow keys 73
Assign station logo 73
Automatic assignment of the station logo
73
Automatic frequency change (AF) 73
Change from DAB station to similar FM station 73
Change from DAB station to similar FM station in
event of weak signal
73
Change from the DAB station to the same DAB
station 73
Change to a regionally linked FM station 73
DAB trac 73
Delete favourites
73
Delete station logo 73
Display main menu 72
Information about the station 73
List of available stations
72
Main menu overview 72
other DAB announcements 73
Radio text 73
RDS 73
Regional station logos
73
Restriction 73
Save station to favourites from station list 73
Save station to favourites from the main menu 73
SCAN function
72
Search for stations manually 72
Select station 72
Settings 73
Sort stations in the list of available stations 73
Trac
Radio (TP) 73
Radio - Infotainment Swing
Arrow buttons 57
Assign station logo 57
Automatic frequency control (AF) 57
Automatic station logo assignment
57
Change from DAB station to similar FM station 57
Change from DAB station to similar FM station in
event of weak signal 57
Change from the DAB station to the same DAB
station
57
Change to a regionally linked FM station 57
DAB trac 57
Delete favourites 57
Delete station logo 57
Find stations manually 56
Information on the station 57
List of available stations 56
Main menu overview 56
Other DAB announcements
57
Radio text 57
RDS 57
Regional station logo 57
Restriction 57
Save station to favourites from station list
57
Save station to favourites from the main menu 57
SCAN function 56
Select station 56
Settings
57
Show main menu 56
Sort stations in the list of available stations 57
Trac programme (TP) 57
Rear fog light 40
Rear seats
Folding down
28
Rear Trac Alert
Functionality 130
Setting
130
Rear vehicle area 8
Rear View Camera
Operation 130
Refilling
AdBlue
136
Coolant 134
Diesel 138
Engine oil 133
Petrol
137
Reflective vest 151
Removable light
Overview 153
Replace batteries 154
Take out and insert
153
Restarting Infotainment Amundsen 86
Restarting Infotainment Swing 54
Restarting the Infotainment Bolero 70
Reversing camera
functionality
129
Operating conditions 129
Overview 129
178
Index
Restriction 130
Rights arising from defective performance 168
Rigid boot cover 154
Roof rack 159
Roof load 159
Safe driving
16
S
Safe driving 16
SAFE function
Description 19
Turn o
20
Safely remove connected USB device
Infotainment Bolero 70
Infotainment Swing
54
Safety
after an accident 18
Airbag 15
Assistance systems
16
Belt webbing arrangement 15
Car adaptations 13
Child seat 15
Correct seating position 14
Driving through water
16
Driving with a trailer 16
Emergency call 17
Engine compartment 14
Exiting the vehicle
17
Indicator lights 16
New brake pads 13
New tyres 13
Operating fluids 14
Parking
17
regular checks 13
Roof rack 16
Running in the engine 13
safe driving
16
Sensors and cameras 13
Sockets 14
Spare and emergency wheel 16
Transporting cargo 16
Transporting children
15
Transporting objects 16
Vehicle battery 14
weather conditions 17
Seat
Heating
30
Seat belts 32
Adjusting the height 33
Automatic belt retractor 32
Belt tensioners
32
Blocked strap 33
Fastening and unfastening 33
Reversible belt tensioner 32
Status display in the instrument cluster display 32
Troubleshooting
33
Seat heating
Operation 30
What you should be mindful of
29
Seatbelts
Correct arrangement 15
Seats
Adjusting the headrests 29
Electrical adjustment
28
Folding down 28
folding passenger seat backrest 28
ISOFIX 36
Manual adjustment 28
Sitting safely
14
TOP TETHER 36
Selector lever 114
Service event
Interval 161
Proof 161
Reset information 161
Show appointment 161
Service work 161
Set the MENU menu
Infotainment Bolero
70
Infotainment Swing 54
Setting the HOME menu
Infotainment Amundsen 86
Setting the MENU menu
Infotainment Amundsen
86
Side Assist
Functionality 126
operating conditions
127
Purpose 126
Restrictions 127
Setting 127
Troubleshooting 127
Sidelights
see Parking light
40
ŠKODA Connect application
Infotainment Amundsen 105
ŠKODA Connect Application
Infotainment Bolero
83
Infotainment Swing 67
ŠKODA Connect online services
Infotainment Amundsen 105
ŠKODA Connect Online services
Infotainment Bolero
83
Sliding/tilting sunroof
electric operation of the sun blinds 25
SmartLink
see electronic version of the manual
5
SmartLink - Infotainment Amundsen
Android Auto 103
Android Auto - Connection via USB 104
Android Auto - Disconnection
104
Android Auto connection conditions 103
Apple CarPlay 103
Apple CarPlay - Connection via USB 104
Apple CarPlay - Connection via Wi-Fi from
Infotainment
104
Apple CarPlay - connection via Wi-Fi from mobile
devices 104
179
Index
Apple CarPlay - Disconnection 104
Apple CarPlay connection conditions 103
Change to another connection type 104
Change to another device 104
Functionality 103
General connection conditions
103
Main menu 103
MirrorLink 103
MirrorLink - Connection via USB 104
MirrorLink - Disconnection 104
MirrorLink connection conditions
103
Mobile device management 98
Navigation restriction 104
Operating the running MirrorLink application 104
Restriction while driving 104
Route guidance restriction 109
Show main menu 103
Supported connection types 103
SmartLink - Infotainment Bolero
Android Auto
81
Android Auto – connection via USB 82
Android Auto – connection via Wi-Fi from
Infotainment 82
Android Auto – disconnection 82
Android Auto connection conditions
82
Apple CarPlay 81
Apple CarPlay – connection via USB 82
Apple CarPlay – connection via Wi-Fi from
Infotainment
82
Apple CarPlay – connection via Wi-Fi from mobile
devices 82
Apple CarPlay – disconnection 82
Apple CarPlay connection conditions 82
Change to another connection type
82
Change to another device 82
Display main menu 81
Functionality 81
General connection conditions
82
Main menu 81
MirrorLink 81
MirrorLink – connection via USB 82
MirrorLink – connection via Wi-Fi from
Infotainment
82
MirrorLink – disconnection 82
MirrorLink connection conditions 82
Mobile device management 78
Operation of the MirrorLink running application
82
Restriction of the Wi-Fi connection 82
Restrictions while driving 82
supported connection types 81
SmartLink - Infotainment Swing
Android Auto
65
Android Auto – connection via USB 66
Android Auto – connection via Wi-Fi from
Infotainment
66
Android Auto – disconnection 66
Android Auto connection conditions 66
Apple CarPlay 65
Apple CarPlay – connection via USB
66
Apple CarPlay – connection via Wi-Fi from
Infotainment 66
Apple CarPlay – connection via Wi-Fi from mobile
devices 66
Apple CarPlay – disconnection
66
Apple CarPlay connection conditions 66
Change to another connection type 66
Change to another device 66
Display main menu 65
Functionality
65
General connection conditions 66
Main menu 65
MirrorLink 65
MirrorLink – connection via USB 66
MirrorLink – connection via Wi-Fi from
Infotainment 66
MirrorLink – disconnection 66
MirrorLink connection conditions 66
Mobile device management
62
Operation of the MirrorLink application 66
Restriction of the Wi-Fi connection 66
Restrictions while driving 66
supported connection types 65
Snow chains
Conditions
145
Usage 145
Sockets
12-volt socket
158
Safety 14
Sound
Infotainment Amundsen 86
Infotainment Bolero 70
Infotainment Swing
54
Spare wheel 145
Safe driving 16
Take out and insert 146
Speed limit warning
52
Setting 52
Speed limiter
Indicator light 122
Operation 122
Troubleshooting
123
Stabilising systems 120
START STOP 113
START-STOP
functionality
113
indicator light 113
Operating conditions 113
Purpose 113
Settings 113
Troubleshooting
113
Starter button
Notes on starting 112
Stopping the engine 112
Switching the ignition on and o
112
Troubleshooting 112
Steering column lock 30
Steering wheel
180
Index
Correct position 15
Dials/buttons 50
manually changing gear with the shift paddles on
the steering wheel 114
Set position 30
Troubleshooting
30
Stopping the engine
Ignition lock 111
Starter button 112
Storage 155
Storage pocket
153
Sun protection
Activating sun visor operation 25
electric operation of the sun blinds 25
Operation of the sun visors 25
Supported media files
see electronic version of the manual 5
Switch o front passenger airbag
Indicator lights 38
Key switch
38
Status display in the instrument cluster display 38
Switching low beam on automatically 39
System update
Infotainment Amundsen 87
Infotainment Bolero
70
Infotainment Swing 54
T
Tailgate
Settings 27
Troubleshooting 27
Tank capacity
Diesel
138
Petrol 137
Technical data 164
Technical specifications
Consumption 164
Dimensions
166
Emission standard 164
engine specifications 166
maximum permitted weights 165
Telephone - Infotainment Amundsen
Conference call
99
Connect Infotainment to a telephone 100
Connect the telephone to Infotainment 100
Connection conditions 99
Display accepted text messages
99
Enter phone number 99
Establish a connection to the voice mailbox number
99
Import phone contacts
100
Infotainment telephone connection types 100
List of telephone contacts 99
Main menu overview 98
Manage preset buttons for preferred contacts
100
Note about an incoming SMS / email 100
Ringer 100
Send email
99
Send text message 99
Show main menu 98
Show received emails 99
Simultaneous calls 100
Sort contacts in the phonebook
100
Telephone call 99
Update phone contacts 100
Voice mailbox number 100
Telephone - Infotainment Bolero
Conference call
79
Connect the telephone to Infotainment 79
Connecting Infotainment with a telephone 79
Connection conditions 78
Display main menu 78
Enter telephone number 79
Establish a connection to the voice mailbox number
79
Import telephone contacts 79
List of telephone contacts
79
Main menu overview 78
Manage preset buttons for preferred contacts 79
Number of voice mailbox 79
Ringer 79
Simultaneous calls
79
Sort contacts in the phonebook 79
Telephone conversation 79
Telephone-Infotainment-Connection types 79
Update telephone contacts
79
Telephone - Infotainment Swing
Conference call 63
Connect Infotainment to a telephone 63
Connect the telephone to Infotainment 63
Connection conditions
62
Enter phone number 63
Establish a connection to the voice mailbox number
63
Import phone contacts
63
List of telephone contacts 63
Main menu overview 62
Manage preset buttons for preferred contacts 63
Ringer 63
Show main menu
62
Simultaneous calls 63
Sort contacts in the phonebook 63
Telephone call 63
Telephone-Infotainment-Connection types
63
Update phone contacts 63
Voice mailbox number 63
Time
Infotainment Amundsen 86
Infotainment Bolero
70
Infotainment Swing 54
Tiptronic
Manually changing gear with the selector lever
114
manually changing gear with the shift paddles on
the steering wheel 114
Tool 151
181
Index
Top speed 166
TOP TETHER 36
Topping up
Windscreen washer fluid 44, 45
Tow hitch 159
Towing a trailer
117
Towing eye 118
Towing the vehicle
Tow rope 118
Towing 118
Trac accident
Data recorder
167
Emergency call 17
Trailer 117
Coupling and uncoupling 159
Distribution of load 117
Driving with a trailer 117
Safe driving 16
Swing out the tow bar and back in 159
Trailer attachment
Vertical load
160
Trailer coupling
indicator light 160
Troubleshooting 160
What you should be mindful of
159
Trailer Stability Assist 120
Trailers
Permissible load 117
Transport
Transporting objects safely
16
Transporting
tow hitch 159
Transporting a
trailer
117
Transporting the
roof rack 159
TSA
see Trailer Stability Assist
120
Turn signal 39
Type plate 164
Tyre pressure monitor
Indicator light 149, 150
Restriction
149
Saving tyre pressure values 149
Troubleshooting 150
Tyre pressure change 149
Tyre pressure monitoring system
149
Tyres
All-season or winter tyres 145
Overview of the labelling 144
Pressure 149
Snow chains
145
Tyre pressure monitoring system 149
What you should be mindful of 144
U
Umbrella
156
Units
Infotainment Amundsen
86
Infotainment Bolero 70
Infotainment Swing 54
Unlock
Setting 20
Unlocking
Central locking button
20
Emergency unlocking 20
functionality 19
Keyless 21
the boot lid
27
Updating the infotainment system
see electronic version of the manual 5
USB 155
see electronic version of the manual 5
User account
see electronic version of the manual 5
User management
see electronic version of the manual 5
User Management - Infotainment Amundsen
Functionality
96
Management 97
Registration 97
V
Variable loading floor in the boot 154
Variable loading floor in the luggage compartment
Removal and insertion 155
Vehicle battery
139
Charging 139
Checking the condition 139
Discharge protection 139
Disconnecting and connecting
140
Indicator light 140
Safety 14
Troubleshooting 140
Vehicle cleaning
interior space
162
What you should be mindful of 162
Vehicle condition 52
Vehicle dimensions 166
Vehicle driving mode
115
Driving mode selection 115
Eco 115
Individual 115
Normal 115
Overview
115
Sport 115
Troubleshooting 116
Usage 115
Vehicle height 166
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
164
Vehicle length 166
Vehicle width 166
Video
see electronic version of the manual 5
VIN
see vehicle identification number
164
182
Index
Virtual cockpit
see digital instrument cluster 49
Voice control - Infotainment Amundsen
Functionality 89
Help 89
Operating conditions
89
Operation 89
Restriction 89
Settings 89
Volume when switching on the Infotainment
Infotainment Amundsen
86
Infotainment Bolero 70
Infotainment Swing 54
W
Warning triangle
151
Warranty
168
Extended warranty 169
Mobility warranty 169
Rights arising from defective performance 168
Warranty for new cars 168
Washers
Operating conditions
43
Waste container 157
Water in the fuel filter 135
Weight
Maximum allowed
165
payload
165
Wheels
Change
146, 147
Cover caps for the screws 150
Full wheel covers 150
Overview of tyre labelling
144
Spare wheel and emergency wheel 145
Troubleshooting 145
Tyre pressure 149
Tyre pressure monitoring system 149
What you should be mindful of
144
Wi-Fi - Infotainment Amundsen
Automatic connection using the QR code 102
Automatic WPS connection 102
Change password for connection to the
Infotainment hotspot
102
Change the name of the Infotainment hotspot 102
connect a mobile device to the Infotainment
hotspot 102
Connect Infotainment to the mobile device
hotspot
102
Data transmission to the connected device 102
Function restriction 102
Functionality
101
Manual WPS connection 102
Overview of available hotspots 101
Quick connection of the Infotainment to the
hotspot 102
Security level of the Infotainment hotspot
102
Tips for a perfect connection 102
Wi-Fi - Infotainment Bolero
Change password for connection to the
Infotainment hotspot 80
connect a mobile device to the Infotainment
hotspot 80
Functionality 80
Security level of the Infotainment hotspot
80
Wi-Fi - Infotainment Swing
Change password for connection to the
Infotainment hotspot 64
connect a mobile device to the Infotainment
hotspot
64
Functionality 64
Security level of the Infotainment hotspot 64
Window
electrical operation 24
heating 25
Mechanical operation 24
Window heating
Conditions 25
Troubleshooting
26
Usage 25
Windscreen washer fluid
indicator light 45
Refill washer fluid 44
Windscreen washer system
Operation
44
Refilling 44
Windscreen washing system
Windscreen washer fluid level too low
45
Windscreen wiper and washer
Automatic rear window wiper 44
Fold away windscreen wiper arms 45
Refill windscreen washer fluid 44
Replace the windscreen wiper blade
45
Windscreen wipers and washers
Operating conditions 43
Operation 44
Setting
44
Troubleshooting 45
Winter tires
Conditions 145
Winter tyres
Settings
145
Usage 145
What you should be mindful of 145
Wireless network
see electronic version of the manual
5
X
XDL +
120
183
Index
